Fanuc FA System For PC Operator

FA SYSTEM FOR PC
OPERATORS MANUAL
B75044EN/02
FANUC LTD, 1994
No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form. All specifications and designs are subject to change without notice. In this manual we have tried as much as possible to describe all the various matters. However, we cannot describe all the matters which must not be done, or which cannot be done, because there are so many possibilities. Therefore, matters which are not especially described as possible in this manual should be regarded as impossible
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
This manual includes safety precautions for protecting the user and preventing damage to the machine. Precautions are classified into Warnings and Cautions according to their bearing on safety. Also, supplementary information is described as Notes. Read the Warnings, Cautions, and Notes thoroughly before attempting to use the machine.
WARNING Applied when there is a danger of the user being injured or when there is a danger of both the user being injured and the equipment being damaged if the approved procedure is not observed.
CAUTION Applied when there is a danger of the equipment being damaged, if the approved procedure is not observed.
NOTE Notes is used to indicate supplementary information other than Warnings and Cautions.
Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.
s-1
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
B-75044EN/02
Precautions to Operate NC Machine

When you control an actual NC machine with the NC programs transferred by this software, please observe the following precautions for safety.
WARNING 1 Before attempting to use an NC program to control NC machines, ensure that those machines and tools that will be under the control of the NC program will operate safely. If an invalid NC program is used, or if NC program (confirmed as being satisfactory) is applied incorrectly, the machine and tool may behave unexpectedly, possibly damaging the tool, machine, and/or work-piece, and presenting the risk of injury to the operator and/or bystanders. 2 The software described herein does not check whether a transferring NC program is fully compatible with the target machine. When using the NC program to control an actual NC machine, Precaution 1 must be observed. 3 Due to deterioration of the storage medium, or as a result of errors introduced during communication, the NC program actually loaded into a machine might vary slightly from that originally created. Therefore, even when using an NC program that has already been used successfully with an actual machine, Precaution 1 must be observed. Note) In this document, the term NC program refers to programs that specify NC machine operations. Note that in NC machine manuals, machining program, part program, or program may be used in place of NC program. The above precautions are applied for these terms that have the same meaning of NC program.
s-2
B-75044EN/02
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Precautions to Operate FA SYSTEM for PC

Precautions about FA SYSTEM for PC are described after the next chapter of this manual and near below. Before you use the software, please read the contents of WARNING, CAUTION, and NOTE carefully.
- Precaution to DNC Operation

WARNING 1 Before attempting to do DNC operation, confirm that the NC program is correct. If an invalid NC program is used, the machine and tool may behave unexpectedly, possibly damaging the tool, machine, and/or workpiece, and presenting the risk of injury to the operator and/or bystanders. 2 When doing DNC operation, avoid cutting a work-piece without a test cutting. Ensure that NC machines and tool under the control of DNC operation will operate safely by using the functions such as single block, feed-rate override, and machine lock. If an invalid NC program is used, the machine and tool may behave unexpectedly, possibly damaging the tool, machine, and/or workpiece, and presenting the risk of injury to the operator and/or bystanders.
CAUTION DNC operation might pause for a second according to the performance of a computer, the number of NCs connecting to the computer, or the communication buffer size attached to NC side. When you use a software such as a word processing operation, DNC operation might pause. In this case, reduce the number of NCs that are doing DNC operation at the same time.
- About Exclusive Control of Files

CAUTION One NC program cant be handled by the following operations at the same time; Download, Upload, Edit, Copy, Move, Delete.
s-3
B-75044EN/02
PREFACE
Preface
This manual describes FANUC FA SYSTEM for PC (from here on referred to as FA SYSTEM for PC) that runs on a personal computer. The software of FA SYSTEM for PC supports three communications produced by FANUC; DNC1, DNC2 and Reader/Puncher interface. And data, such as NC programs, can be transferred from a computer to NCs. This manual also describes the information about the NCs produced by FANUC and its communication protocols, DNC1, DNC2 and Reader/Puncher interface. But, all related information is not mentioned in this manual. For more information about these communication protocols, please refer to the following manuals. (1) In case of connecting a computer to NCs by DNC1 K FANUC DNC1 DESCRIPTIONS (B-61782E) K CONNECTING/MAINTENANCE/OPERATORS MANUAL for the NC connected by DNC1 (2) In case of connecting a computer to NCs by DNC2 K FANUC DNC2 DESCRIPTIONS (B-61992E) K CONNECTING/MAINTENANCE/OPERATORS MANUAL for the NC connected by DNC2 (3) In case of connecting a computer to NCs by Reader/ Puncher K RS-232-C/RS-422 INTERFACE CONNECTING MANUAL(B60043E) K CONNECTING/MAINTENANCE/OPERATORS MANUAL for the NC connected by Reader/ Puncher (4) In case of connecting a computer to NCs by the DNC1/Ethernet interface K FANUC ETHERNET BOARD OPERATOR'S MANUAL (B63354EN) K CONNECTING/MAINTENANCE/OPERATOR'S MANUAL of the NCs connected by the DNC1/Ethernet interface To use this software (FA SYSTEM for PC), you must accept the following agreement.
Software Agreement
(1) By purchasing the software( FA SYSTEM for PC, and this manual), you can only use it. but you cant hold copyright on the software. (2) You can use the software at only one computer per one package.
p-1
PREFACE Content of This Manual
B-75044EN/02
FA SYSTEM for PC is the software package to connect a computer to NCs, and controls them from a computer. FA SYSTEM for PC has the two software series numbers as follows: K FA LIBRARY for Windows NT / A08B-9510-J510 (from here on referred to as FA LIBRARY) K NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT for Windows NT / A08B-9510-J511 (from here on referred to as NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT) In this manual, the FA SYSTEM for PC term is used the explanations related with both of FA LIBRARY and NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT. This manual explains FA SYSTEM for PC described below. PREFACE PREFACE is this. Chapter 1. About FA SYSTEM for PC Describes the basic features of FA SYSTEM for PC. This Chapter must be read by the customer who uses either NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT or FA LIBRARY. Chapter 2. Setup Describes the installation and setup of FA SYSTEM for PC. This Chapter must be read by the customer who uses either NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT or FA LIBRARY. Chapter 3. NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT Describes how to use NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT. This Chapter must be read by the customer who uses NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT. Chapter 4. FA LIBRARY Describes how to make a application program by using FA LIBRARY. This Chapter must be read by the customer who uses FA LIBRARY. NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT includes FA LIBRARY. So, the customer of NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT can make application programs too. In that case, they must read this chapter.
p-2
B-75044EN/02
PREFACE
Chapter 5. Observation of FA SYSTEM for PC Describes a logging information of FA SYSTEM for PC. This Chapter must be read by the customer who uses either NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT or FA LIBRARY. Chapter 6. FILE LIST MANAGEMENT Describes how to manage List Files by the FA SYSTEM for PC. Also read this chapter if you are using either of NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT or FA LIBRARY. APPENDIX Contains additional information related to FA SYSTEM for PC.
Microsoft, WindowsNT, and Visual Basic are registered trademarks and Visual C++ is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation. Digi Board is a registered trademark and PC/4e and PC/8e are trademarks of Digi International Inc.
p-3
B-75044EN/02
CONTENTS
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS PREFACE 1. ABOUT FA SYSTEM FOR PC ................................................................ 1

1.1 OVERVIEW ................................................................................................................ 2 1.2 RELATION BETWEEN FA SYSTEM FOR PC AND PROTOCOLS ............................ 5 1.3 TRANSMITTING NC PROGRAM................................................................................ 7
1.3.1 1.3.2 1.3.3 Transmitting by Operating NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT....................................................... 7 Transmitting by Using FA LIBRARY.............................................................................................. 8 Transmitting by Operating NC Side............................................................................................... 10
1.4 ABOUT NC PROGRAM FORMAT ............................................................................ 13 1.5 SUBPROGRAM TRANSFER FUNCTION ................................................................. 14
1.5.1 1.5.2 1.6.1 1.6.2 1.6.3 Details of Subprogram Separate Transfer Function ...................................................................... 16 Details of Subprogram Extended Transfer Function ...................................................................... 17 Details of List File Separate Transfer Function.............................................................................. 20 Details of List File Extended Transfer Function ............................................................................ 21 List File Transfer Monitor and Control Functions ......................................................................... 21
1.6 LIST FILE TRANSFER FUNCTION .......................................................................... 18
2. SETUP................................................................................................... 23
2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS...................................................................................... 24 DNC1 ........................................................................................................................26 DNC2, READER/PUNCHER ..................................................................................... 27 SETTING FA SYSTEM FOR PC ............................................................................... 29
2.4.1 2.4.2 2.4.3 Setting up TCP/IP .......................................................................................................................... 29 Adding Internet Service ................................................................................................................. 30 For Setting FA SYSTEM for PC.................................................................................................... 31
2.5 STARTING AND STOPPING THE COMMUNICATION PROCESS .......................... 34 2.6 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION .................................................................................... 35
2.6.1 2.6.2 2.6.3 2.6.4 2.6.5 2.6.6 Machine Information Settings ........................................................................................................ 35 General Settings for Machine......................................................................................................... 36 Communication Settings for Machine ............................................................................................ 38 Download Settings for Machine..................................................................................................... 43 Upload Settings for Machine.......................................................................................................... 44 Saving and Restoring Settings........................................................................................................ 45
3. NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT ........................................................... 47

3.1 OUTLINE .................................................................................................................. 48 3.2 USING NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT ................................................................... 49
3.2.1 3.2.2 About The NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT Window ............................................................... 49 Work with the File List .................................................................................................................. 51
c-1
CONTENTS 3.2.3 3.2.4 3.2.5 3.2.6 3.2.7 3.2.8
B-75044EN/02
Work with the Directory List ......................................................................................................... 54 Copying, Moving, Deleting and Renaming Files ........................................................................... 56 Browsing, Editing and Creating New Files .................................................................................... 58 Transmitting an NC Program ......................................................................................................... 61 Selecting the NC Program on the PC ............................................................................................. 66 Setting Options............................................................................................................................... 69
4. FA LIBRARY ......................................................................................... 71
4.1 OUTLINE .................................................................................................................. 72
4.1.1 4.1.2 4.1.3 4.1.4 4.1.5 4.2.1 4.2.2 4.2.3 4.2.4 4.2.5 4.2.6 4.2.7 4.2.8 4.2.9 Service Type .................................................................................................................................. 72 How to Read the Library Function ................................................................................................. 73 About the Development Language of the Application Program..................................................... 74 About Starting Applications You Have Developed........................................................................ 75 About Sample Program .................................................................................................................. 76 Start of Communication Process < F_CreateCommunication > * .................................................. 96 End of Communication Process < F_TerminateCommunication > * ............................................. 97 Start of Communication < F_Open > ............................................................................................. 98 Stop of Communication < F_Close >............................................................................................. 99 Confirmation of Communication < F_IsOpen >............................................................................ 99 Getting List of Registered Machine Numbers <F_GetAllMachineNumber > .............................. 100 Getting List of Communicating Machines < F_GetOpenMachineNumber > ............................... 102 Start of Receiving Notice Message < F_StartNotice >................................................................. 103 End of Receiving Notice Message < F_StopNotice >.................................................................. 104
4.2 SYSTEM SERVICE................................................................................................... 95
4.2.10 Getting Descriptor ID of Notice Message < F_GetNoticeID >.................................................... 104 4.2.11 Getting the Notice Message of the File Transfer < F_CopyNoticeFileTransfer > ....................... 105 4.2.12 Getting Information about Machine < F_GetMachineInfo > ....................................................... 106
4.3 REQUEST SERVICE .............................................................................................. 107

4.3.1 4.3.2 4.3.3 4.3.4 4.3.5 4.3.6 4.3.7 4.3.8 4.3.9 Downloading NC Program requested by Computer < F_Download... > ...................................... 107 Uploading NC Program Requested by Computer < F_Upload... > .............................................. 111 External Reset < F_Reset >.......................................................................................................... 114 Cycle Start < F_Start >................................................................................................................. 115 Selecting NC Program in NC < F_Select >.................................................................................. 116 Deleting NC Program in NC < F_Delete > .................................................................................. 117 Reading NC Identification < F_Identify > ................................................................................... 119 Reading List of NC Program in NC < F_AllFileDirectory > ....................................................... 120 Establishing DNC1 Connection < F_EstablishDnc1 >................................................................. 123
4.3.10 Confirmation of DNC1 Connection < F_ConfirmDnc1 >............................................................ 124 4.3.11 Reading Alarm Information < F_ReadAlarm >............................................................................ 126 4.3.12 Reading Tool Offset < F_ReadToolOffset >................................................................................ 128 4.3.13 Writing Tool Offset < F_WriteToolOffset >................................................................................132 4.3.14 Reading Custom Macro Variable < F_ReadCustomMacroVariable > ......................................... 135 4.3.15 Writing Custom Macro Variable < F_WriteCustomMacroVariable > ......................................... 138 4.3.16 Reading Tool Life Management Information < F_ReadToolLife > ............................................. 140
c-2
B-75044EN/02
CONTENTS 4.3.17 Reading PMC Data < F_ReadPMCData >................................................................................... 144 4.3.18 Writing PMC Data< F_WritePMCData >.................................................................................... 146 4.3.19 Reading NC Parameters < F_ReadParameter > ........................................................................... 148 4.3.20 Writing NC Parameters < F_WriteParameter > ........................................................................... 151 4.3.21 Computer Start DNC Operation < F_Dnc... >.............................................................................. 153 4.3.22 Canceling Computer Start Download < F_DownloadCancel >.................................................... 157 4.3.23 Canceling Computer Start Upload < F_UploadCancel > ............................................................. 158
4.4 DIAGNOSIS AND OTHER SERVICES ................................................................... 159

4.4.1 4.4.2 4.4.3 4.4.4 4.4.5 4.4.6 4.4.7 4.5.1 4.5.2 Initialization Processing < F_Begin > .......................................................................................... 159 Getting Number of Data < F_GetCount > .................................................................................... 159 Moving Offset Location of Data < F_Seek > ............................................................................... 160 Freeing Descriptor ID < F_FreeID >............................................................................................ 160 Getting Result of Asynchronous Treatment < F_Response >....................................................... 161 Getting Error Code < F_GetLastError > ...................................................................................... 161 End of FA LIBRARY < F_End > ................................................................................................ 162 Starting LogServer < F_InvokeLogServer > ................................................................................ 165 Terminating LogServer < F_TerminateLogServer >.................................................................... 165
4.5 LOG LIBRARY ........................................................................................................ 163
5. OBSERVATION OF FA SYSTEM FOR PC........................................... 166

5.1 LOG VIEWER ......................................................................................................... 167
5.1.1 5.1.2 5.1.3 5.1.4 5.1.5 5.2.1 About Log Message ..................................................................................................................... 167 The Contents of Transmission Log File ....................................................................................... 169 The Contents of Log File ............................................................................................................. 170 About Log Viewer........................................................................................................................ 171 Using Log Viewer ........................................................................................................................ 172 Setting log creation ON/OFF ....................................................................................................... 177
5.2 LogServer ............................................................................................................... 177
6. LIST FILE MANAGEMENT ................................................................. 179

6.1 EDIT LIST FILE SCREEN OPERATIONS............................................................... 180
6.1.1 6.1.2 6.2.1 6.2.2 Structure of Edit List File Screen ................................................................................................. 180 Editing List Files .......................................................................................................................... 183 Structure of List File Monitor Screen........................................................................................... 189 List File Monitor Operations........................................................................................................ 190
6.2 LIST FILE MONITOR SCREEN OPERATIONS ...................................................... 189
c-3
CONTENTS
B-75044EN/02
APPENDIX
A. SAMPLE OF NC PARAMETER SETTINGS........................................ 195 B. SAMPLE OPERATION FOR NC ......................................................... 199
B.1 DNC1, DNC2 .......................................................................................................... 200 B.2 READER/PUNCHER............................................................................................... 205 B.3 DNC1/ETHERNET .................................................................................................. 213
C. ERROR CODE .................................................................................... 214 D. DNC1................................................................................................... 235

D.1 D.2 D.3 D.4 D.5 D.6 D.7 D.8 D.9 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS FOR DNC1 BOARD ................................................... 237 CONDITIONS FOR USING THE DNC1 DRIVER.................................................... 239 SETTING UP THE DNC1 BOARD .......................................................................... 240 SETTING UP DNC1 DRIVER ................................................................................. 241 Dnc1HardTest......................................................................................................... 246 Dnc1Test ................................................................................................................ 251 Dnc1LogViewer....................................................................................................... 268 MAINTENANCE INFORMATION OF DNC1BOARD ............................................... 273 DNC1 BOARD, OPTICAL FIBER CABLE AND OPTICAL CONNECTOR SPECIFICATIONS .......................................................... 276 D.10 PRECAUTIONS WHEN HANDLING RELATED PARTS ......................................... 277 D.11 MAINTENANCE INFORMATION ............................................................................ 280
c-4
B-75044EN/02
1. ABOUT FA SYSTEM FOR PC
ABOUT FA SYSTEM FOR PC
-1-
B-75044EN/02
1.1
OVERVIEW
FA LIBRARY provides library functions and machine settings. The library functions can be used for developing a user-application. NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT is the software package that combines FA LIBRARY with the management of NC programs supplied by FANUC. NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT can transmit an NC program without developing a user-application. And then you can grow your own system by using FA LIBRARY included in NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT. FA SYSTEM for PC has the communication process, which supports the communication protocol of DNC1, DNC2 and Reader/Puncher Interface. DNC1 is the private network developed by FANUC. FA SYSTEM for PC is compatible with Mode1 of DNC1 protocol. Mode1 enables a computer to act as Primary Station, and the computer can be connected with the several NCs of Secondary Station.
Software Configuration
Computer
User-Application developed by a customer
The Offer of NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT(A08B-9510-J511)

NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT
The Offer of FA LIBRARY(A08B-9510-J510)

Machine Settings FA LIBRARY
COMMUNICATION PROCESS
DNC1
DNC2
Reader/Puncher
DNC1/Ethernet
DNC1 NC NC
RS232C
RS232C NC
Ethernet NC
-2-
B-75044EN/02

DNC1 is a private network developed by FANUC. FA SYSTEM for PC is compatible with "Mode1" of DNC1 protocol. Mode1 enables multi-point communication where a computer acts as the primary station and controls multiple NCs. A computer can be connected with a maximum of 16 NCs by DNC1. Refer to FANUC DNC1 DESCRIPTIONS (B-61782E) for details of DNC1. DNC1 Board is supplied by FANUC
DNC1 Board NC Computer NC
VVV
NC
Maximum of 16 NCs DNC2 is the communication protocol that enables the computer to transmit various data to the NC. A computer is connected to an NC by RS232C. Refer to FANUC DNC2 DESCRIPTIONS (B-61992E) for details of DNC2.
The standard RS232C port or the adapter board is used for DNC2.
RS232C Adapter
Computer
NC
NC
VVV
NC
Maximum of 8 NCs (NOTE) Reader/Puncher interface is the input/output function of an NC which can connect input/output devices such as FANUC HANDY FILE. By operating an NC side, an NC program can be transmitted between the NC and the computer. Refer to Section Input/Output of Data in each NC operators manual and RS-232-C/RS-422 INTERFACE CONNECT-ING MANUAL (B-60043E) for details of Reader /Puncher.
-3-

The adapter board is used for Reader/Puncher.
B-75044EN/02
RS232C Adapter
Computer
NC
NC
VVV
NC
Maximum of 8 NCs (NOTE)

NOTE In the above figures, the maximum numbers are the number of NCs connected to one computer by using the RS-232-C adapter board. It is the sum of NCs communicated with DNC2 and Reader/Puncher.
DNC1/Ethernet is a communication protocol for connecting the NC to the computer by Ethernet to enable data transactions between the NC and the computer. Use a third-party computer Ethernet board.
Ethernet board NC Computer NC
VVV
NC
Maximum of 64 NCs
-4-
B-75044EN/02
1.2
RELATION BETWEEN FA SYSTEM FOR PC AND PROTOCOLS

FA SYSTEM for PC supports the protocols of DNC1, DNC2, Reader/Puncher and DNC1/Ethernet. And the available functions of NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT and FA LIBRARY depend upon the capability of each protocol as follows.
Functions of FA LIBRARY (A08B-9510-J510)

A user-application developed by using FA LIBRARY can take the functions like these: (1) For DNC1 or DNC2 K Downloading an NC program to an NC. K Uploading an NC program from an NC K External reset K Selecting and deleting an NC program saved in an NC K Listing NC programs saved in an NC K Reading the alarm information in an NC K Reading and writing the tool offset data K Reading and writing the custom macro variables K Reading the tool life data K Reading and writing PMC data K Reading the system identify of an NC K Informs the start and completion of download required by NC K Informs the start and completion of upload required by NC (2) For Reader/Puncher protocol: K Informs the start and completion of download required by NC K Informs the start and completion of upload required by NC (3) For DNC1/Ethernet K Downloading an NC program to an NC K Uploading an NC program from an NC K DNC operation K Selecting and deleting an NC program saved in an NC K Reading the NC directory information K Reading the alarm information in an NC K Reading and writing the custom macro variables K Reading and writing the tool life data (scheduled to be supported) K Reading and writing PMC data K Reading the system identify of an NC K Reading and writing NC parameters
-5-
1. ABOUT FA SYSTEM FOR PC Functions of NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT (A08B-9510-J511)

(1) For DNC1 or DNC2
B-75044EN/02
NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT can handle the following functions by operating a computer. K A computer can download an NC program to an NC memory. K A computer can upload an NC program from an NC memory. K NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT can display the list of NC programs saved in the NC memory. K NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT can delete the NC program saved in the NC memory. The following functions can be handled by operating the CRT/MDI on an NC. K An NC can read an NC program from a computer. K An NC can punch an NC program to a computer. K An NC can call an NC program saved in a computer for DNC operation. (2) For Reader/Puncher The following functions can be handled by operating the CRT/MDI on an NC. K An NC can read an NC program from a computer. K An NC can punch an NC program to a computer. K An NC can display the list of NC programs saved in a computer. K An NC can delete an NC program saved in a computer. K An NC can call an NC program saved in a computer for DNC operation.
NOTE When you uses the Reader/Puncher for some old types of NCs, it is impossible to use several above functions, or it is necessary to add NC optional parameters.
(3) For DNC1/Ethernet NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT can handle the following functions by operating a computer: K A computer can download an NC program to NC memory. K A computer can upload an NC program from NC memory. K NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT can display the list of NC programs saved in the NC memory. K NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT can delete the NC program saved in NC memory.
NOTE DNC1/Ethernet communication does not allow download or upload by CRT/MDI operations on the NC. (scheduled to be supported)
-6-
B-75044EN/02
1.3
TRANSMITTING NC PROGRAM
A main feature of FA SYSTEM for PC is its ability to transmit an NC program. This section describes the way to transmit an NC program of NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT and FA LIBRARY.
1.3.1
Transmitting by Operating NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT

When a computer is connected to an NC by DNC1 or DNC2 or DNC1/Ethernet, an NC program can be transmitted by operating NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT screen. The NC programs to be downloaded are placed under the specific directory for every NC. This directory is called default-directory. The uploaded NC programs are saved in this default-directory too.
File System in Computer Drive A Associates with the default directory for Machine 1 Directory C Files are transmitted
Directory B
between Machine 1 and directory C
Machine 1
Directory D
Associates with the default directory for Machine 2 Files are transmitted between Machine 2 and directory D
Machine 2
' File ' Directory, Drive
-7-
B-75044EN/02
Both of default-directory and the list of NC programs saved in the NC memory are displayed on NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT screen. A NC program can be transmitted by operating this screen.
Files that are stored in default-directory
The list of NC programs stored in the NC memory
A NC program can be transmitted by the menu of the screen.
Refer to Chapter 2 Setup for modifying the default-directory. Refer to Chapter 3 NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT for operating the screen.
1.3.2
Transmitting by Using FA LIBRARY

When FA LIBRARY transmits an NC program, it uses the key. The key means the information about Which file should be transmitted ? when an NC program attempt to be transmitted. The four kinds of keys are classified according to a file name, a file number, an NC program number, and the file specified by full-path. FA LIBRARY selects the NC program by using the key, and attempts to decide the program according to the next table.
-8-
B-75044EN/02

The Way to Decide the Downloading Program
Used Key Selected Program The file of the same name is selected in the default-directory. The file named OXXXX.DAT is selected from the default-directory. Where, XXXX is equal to an NC program number, and DAT indicates the file extension called default-extension. This default-extension can be modified. Refer to Chapter 2 Setup for modifying the default-extension.
File Name NC program number
File Number
The files in the default-directory are stored in order of ASCII code, and the file is selected according to that order.
Full-Path
The file specified by the full-path is selected.
Default-directory for Machine 1 in Computer
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
FILE_A.TXT FILE_B.TXT O0001.DAT O0003.DAT WORK1.DOC WORK2.DOC V V V
When the file name FILE_B.TXT is set to the key, this file is downloaded. Machine 1 When the NC program number 0003 is set to the key, this file is downloaded. When the file number 6 is set to the key, this file is downloaded.
The
C: PATH
directory
in
Computer
When the full-path C: PATH FILE.DOC is set to the
FILE.DOC
key, the specified file is downloaded independently of the default-directory.
FA LIBRARY uploads an NC program from the NC memory by specifying an NC program number, and attempts to save it by using either of two keys shown as the next table.
-9-

The Way to Store the Uploaded Program
Used Key NC program number The Way to Store the Program
B-75044EN/02
The uploaded NC Program is named OXXXX.DAT which is composed of the key and the default-extension DAT, and is saved in the default-directory.
Full-Path
The uploaded NC program is saved according to the specified path.
Default-directory for Machine 1 in Computer When the O0001 in the NC memory is uploaded O0001.DAT and the NC program number 0001 key is used, the file is named O0001.DAT.
The C: PATH directory in Computer When the O0001 in the NC memory is uploaded and the C: PATH FILE.DOC key is used, the FILE.DOC file is named FILE.DOC.
Machine 1
These keys are specified by arguments of the FA LIBRARY functions. Refer to Chapter 4 FA LIBRARY for details.
1.3.3
Transmitting by Operating NC Side

When attempting to transmit the NC program by operating the CRT/MDI of an NC, the file directory in a computer cant be specified. Only a file name, a file number, and an NC program number can be specified by operating an NC. FA SYSTEM for PC relates a file name, a file number, and an NC program number with the files stored in the directory of a computer. Where, the key is equal to either of a file name, a file number, or an NC program number. FA SYSTEM for PC selects the NC program stored in the default-directory. However, the NC type and its communicating protocol limit the effective key and the way to specify the file name, file number, and NC program number on an NC. Refer to Appendix 2 Sample Operation for NC about the way to select the NC program by operating an NC. -10-
B-75044EN/02

The following table shows the effective keys according to the protocol. Relation between Key and Protocol
Protocol
The Requirement for Transmitting Program File Name
Usable Key NC program number File Number
DNC1, DNC2 Reader/ Puncher
Downloading Program by Operating NC Uploading Program by Operating NC Downloading Program by Operating NC Uploading Program by Operating NC
DNC1/Ethernet Downloading and Uploading Program Are Not Possible by Operating NC
: can be used : can not be used : The NC types cause whether the key is used or not.
The next table shows the way to select the NC program which attempt to be downloaded by operating an NC . The Way to Decide the Downloading Program
Used Key File Name NC program number Selected Program The file of the same name is selected in the default-directory. the file named OXXXX.DAT is selected in the default-directory. Where, XXXX is equal to an NC program number, and DAT indicates the file extension called default-extension. This default-extension can be modified. File Number The files in the default-directory are arranged in order of ASCII code, and the file is selected according to that order.
-11-

Default-directory for Machine 1 in Computer
B-75044EN/02
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
FILE_A.TXT FILE_B.TXT O0001.DAT O0003.DAT WORK1.DOC WORK2.DOC V V V
When the file name FILE_B.TXT is entered by operating an NC, this file is downloaded. Machine 1 When the NC program number 0003 is entered by operating an NC, this file is downloaded. When the file number 6 is entered by operating an NC, the sixth file is downloaded.
The NC program uploaded by operating an NC attempts to be saved shown as the next table. The Way to Store the Uploaded Program
Used Key File Name The Way to Store the Program The uploaded NC program is named for the file name which is entered by operating an NC, and it is saved in the default-directory. NC program number The uploaded NC program is named OXXXX. DAT which is composed of the NC program number (which is entered by operatiing an NC) and the default-extension DAT, and it is saved in the default-directory.
Default-directory for Machine1 in Computer When a file name O0001 is entered by operating an NC and the O0001 is uploaded, the file is named O0001. O0001 O0001.DAT When an NC program number 0001 is entered by operating an NC and the O0001 is uploaded, the file is named O0001.DAT. Machine 1
Refer to Appendix 2 Sample Operation for NC about the relation between the file name interpreted by FA SYSTEM for PC and the operation of an NC side.
-12-
B-75044EN/02
1.4
ABOUT NC PROGRAM FORMAT

FA SYSTEM for PC manages NC programs in a computer as follows.
Sample 1 : Main program terminated by the M30 code
OXXXX ;
Part Program
; M30 ;
Sample 2 : Main program terminated by the M02 code
OXXXX ;
Part Program
; M02 ;
Sample 3 : Sub program terminated by the M99 code
OXXXX ;
Part Program
; M99 ;
These programs should be formed such as one main program format or one sub program format, including one NC program number in head of the partprogram. Where, ; means the end of a block, and corresponds to the EOB code specified by NC such as the LF code. XXXX indicates an NC program number.
-13-
B-75044EN/02
1.5
SUBPROGRAM TRANSFER FUNCTION
What Is The Subprogram Transfer Function?

The subprogram transfer function downloads the subprogram together with the NC program if the NC program contains a subprogram call when the NC program is downloaded.
NOTE This function can be used only when the Reader/Puncher interface is used.
Subprogram transfer has two modes: separate transfer and extended transfer. (1) Separate transfer mode This mode parses the main program, and sends the required subprogram appended to the main program if a subprogram call is specified in the main program. (2) Extended transfer mode This mode parses the main program, and sends the subprogram imbedded in the main program if a subprogram call is specified in the main program. You can select one of Not Transferred/Separate Transfer/Extended Transfer for the subprogram on each machine in the Machine Setup menu.
Main program % O0001 (MAIN START) M98P5001 (MAIN END) M30 %
Subprogram % O5001 ' (SUB START) (SUB END) M99 %
Subprogram separate transfer
% O0001 (MAIN START) M98P5001 (MAIN END) M30 O5001 (SUB START) (SUB END) M99 % % O0001 (MAIN START) (SUB START) (SUB END) (MAIN END) M30 %
Subprogram extended transfer
-14-
B-75044EN/02
Subprogram File Names

Subprogram file names must be specified in the following format: O + 4-digit number + . + 3-letter extension Example: O0001.DAT Register the extension in the [Subprogram Extension] in the [General] panel in the Machine Setup menu.
Subprogram File Format

Only one O number and M99 code each are both required in the subprogram file. See Example 3 in 1.4 About NC Program Format. Subprogram files containing repeated O numbers and M99 codes cannot be sent. Calling a subprogram containing an M02 or M30 code instead of an M99 code will result in an error.
Subprogram File Directory

Up to three directories for storing subprogram files can be set in the [Subprogram Search Directory 1 to 3] in the [Download] panel in the Machine Setup menu. The subprogram search order of priority is set to the three directories. For example, if the No.1 directory and No.2 directory hold a program having the same name, the subprogram in the No.1 directory is sent.
NOTE Subprograms are searched only from the directories set in the [Subprogram Search Directory 1 to 3]. To store a subprogram in the default directory, specify the same directory as the default directory somewhere in the [Subprogram Search Directory 1 to 3].
Subprogram Non-call Setting

You can disable subprogram transfer even if a subprogram is called by the main program. For example, you can set Not to send subprograms in lines 8000 to 9000 as they are stored in NC memory. You can set this in 1000-line units in the [Subprograms Not To Send] in the [Download] panel in the Machine Setup menu.
Subprogram Call Code Setting

You can set the call code by which the subprogram is sent. Call types M98, G65 and G66 are supported, and subprogram transfer is carried out only for the call type you have set. Set the call code in the [Call Type] in the [Download] panel in the Machine Setup menu.
-15-
B-75044EN/02
1.5.1
Details of Subprogram Separate Transfer Function
Subprogram Call Formats

The following four subprogram call formats can be used in the main program: (1) M98PxxxxLyy (2) M98Pyyxxxx (3) G65PxxxxLyy (4) G66PxxxxLyy where, xxxx: program number yy: call repeat count (This can be omitted.) In the case of format (2), a 4-digit number is needed for the program number. Note, however, that in the separate transfer mode subprograms that are called more than once due to the relationship between the main and subprograms are transferred only once. So, the call repeat count is ignored. The subprogram call nesting level is 8. If the control discovers that the currently called subprogram does not exist in the main program, an error occurs when an attempt is made to send the nonexistent subprogram after the main program is sent.
NOTE 1 Program numbers xxxx are limited to numbers that can be directly specified. Program numbers that are specified by macro variables cannot be transferred. 2 "M99Pnnnn" (return function to sequence number) cannot be used. At the point that the subprogram up to the line containing the M99 instruction is read, the system judges that the subprogram has ended and returns to the main program. The Pnnnn section is ignored. 3 Branch instructions (GOTO, IF, WHILE) are transferred to the NC without being processed.
-16-
B-75044EN/02
1.5.2
Details of Subprogram Extended Transfer Function
Subprogram Call Formats

The following four subprogram call formats can be used in the main program: (1) M98PxxxxLyy (2) M98Pyyxxxx (3) G65PxxxxLyy (4) G66PxxxxLyy where, xxxx: program number yy: call repeat count (This can be omitted.) In the case of format (2), a 4-digit number is needed for the program number. In extended transfer, subprograms that are called more than once due to the relationship between the main and subprograms are sent imbedded in the main program for the repeated call count. The subprogram call nesting level is 8. If the control discovers that the preset directory does not contain the subprogram currently being called by the main program, an error occurs immediately. So, transfer of the main program is canceled midway, and the subprogram is not sent.
NOTE 1 Program numbers xxxx are limited to numbers that can be directly specified. Program numbers that are specified by macro variables cannot be transferred. 2 "M99Pnnnn" (return function to sequence number) cannot be used. At the point that the subprogram up to the line containing the M99 instruction is read, the system judges that the subprogram has ended and returns to the main program. The Pnnnn section is ignored. 3 4 Branch instructions (GOTO, IF, WHILE) are transferred to the NC without being processed. When transferring in the extended transfer mode, only subprograms cannot be transferred. If only a subprogram is transferred, the "Main program contains M99." error is generated. 5 Other addresses cannot be specified for the blocks that call the subprogram: Example: When the block "M98P9000G00X00Y00" is sent in the extended transfer mode, the contents of subprogram O9000.DAT can be sent. However, the G00X00Y00 part cannot be sent.
-17-
B-75044EN/02
1.6
LIST FILE TRANSFER FUNCTION
What Is The "List File Transfer Function?"

The List File transfer function sends two or more NC programs described in the List File to the NC. Create the List File in the Edit List File screen in FA SYSTEM for PC. Up to 9999 NC programs can be registered to the List File.
NOTE This function can be used only when the Reader/Puncher interface is used.
The List File transfer has two modes: separate transfer and extended transfer. List separate transfer mode This mode sends NC programs currently registered to List File in order as they are. This mode assumes that you are registering two or more main programs to the NC memory. List extended transfer mode This mode deletes the O number and M30 code from the NC programs currently registered to List File and sends the NC programs as a single NC program. This mode assumes that two or more NC programs are linked into a single program for DNC operation. You can select either of separate transfer or extended transfer for transferring the List File on each machine in the Machine Setup menu.
-18-
B-75044EN/02

O0001.DAT
% O0001 (O0001 DATA) M30 % O0002.DAT % O0002 (O0002 DATA) M30 % O0003.DAT % O0003 (O0003 DATA) M30 %
Create List File menu Separate transfer of list
% O0001 (O0001 DATA) M30 O0002 (O0002 DATA) M30 O0003 (O0003 DATA) M30 % Extended transfer of list % O0001 (O0001 DATA) (O0002 DATA) (O0003 DATA) M30 %
List File O0001.LST O0001.DAT O0002.DAT ' O0003.DAT
List File Name

Register the List File 3-character extension in the [List File Extension] in the [General] panel in the Machine Setup menu. List files can be created and edited only in the Edit List File screen in FA SYSTEM for PC. When they are saved, the List File extension is automatically set. So, the user need not create a List File while taking its format into consideration. When you register [List File Extension] in the Machine Setup menu, only extensions different from the [Default Extension] and [Subprogram Extension] can be set. So, the main program O0001.DAT and List File O0001.LST can be created. The List File transfer function is enabled when the NC requests transfer of files appended with the List File extension.
List File Format

List Files are created and edited only in the Edit List File screen in FA SYSTEM for PC. So, the user need not create a List File using an editor while taking its format into consideration.
List File Directory

Save the List File to the directory set in the [Default Directory] in the Machine Setup menu. After displaying a list of files from the NC in FA SYSTEM for PC, the List File must be stored to [Default Directory] so that it can be specified by its file number or file name.
-19-
1. ABOUT FA SYSTEM FOR PC Combinations of List File Transfer and Subprogram Transfer Functions
B-75044EN/02
The following table shows the possible combinations of List File transfer and subprogram transfer functions:
Subprogram Transfer Mode Separate List File Transfer Mode Separate Extended Extended
1.6.1
Details of List File Separate Transfer Function

NC program files registered to the List File are sent in the order in which they were registered. The details of registered NC program files are sent as they are without the O number and M02, M30 or M99 codes deleted. When both the main program and subprograms are specified in the List File and List File separate transfer is requested, both the main program and subprograms are sent.
NOTE 1 2 Separate transfer of NC programs without the O number is not possible. Transfer of such NC programs results in an error. Separate transfer of NC programs having the same O number is not possible. Transfer of such NC programs results in an error.
-20-
B-75044EN/02
1.6.2
Details of List File Extended Transfer Function

Two or more main programs registered to the List File are sent linked as they were a single NC program. The O number and M30 or M02 codes in the registered NC program files are not sent. The O number that is sent at the start of extended transfer can be specified by the following two ways in the Edit File List screen: (1) The O number of the first NC program registered to the List File is sent. (2) The O number specified in the [Specify O Number at Extended Transfer] in the Edit List File screen is sent. Though extended transfer of NC programs without the O number is possible, the O number must be specified according to (2) above. Send the M30 code at the end of extended transfer.
NOTE 1 Extended transfer of the main program and subprograms specified in the List File is not possible. When this is attempted, the M02 or M30 codes in the main program will be deleted. However, the M99 code in the subprogram will be sent without being deleted. 2 Extended transfer of NC programs having the same O number is not possible. Transfer of such NC programs results in an error.
1.6.3
List File Transfer Monitor and Control Functions

When the List File Monitor screen is used, the transfer monitor is displayed. This allows to control such as pause, skipping transfer and swapping of the transfer order for NC programs that are in the List File and that have not yet been sent.
List File Transfer Monitor Display

During List File transfer, you can display which NC programs have not yet been sent. This assumes that you know how far transfer has progressed when you are sending two or more main programs by extended transfer for DNC operation.
-21-

NOTE 1
B-75044EN/02
To use this function, check the [Wait for send buffer to reach 0 before proceeding to next record in extended transfer mode] check box in the [Download] panel in the Machine Setup menu.
When you actually send data, transfer is influenced by your computer's send buffer and your NC's receive buffer; so the details displayed on the monitor screen may not match the details displayed on the NC screen. For example, the NC program displayed as currently being sent on the monitor screen may not yet be received on the NC. NC programs among those registered to the List File that have not yet started to be sent can be displayed correctly.
List File Transfer Control Function

During List File transfer, you can carry out the following controls on NC programs that have not yet been sent: (1) Pause Pauses transfer before the specified NC program is sent. The transfer order of NC programs registered after the paused NC program can be changed, programs deleted and new programs added. (2) Skip Sends the next currently registered NC program without sending the specified NC program. (3) Change order You can change the transfer order. (4) Delete and add NC programs. You can delete NC programs registered after the paused NC program or add new NC programs.
NOTE The List File created in the Edit List File screen is copied to each NC as the List File to be is browsed when the List File is sent to the NC. The List File is copied to each NC before transfer is started. The details currently displayed and edited in the List File Monitor screen is the List File copied to each NC. For this reason, details that are paused, order-changed, deleted or added in the List File Monitor screen are partial changes that are valid only during List File transfer. Changes that are always reflected at each transfer must be made in the Edit List File screen before you transmit the List File.
-22-
B-75044EN/02
2. SETUP
SETUP
-23-
2. SETUP
B-75044EN/02
2.1
SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
Your system must suit the following minimum requirements in order to run FA SYSTEM for PC. (1) Body of Computer K Type of PC: K CPU: K Memory: K Hard Disk: (2) Display K Resolution: K Color: (3) Operating System K Microsoft Windows NT4.0 + Windows NT4.0 Service Pack 3 (4) Developing Environment (You needs the following software tools when you program a userapplication by using FA LIBRARY.) K Microsoft Visual Basic 5.0 (from here on referred to as VB) + Visual Studio97 Service Pack 3 (from here on reffered to as VB++) or K Microsoft C++ 5.0 +Visual Studio97 Service pack 3 (from here on referred to as VC++) (5) Keyboard (6) Mouse (7) DNC1 Board and Software Driver (In the case that your system uses DNC1 communication) K Supplied by FANUC: A20B-8100-0070 PC/AT compatible machine Pentium (75MHz) or higher recommended 32MB RAM or more recommended 85MB Hard Disk or larger recommended
K Floppy Disk: one 3.5 inch 1.44MB Drive
1024b768 dot or higher recommended 16 colors or more
-24-
B-75044EN/02
2. SETUP
(8) RS-232-C Communication Board (In the case that your system uses DNC2 or Reader/Puncher) Use the following boards made by Digi International as the RS-232-C communication boards: K AccelePort 4r-ISA (for 4 ports, DTE/DB25 male) K AccelePort 8r-ISA (for 8 ports, DTE/DB25 male) When DNC2 is used, the DNC2 board and option are needed on the NC. The option is needed on the NC when the Reader/Puncher is to be used. (9) Purchase a third-party Ethernet board (when DNC1/Ethernet is used). The Ethernet board and option are needed on the NC. (The Ethernet board for the NC is the 10BASE-T interface.)
NOTE WindowsNT 4.0 does not have a PnP (plug-and-play) function. When the DNC1 board is to be used, set the PnP function OFF in the BIOS settings. The method for setting BIOS varies according to the computer. Refer to the Operator's Manual for your computer.
-25-
2. SETUP
B-75044EN/02
2.2
DNC1
The DNC1 board must be installed according to the next procedure.
DNC1 Board Installation

Please insert the DNC1 board into your computer. For more information about installing the DNC1 board, refer to D.1 System Requirements for Installing DNC1 Board, D.2 Condition of using DNC1 Driver and D.3 Setting DNC1 Board.
DNC1 Driver Installation

Please install the DNC1 software to your computer with the floppy disk labeled DNC1 Driver Disk Setup. Refer to D.4 DNC1 Driver Settings for details of the software installation.
Testing DNC1 Board

After the completion of the DNC1 board and DNC1 driver installation, please join the loop-back test connector (A13B-0156-C201) to the terminating resister unit, start the Dnc1HardTest software, and check whether the DNC1 board and software driver are installed correctly or not. Refer to D.5 Dnc1HardTest for details of test.
-26-
B-75044EN/02
2. SETUP
2.3
DNC2, READER/PUNCHER
When a computer communicates to NCs with DNC2 or Reader/Puncher, RS232-C ports are used.
Setting a RS232C Adapter Board

The RS-232-C adapter boards described in item(8) of 2.1. System Requirements can be used. When using the RS-232-C adapter board, you must install the adapter according to its manual.
Connecting RS232C Cables

Please prepare the following cables for connecting a computer and an NC unit.
IIn the case of RS-232-C Adapter Board (Acceleport 4r/8r-ISA DTE DB25 Male) Side of PC DSUB 25pin 'Female' Signals Pins SD RD RS CS ER DR CD SG GND 2 3 4 5 20 6 8 7 Side of NC DSUB 25pin 'Male' Signals Pins SD RD RS CS ER DR CD SG FG 2 3 4 5 20 6 8 7 1
In the case of standard ports attached to a computer
Side of PC DSUB 9pin 'Female' Signals Pins SD RD RS CS ER DR CD SG GND 3 2 7 8 4 6 1 5
Side of NC DSUB 25pin 'Male' Signals Pins SD RD RS CS ER DR CD SG FG 2 3 4 5 20 6 8 7 1
-27-
2. SETUP
NOTE 1
B-75044EN/02
The shape of the connector in the figure may be different from ones in your system. Please prepare the RS-232-C cable after checking it with your own eyes.
2 3 4
Dont use the standard ports attached to your computer when you use the Reader/Puncher. For details on how to make a connection cable, refer to the FANUC "RS-232-C/RS-422 Interface Connection Manual (B-60043E)." When an NC machine is controlled with the DNC operation, the DNC operation may come to a pause for a short time by reason of the performance of a computer, the less communication buffer of NC, the heavy work with operating the screen of the computer and so on. In such a case, please drop the communication speed, or reduce the number of machines that are controlled with the DNC operation at the same time.
-28-
B-75044EN/02
2. SETUP
2.4
SETTING FA SYSTEM FOR PC
NOTE Setting up TCP/IP in "2.4.1 Setting Up TCP/IP" and installing FA SYSTEM for PC in "2.4.3 For Setting FA SYSTEM for PC" must be carried out by a user having administrator privileges.
2.4.1
Setting up TCP/IP
FA SYSTEM for PC utilizes the TCP/IP (Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol) network protocol even if the computer is not connected with a network. Therefore, the TCP/IP protocol service must be added to WindowsNT before FA SYSTEM for PC installation. To know whether TCP/IP is installed in WindowsNT or not, please doubleclick the Network program in the Control Panel group box. The TCP/IP Protocol item can be found in the Installed Network Software list box when WindowsNT contains the TCP/IP protocol. If TCP/IP protocol isnt installed, it must be installed by using the Network software of the Control Panel group box. Refer to the setup guide of WindowsNT for the installation. Normally, the Ethernet board is needed when you install TCP/IP protocol services. When you install FA SYSTEM for PC on a computer that does not have an Ethernet board, select MS Loopback Adapter provided by Microsoft as the network adapter, and then install TCP/IP protocol services.
Confirming localhost
localhost is a special host name that indicates the self node in TCP/IP protocol. When WindowsNT is installed, localhost is automatically registered. However, FA SYSTEM for PC cannot be started normally if this setting is deleted. Before you install FA SYSTEM for PC, make sure that localhost is registered to the hosts file. The host file will be at the following directory assuming that c: winnt is the directory in which WindowsNT is set up. (The directory in which the WindowsNT is set up is registered to system setup variable windir after [System] in the [Control Panel] is started.) c: winn system32 drivers etc hosts
-29-
2. SETUP
B-75044EN/02
Open this file using the Note Pad or other editor, and make cure that the following line is described in the file. (Normally, this line is located near the top of the file.) 127.0.0.1 localhost
Add this line if it is not described in the file.
2.4.2
Adding Internet Service

When FA SYSTEM for PC is installed, the FA SYSTEM for PC is automatically registered to the WindowsNT services file to use its TCP/IP protocol. The following table shows the names of services that are automatically registered. Table Names of Automatically Registered Services
Name of Service FANUC_PCFA_APP FANUC_PCFA_CDA FANUC_PCFA_COMM FANUC_C4_SERVER FANUC_C4_API 4096 4097 4098 8192 8193 (NOTE) Port No. tcp tcp tcp udp tcp Protocol
NOTE When DNC1/Ethernet is used, this is the value to enter to UDP port No. in the ETHPRM parameter on the NC.
If the port No. in the above table is already registered when FA SYSTEM for PC is registered, check the largest No. in the services file and assign a No. larger than this No. Conventional services will not be disabled. As described in note 1 above, you must match the port No. automatically registered to the services file with the NC parameters. If the port No. in this table is already in use, an unused port No. is assigned during automatic registration. So, be sure to check the contents of the services file after you have installed FA SYSTEM for PC.
-30-
B-75044EN/02
2. SETUP
The services file will be at the following directory assuming that c: winnt is the directory in which directory WindowsNT is set up. (The directory in which WindowsNT is set up is registered to system setup variable windir after [System] in the [Control Panel] is started.) c: winn system32 drivers etc hosts
NOTE You must restart your computer if you have changed the port No. in the service file after FA SYSTEM for PC has been installed.
When FA SYSTEM for PC is automatically registered to the services file, back up the file that was active before FA SYSTEM for PC is registered and save it to the same directory as the services file. Set the backup file name in the following format based on the time when FA SYSTEM for PC was automatically registered: services.YYYMMDDhhmm where, YYYY: year according to Western calendar MM: month DD: day hh: hours mm: minutes
2.4.3
For Setting FA SYSTEM for PC

Both FA LIBRARY(A08B-9510-J510) and NC PROGRAM
MANAGEMENT (A08B-9510-J511) can be installed by the same way. Please install them by following the next procedure. 1 2 Log in using a user name having administrator privileges. Insert either FA LIBRARY Setup Disk (WindowsNT) or NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT Setup Disk (WindowsNT) into the floppy disk drive on your computer. 3 4 Select [Run] from the Start menu, enter A: Setup in the [Name] text box and press the <OK> button. When the setup program is started, the following screen appears. If necessary, modify the installation directory of FA SYSTEM for PC, and click the <Continue> button.
-31-
2. SETUP
B-75044EN/02
The following disk information screen will appear. Confirm that the disk space of [Space Available] is lager than one of [Space Required], and click the <Setup> button. If [Space Available] is not enough, click the <Cancel> button and stop the installation. Try to install into the other disk with enough space.
6 7
When the <Setup> button is clicked, the installation is progressing automatically. Change the next floppy disk according to the message. When the installation is complete, the message Setup was succeeded will appear in the computer display and the [FANUC FA System for PC] group dialog is created as follows.
The ReadMe.txt file is displayed

NOTE Be sure to read the ReadMe.txt file. This file contains new functions and precautions added after this Operator's Manual was issued.
The ReadMe.txt file is copied to the directory in which FA SYSTEM for PC is installed.
-32-
B-75044EN/02
2. SETUP
When NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT is installed, the FANUC FA System for PC group dialog and its programs are created as follows.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
When FA LIBRARY is installed, the [FANUC FA System for PC] group dialog and its programs are created as follows.
(1)
(2)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(1) This is the startup icon for FA SYSTEM for PC. FA SYSTEM for PC communicates with the NC by starting the communication process from this icon. Refer to 2.5. Starting and Stopping the Communication Process for the way of operation. (2) This is the Machine Configuration program. Refer to 2.6. System Configuration for the way of operation. (3) This is the NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT program. Refer to Chapter 3 NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT for the way of operation. (4) This is the Select Transfer File program. Refer to Chapter 3 NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT for the way of operation. (5) This is the Edit List File screen. Refer to 6.1 Edit List File Screen Operations for the way of operation. (6) This is the List File Monitor screen. Refer to 6.2 List File Monitor Screen Operations for the way of operation. (7) This is the Log Viewer program. Refer to Chapter 5 Observation of FA SYSTEM for PC for the way of operation. (8) This is the FA LIBRARY sample program for developing applications in Visual C++. Refer to Chapter 4 FA LIBRARY for an explanation. (9) This is the FA LIBRARY sample program for developing applications in Visual Basic. Refer to Chapter 4 FA LIBRARY for an explanation.
-33-
2. SETUP
B-75044EN/02
2.5
STARTING AND STOPPING THE COMMUNICATION PROCESS
Starting the Communication Process

1 Double-click [FA System] in the [FANUC FA System for PC] group dialog.
The communication process is started in the state of an icon, and the [FANUC FA System for PC] icon appears at the lower-left corner on the computer display.
NOTE If you execute "Start Communication Process" when no machines have been set in the Machine Setup screen, the error (0x1004011d) will occur. Before you start the communication process, execute the system configuration described in "2.6 System Configuration" and set the currently connected machine.
Stopping the Communication Process

1 Double-click the running [FANUC FA System for PC] icon which is started by the above operation. The following screen will appear.
Click the[Exit] of the menu. The communication process will be stopped.
-34-
B-75044EN/02
2. SETUP
2.6
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
To use FA SYSTEM for PC, you must give a distinctive information to each machine. By using the Machine Configuration screen, please set up the information such as a machine number, a machine name, a device port and communication protocol for connecting to the computer, and the way to manage NC programs. Make sure that stop the communication process before the Machine Configuration screen is started. Double-click [Machine Configuration] in the [FA System for PC] group dialog. The Machine Configuration screen is shown.
When you have set the system configuration for the first time or when you have changed the system configuration settings, save the new settings to floppy disk according to the description in 2.6.6 Saving and Restoring Settings.
2.6.1
Machine Information Settings

1 2 Select the [Machine Information] panel in the [Machine Configuration] dialog box. Select the machine number you want to setup from the [Machine] list box.
Enter the name you want to give into the [Machine Name ] text box.
-35-
2. SETUP
4
B-75044EN/02
Select the NC type from the [ Kind of Machine] list box according to the NC machine. If the type of NC you are using is not displayed, select OTHERS.
Click the <Save> button.
2.6.2
General Settings for Machine
Selecting the Default directory

1 Select the [General] panel in Machine Configuration dialog box.
2 3
Select the machine number you want to setup from the [ Machine] list box. Setup the following parameters in the [General] panel. K K Switch on Normal Mode from the [NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT Style] group box. Click the button in the right side of the [Default Directory] directory box. The file list will appear. Select the directory you want to use from this file list. K Enter the extension you want to give in the [Default Extension] text box.
-36-
B-75044EN/02
2. SETUP
Setting the Subprogram Extension and List File Extension

NOTE The subprogram extension and List File extension can be set only when the Reader/Puncher interface protocol is used. Do not change this value when other protocols are used.
1 2 3
Select the [General] panel in the [Machine Configuration] dialog box. Select the machine number you want to set up from the [Machine] list box. Set up the following parameters in the [General] panel. K Enter the extension used for the subprogram in the [Subprogram Extension] text box. Normally, set the same extension as the default extension. K Enter the extension used for the List File in the [List File Extension] text box. Enter a extension different to that used for the default extension and subprogram extension. If the List File extension matches either the default extension or subprogram extension, an error will occur when you try to save the File List.
-37-
2. SETUP
B-75044EN/02
2.6.3
Communication Settings for Machine
DNC1 Settings
1 2 3 Select the [Communication] panel in the [Machine Configuration] dialog box. Select the machine number you want to setup from the [Machine] list box.. Select DNC1 from the [Protocol] list box.
Press the <Set Default> button and set the default. When you communicate with the NC using this default, first check that the NC parameters are at the value described in A.1 Sample of NC Parameter Settings. If communication is carried out using a value different from the settings in this Appendix, the set values in this screen must be made to match the values currently set in the NC parameters. K Baud Rate: 460.8K
Using the <Set Default> button set the value that is not set. Set the [Settings] group box as follows: K Select 1 from the [DNC1 Board Number] list box. K Select the node number form the [Node Number] list box. The selected number must be correspond to the DNC1 address parameter specified in the NC machine.
The [Transfer Tool Offset] group box is automatically set according to the NC type set in the [Machine Type] list box in the [Machine Information] panel. Set as follows when OTHERS is selected in the [Machine Type] list box when a new machine type is used:
-38-
B-75044EN/02
2. SETUP
K To transfer the tool offsets, select either of Milling system or Turning system matched to the machine from the [Tool Offset Type] list box. K To transfer PMC data, select one of Type FS15B/16/18, Type FS15A or Type FS0 matched to the machine from the [PMC Address Specification Form] list box. With DNC1, the PMC address specification format varies according to the type of NC. This setting, however, allows you to specify the PCM address by the same format regardless of the type of NC when you are accessing PMC data from FA LIBRARY. K To transfer the NC parameters, select either of 2 or 3 matched to the machine from the [Bit Type Data Type] list box. 7 Click the <Save> button.
DNC2 Settings
1 2 3 Select the [Communication] panel in the [Machine Configuration] dialog box. Select the machine number you want to setup from the [Machine] list box. Select DNC2 from the [Protocol] list box.
-39-
2. SETUP
4 Press the <Set Default> button and set the default.
B-75044EN/02
When you communicate with the NC using this default, first check that the NC parameters are at the value described in A.1 Sample of NC Parameter Settings. If communication is carried out using a value different from the settings in this Appendix, the set values in this screen must be made to match the values currently set in the NC parameters. K Baud Rate K Data Length K Data Code K Parity K Stop Bit K Retry K NAK Retry K Datagram Length K Time Out K EOT Time Out 5 Default> button. K [For Details] does not need to be specified. K Select the RS-232-C port number from the [Port] list box. 6 The [Transfer Tool Offset] group box is automatically set according to the NC type set in the [Machine Type] list box in the [Machine Information] panel. Set as follows when OTHERS is selected in the [Machine Type] list box when a new machine type is used: K To transfer the tool offsets, select either of Milling system or Turning system matched to the machine from the [Tool Offset Type] list box. K To transfer PMC data, select one of Type FS15B/16/18, Type FS15A or Type FS0 matched to the machine from the [PMC Address Specification Form] list box. With DNC1, the PMC address specification format varies according to the type of NC. This setting, however, allows you to specify the PCM address by the same format regardless of the type of NC when you are accessing PMC data from FA LIBRARY. K To transfer the NC parameters, select either of 2 or 3 matched to the machine from the [Bit Type Data Type] list box. 7 Click the <Save> button. : EVEN : 2 (bits) : 5 (times) : 3 (times) : 256 (characters) : 5 (seconds) : 5 (seconds) : 7 (bits) : ASCII : 9600 (bps)
In the [Settings] group box, set the value that is not set using the <Set
-40-
B-75044EN/02
2. SETUP
Settings of Reader/Puncher
1 2 3 Select the [Communication] panel in the [Machine Configuration] dialog box. Select the machine number you want to setup from the [Machine] list box. Select Reader/Puncher from the [Protocol] list box.
Press the <Set Default> button and set the default. When you communicate with the NC using this default, first check that the NC parameters are at the value described in A. Sample of NC Parameter Settings. If communication is carried out using a value different from the settings in this Appendix, the set values in this screen must be made to match the values currently set in the NC parameters. K Baud Rate K Data Length K Data Code K Parity K Stop Bit K TV Check K Send DC2 and DC4 K Send ER(%) at the head and the end : NONE : 2 (bits) : Checked X : Checked X : Checked X : 8 (bits) : ISO : 9600 (bps)
In the [Settings] group box, set the value that is not set using the <Set Default> button. K [For Details] does not need to be specified. K Select the RS-232C port number from the [Port] list box.
Select the <Save> button.
-41-
2. SETUP Settings of DNC1/Ethernet

1 2 3
B-75044EN/02
Select the [Communication] panel in the [Machine Configuration] dialog box. Select the machine number you want to set up from the [Machine] list box. Select "DNC1/Ethernet" from the [Protocol] list box.
Press the <Set Default> button and set the default. The following value is set: K C4 server IP address
NOTE Do not change this value.
: 127.0.0.1
In the [Settings] group box, set the value that is not set using the <Set Default> button. K [For Details] does not need to be specified. K Enter the IP address set to the NC to be connected in the [NC IP Address] text box. K Enter the TCP Port No. set in the NC to be connected in the [NC TCP Port No.] text box.
-42-
B-75044EN/02
2. SETUP
2.6.4
Download Settings for Machine

You can set the subprogram transfer method and List File transfer method. For details on the subprogram transfer function, see 1.5 Subprogram Transfer Function, and for details on the List File transfer function, see 1.6 List File Transfer Function.
NOTE You can set the subprogram transfer method and List File transfer method only when the Reader/Puncher interface protocol is used. Do not change this value when other protocols are used.
If you select either of Separate Transfer or Extended Transfer in the [Transfer Styles for Sub Programs] frame, you can set the following: Calling Type You can set the code used for calling the subprogram. You can set a combination of the M98, G65 and G66 codes. Masks of Sub Programs You can set the subprograms not to transfer even if a subprogram is called by the main program. You can set this in 1000-line units. So, for example, you can set Not to send subprograms in lines 8000 to 9000 as they are stored in NC memory. -43-
2. SETUP
1st to 3rd Directory Searching Sub Program
B-75044EN/02
You can set up to three directories for storing the subprograms. 1 to 3 indicate the search order. That is, when a subprogram having the same number is located in [1st Directory Searching Sub Program] and [2nd Directory Searching Sub Program], the subprogram in [1st Directory Searching Sub Program] is transferred.
NOTE The subprogram is searched for only from the directories set at [1st to 3rd Directory Searching Sub Program]. Subprograms will not be searched for even if [Default Directory] is set unless you set [1st to 3rd Directory Searching Sub Program].
Setting the List File Transfer Method

1 2 3 Select the [Download] panel in the [Machine Configuration] dialog box. Select either of Separate Transfer or Extended Transfer in the [Transfer Styles for NC Programs Registered in List File] frame. If you have selected Extended Transfer, also set [Wait for send buffer to reach 0 before proceeding to next record in extended transfer mode].
2.6.5
Upload Settings for Machine

1 Select the [Upload] panel in the [Machine Configuration] dialog box. These settings are not used now but are provided for the future. Setup as the following figure.
WARNING If invalid settings are specified, the FA SYSTEM for PC might behave unexpectedly.
-44-
B-75044EN/02
2. SETUP
2.6.6
Saving and Restoring Settings

The FA SYSTEM for PC settings that are set in the Machine Setup screen are written to a data file on your computer by pressing the <Save> button. The installation floppy disk holds the FA SYSTEM for PC communication program and various operation screens. Even if your computer crashes, you can install FA SYSTEM for PC again once your computer is repaired. However, there is no means for restoring FA SYSTEM for PC settings that are set in the Machine Setup screen when your computer crashes. You can save FA SYSTEM for PC settings to floppy disk in case you computer crashes. You can also restore FA SYSTEM for PC settings. If you have changed the settings, be sure to save the new settings to floppy disk. Select the <Save> button in the Machine Setup screen. The following [Save and Restore Setting] dialog box appears.
-45-
2. SETUP
B-75044EN/02
Select the <Return> button to return to the Machine Setup screen.
Saving Settings
1 Insert the floppy disk that you want to save the settings to into the floppy disk drive. Before you insert the floppy disk, make sure that it is not write-protected. 2 3 The Insert the floppy disk into the A: drive. message box appears. Select the <OK> button. The save status is displayed at the bottom of the screen.
Saving and restoring of settings are carried out not for each machine that is set but for all machine settings.
NOTE Before you save the settings to 3.5" floppy disk, do not forget to press the <Save> button in the Machine Setup screen to write the settings to
Restoring Settings
1 2 3 Insert the floppy disk that you made by saving data into the floppy disk drive. The Insert the floppy disk into the A: drive. message box appears. Select the <OK> button. The restore status is displayed at the bottom of the screen.
Formatting the Floppy Disk

1 2 3 Insert the floppy disk that you want to format into the floppy disk drive. Before you insert the floppy disk, make sure that it is not write-protected. The Insert the floppy disk into the A: drive. message box appears. Select the <OK> button. The window for formatting appears. Press the <Start> button.
-46-
B-75044EN/02
3. NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT
NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT
-47-
B-75044EN/02
3.1
OUTLINE
NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT is the software package that allows a computer to function as an NC program file sever to connect multiple NCs. NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT has the following functions according to the communicating capability. (1) For DNC1 or DNC2 The following functions can be executed from the menu of NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT. K A computer can download an NC program to NC. K A computer can upload an NC program from NC. K NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT can show the list of NC programs stored in the NC memory. K NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT can delete an NC program stored in NC. The following functions can be executed by operating CRT/MDI of NC. K An NC machine can read an NC program from a computer. K An NC machine can punch a NC program to a computer. K NC can call an NC program for DNC operation. (2) For DNC1/Ethernet The following functions can be executed from the menu of NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT. K A computer can download an NC program to the NC memory. K A computer can upload an NC program from the NC memory. K NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT can show the list of NC programs stored in the NC memory. K NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT can delete an NC program stored in an NC. (3) For Reader/Puncher The following functions can be executed by operating on CRT/MDI of NC K An NC machine can read an NC program from a computer. K An NC machine can punch a NC program to a computer. K An NC machine can show the list of NC programs stored in a computer. K An NC machine can delete a NC program stored in a computer. K An NC machine can call an NC program for DNC operation.
-48-
B-75044EN/02
3.2
USING NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT

Double-click [NC Program Management] in the [FA System for PC] group dialog. The NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT screen will appear.
3.2.1
About The NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT Window

The NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT screen looks like this: Menu Bar Tool Bar Current Management Group Bar
Slider Management Group List
File List
Scroll Bar Split Bar Status Bar
Management Group List

The Management Group List looks on left side of the screen. The list of the management groups is shown in this screen. The list consists of the Machine List and the Directory List . (1) Machine List The Machine List indicates the machines that can be used by NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT. When a machine is double-clicked in the list, the contents of the default-directory assigned to the machine appears at the File List on the right.
-49-
(2) Directory List The list indicates work directories.
B-75044EN/02
The work directory is the directory of WindowsNT. When a directory is registered as the work directory in the NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT screen, a file can be transferred between the defaultdirectory and the other directory without handling the File Manager of WindowsNT.
File List
The File List looks on right side of the screen. The list displays the list of files in the Current Management Group.
Current Management Group Bar

The Current Management Group Bar indicates the information of Current Management Group such as the machine name, the path of default-directory, and the work directory.
Status Bar
The Status Bar indicates the total number of the files in the Current Management Group. The bar shows the message that the job is in progress when it takes a short time to deal with the job, such as the Current Management screen is refreshed.
Scroll Bar
You can scroll through the hidden part of the Management Group List and File List by clicking the Scroll Bar.
Slider
The slider is used to turn pages in the File List. When the total number of files in Current Management Group exceeds the maximum number of files that can be displayed in one page of the File List, the remaining files appear in the following pages. Any value within the range 100 to 5000 can be set in the Options screen as the maximum number of files that can be displayed in one page of the File List.
Menu Bar
The Menu Bar contains the commands for handling NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT.
Tool Bar
The Tool Bar contains the shortcut buttons providing quick access to the often utilized commands .
-50-
B-75044EN/02
Split Bar
The split bar separates the Management Group List and File List. You can move to change the width of the lists by using the mouse to point to the bar and dragging it to its new position.
3.2.2
Work with the File List
Changing the Current Management Group

1 When you first start the NC PROGRAM MANAGE-MENT screen, only the Machine List and Directory List are displayed in the Management Group List.
Click the sign(+) on the left side of the lists. The list is expanded and the name of the sub-directories are displayed like the structure of a tree. 2 Double-click the expanded sub-directory you want to select. The Current Management Group is refreshed, and the contents of the File List is shown.
K You can choose the Current Management Group from the list box on the left side of the tool bar. -51-
3. NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT Changing the View Form of the File List

-
B-75044EN/02
To display large icons of files, choose the [Large Icons] from the [View] menu, or click the [Large Icons] button on the tool bar. To display only names of files, click the [List] command from the [View] menu, or click the [List] button on the tool bar. To display complete information about each file, click the [Details] command from the [View] menu, or click the [Details] button on the tool bar.
Sorting the Contents of the File List

To sort files alphabetically by name, choose the [by Name] command from the [Arrange Icons] of [View] menu.
To sort files by type, choose the [Sort by Type] command from the [Arrange Icons] of [View] menu. To sort files by size, choose the [Sort by Size] command from the [Arrange Icons] of [View] menu. To sort files by date, choose the [Sort by Date] command from the [Arrange Icons] of [View] menu. -52-
B-75044EN/02
K When complete information of files are displayed, you can sort files by clicking one of the [Name], [Type], [Size], [Last modification date] column in the top of the File List.
Refreshing the File List

1 Choose the [Refresh] command from the [View] menu. The File List is updated.
NOTE 1 When you operate CRT/MDI of NC and the NC program is uploaded to the directory which is now shown in the File List of NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT, the File List isnt updated. In this case, refresh the list by using this command. 2 When an NC program is uploaded by using the menu explained later in 3.2.5. Transmitting an NC Program, the list is updated automatically, and you dont need to do this command.
-53-
B-75044EN/02
3.2.3
Work with the Directory List
Adding a Work Directory to the Directory List

1 Choose the [Add Directory] command from the [Directory] of [File] menu. The [Add Directory] dialog box will open.
Double-click the directory you want to add to the work directory, and click the <OK> button. Up to ten directories can be added to the Directory List.
-54-
B-75044EN/02
Freeing the Work Directory from the Directory List

1 Click the work directory you want to cancel in the Directory List of the Management Group List
Choose the [Free Directory] command from the [Directory] of [File] menu.
Replacing a Work Directory with the New One

1 2 3 Choose the work directory you want to replace from the Directory List of the Management Group List. And choose the [Change Directory] command from the [Directory] of [File] menu. The [Change Directory] dialog box will open. Double-click the directory you want to use, and click the <OK> button. K The [Change Directory] command is equal to the operation combined the [Free Directory] with the [Add Directory].
-55-
B-75044EN/02
3.2.4
Copying Files
Copying, Moving, Deleting and Renaming Files
Choose the file you want to copy from the File List. You can select more than one file by clicking files while pushing the Ctrl key
Click the [Copy] command in the [File] menu. The [Copy File] dialog box will open.
Copying
Choose the Management Group of destination, and click the <Copy> button. -56-
B-75044EN/02
Moving Files
1 Choose the file you want to move from the File List. You can select more than one file by clicking files while pushing the Ctrl key. 2 3 Click the [Move] command in the [File] menu. The [Move File] dialog box will open. Choose the Management Group of destination, and click the <Move> button.
Deleting Files
1 Choose the file you want to delete from the File List. You can select more than one file by clicking files while pushing the Ctrl key. 2 Click the [Delete] command in the [File] menu.
Renaming the file

1 2 3 Choose the file you want to rename from the File List. Click the [Rename] command in the [File] menu. The [Rename File] dialog box will open. Enter a new name of the file, and click the <Change> button.
-57-
B-75044EN/02
3.2.5
Browsing, Editing and Creating New Files
Browsing Files
1 2 Choose the file you want to browse in the File List. Click the [Browse] command in the [File] menu to start the viewer for the file you selected.
When the file is selected in the File List, the Edit File List screen is started. Refer to 6. FILE LIST MANAGEMENT for details of operations in the Edit File List screen. When the file is selected outside of the File List, the File Viewer integrated in NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT is started. To exit the File Viewer, click [Exit] in the menu.
-58-
B-75044EN/02
NOTE 1 File Viewer allows you to view only one file at once. If you browse another file while you are browsing the current file, the File Viewer displays the contents of the newly selected file. 2 3 File Viewer is a text viewer. It does not allow you to view binary files. The largest file size that File Viewer allows you to view is 32 Kbytes. When you browse files exceeding this size limit, only the first 32 Kbytes of the file are displayed. 4 You can also specify third-party viewer software in the [Options] dialog box. Refer to "3.2.8 Setting Options" for details.
Editing Files
NOTE 1 2 3 If you have selected the "Disable Editor" option in the [Options] dialog box, the [Edit] menu is not displayed. Files in work directory cannot be edited. The File List display in NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT is not automatically updated by saving changes made to files using the editor. Refresh the File List by the method described in "3.2.2 File List Operations."
1 2
Choose the file you want to edit in the File List. Click the [Edit] command in the [File] menu to start the editor for the file you selected.
When the file is selected in the File List, the Edit File List screen is started. Refer to 6. FILE LIST MANAGEMENT for details of operations in the Edit File List screen. When the file is selected outside of the File List, the editor set in the [Options] dialog box is started. The editor provided with WindowsNT is set as the default. -59-
B-75044EN/02
Creating New Files

NOTE 1 2 3 If you have selected the "Disable Editor" option in the Options menu, the [New File] menu is not displayed. Files cannot be created in the work directory. The File List display in NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT is not automatically updated by saving changes made to files using the editor. Refresh the File List by the method described in "3.2.2 File List Operations."
1 2
Double-click the directory in which you want to create the file to display the File List. Point at the [New] command in the [File] menu. File types that can be created are displayed. Click the desired file type.
When the file is selected in the File List, the editor that you specified in the Options menu is displayed. Use this editor for creating NC programs or subprogram.
-60-
B-75044EN/02
When the file is selected outside of the File List, the Edit File List screen is started. Use this screen for creating the File List. Refer to 6. FILE LIST MANAGEMENT for details of operations in the Edit File List screen.
3.2.6
Transmitting an NC Program
NOTE 1 2 To transmit an NC program, the communication process must be run. To transmit an NC program by operating the NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT screen, the computer must be connected to NC by either of DNC1, DNC2 or DNC1/Ethernet.
Displaying the List of NC Programs in the Memory of NC

1 Click the machine you want to access from the Machine List. The Current Management Group is changed, and the File List is updated to the contents of the default-directory assigned to the selected machine. 2 Click the [Start Communication] command the [communication] menu.
The File List is split in upper and lower area. The File List of the NC memory is displayed in the bottom half, and the File List of the Current Management Group is displayed in the top half.
-61-
B-75044EN/02
NC programs stored in the NC memory of Machine02 are shown. K When the [File List] command of the [Communication] menu is clicked, the File List of the NC memory is updated. 4 Choose the [End of communication] command from the
[Communication] menu, the following dialog box is shown.
If the <Yes> button is clicked, the communication of the machine is closed, and the File List of the NC memory disappears. If the <No> button is clicked, the communication of the machine is left open, and only the File List of the NC memory disappears. If the <Cancel> button is clicked, the [End of communication] command is canceled and the screen is returned to the state of the above item 3.
-62-
B-75044EN/02
Downloading an NC Program
1 Select the file you want to download from the File List in the Current Management Group. You can select more than one file by clicking files while pushing the Ctrl key.
Click the [Download] command of the [communication] menu.
The [Downloading NC Program] dialog box appears. Click the [Download] button.
-63-
4
B-75044EN/02
The selected NC programs are downloaded to NC, and the File List of NC memory is updated automatically.
Uploading a NC Program
1 Select the file you want to upload from the File List of the NC memory. You can select more than one file by clicking files while pushing the Ctrl key.
2 3 4
Click the [Upload] command of the [communication] menu. The [Uploading NC Program] dialog box appears. Click the [Upload] button. The selected NC programs are uploaded from the NC to the computer, and the File List in the Current Management Group is updated automatically.
-64-
B-75044EN/02
Deleting the NC Program in the Memory of a NC

1 Select the file you want to delete from the File List of the NC memory. You can select more than one file by clicking files while pushing the Ctrl key. 2 Click the [Delete] command of the [communication] menu, the [Delete NC Program] dialog will open.
If the <Delete> button is clicked, the selected NC program is deleted from the NC memory. If the <Cancel> button is clicked, the deletion is canceled.
-65-
3. NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT Switching Path Control Systems
B-75044EN/02
You can communicate with multiple paths CNC systems by checking the [Connect to multiple paths CNC] check box in the [Options] dialog box. 1 Point at the [Change Path] command in the [Communication] menu. This displays a list of available systems. Choose the desired system you want to switch to.
Currently selected Path 2 The screen displays a list of files in the NC memory of the system you switched over to. All [Communication] commands from here on are executed on all selected NC systems.
NOTE Up to two path control systems are supported.
3.2.7
Selecting the NC Program on the PC

When the NC unit doesnt support the Input/Output device that can be connected to FLOPPY CASSETTE or HANDY FILE, the file to be downloaded cant be selected from the list of the computer by operating the NC side. In case NC has the Input/Output device for only the tape reader or FANUC PPR, the file to be downloaded is selected by operating the menu of a computer at first. And then it can be downloaded by operating the NC side. This function is effective toward the NC which cant select the NC program stored in a remote device.
-66-
B-75044EN/02
Selecting the Transfer File

1 Select the file you want to download from the File List.
Choose the [Select Transfer File] command from the [File] menu. The [Select Transfer File] dialog box and [Change Transfer File] dialog box will open.
Confirm that the directory specified by the above item 1 is shown in the [File Name] text box of the [Change Transfer File] dialog box, and click the [Setting] button. Please keep 1 in the [Line No.] text box and 0 in the [Sequence No.] text box. -67-
4
B-75044EN/02
Confirm that the directory specified by the above item 3 is shown in the [File] label of the [ The Current Selecting File] group list of the [Select Transfer File] dialog box. And click the <OK> button.
The above selected file is downloaded when you request to download an NC program without specifying the NC program number in the NC side.
Clearing the Transfer File

1 Choose the [Select Transfer File] command from the [File] menu. The [Select Transfer File] dialog box will open.
Click the <Change> button in the [Select Transfer File] dialog box. The [Change Transfer File] dialog box will open.
Clean up the contents of the [File Name] text box by using the Backspace key, and click the < Setting> button.
-68-
B-75044EN/02
This space is cleared by the Backspace key

4 Confirm that the contents of the [File] label of the [The Current Selecting File] group list in the [Select Transfer File] dialog box is clear. And click the <OK> button. 5 The [Selecting the Transfer File] function is canceled. If you attempt to download an NC program without specifying the NC program number, any NC program isnt downloaded, and the computer notifies the error to the NC by resetting the communication. The [Select Transfer File] screen can be started too by double-clicking the [Select Transfer File] icon of the [FA System for PC] group instead of the above operation.
3.2.8
Setting Options
1 Click the [Options] command in the [Tools] menu. The [Options] dialog box will open.
-69-
2
B-75044EN/02
In the [File List] frame, make settings relating to File List display on your computer. K When the [Reflesh File List before sorting] check box is checked, the latest file list information is acquired before the File List display order is changed. If this check box is not checked, the File List display order is changed based on the details currently displayed in the File List. NOTE, however, that if the File List has several pages of data, the latest file list information is acquired before the File List display order is changed regardless of the setting of this check box. K If the [Do not display confirmation message when switching pages] check box is checked, the confirmation dialog box will not be displayed when you switch pages in the File List. K If you change the value of the [Maximum number of displayable files in File List] check box, you can change the number of files that can be displayed in one page of the File List.
In the [Browse File] frame, make settings relating to file browsing. K If you select the [Disable External Viewer] option, the File Viewer integrated in NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT is used. K If you select the [Enable External Viewer] option, you can specify third-party viewer software. Enter the command for starting the editor in the [Editor start command] box.
In the [Edit File] fame, make settings relating to file editing. K If you select the [Disable Editor] option, you can no longer edit files or create new files. K If you select the [Enable Editor] option, you can edit files or create new files using the specified editor. Enter the command for starting the editor in the [Editor start command] box. NOTE, however, that the [Edit File List] screen is used for editing the File List.
In the [Communication] frame, make setting relating to communication with the NC. K If the [Connect to multiple paths CNC] check box is checked, you can specify the NC system with which you are to communicate. If this check box is not checked, communication is carried out with only the 1st of the multiple connected NC systems. Communication with other NC systems is not possible.
Click the <OK> button to enable the new settings. To cancel setting midway and restore the original values, click the <Cancel> button.
-70-
B-75044EN/02
4. FA LIBRARY
FA LIBRARY
-71-
4. FA LIBRARY
B-75044EN/02
4.1
OUTLINE
This chapter describes the user interface of the functions supported by FA LIBRARY of FA SYSTEM for PC.
4.1.1
Service Type
FA LIBRARY is composed of System service, Request service, and Diagnosis and other services. System service is the function group for handling the system such as the start and end of the communication process. Request service is the function group for handling NC such as the download of an NC program. All functions for System service are processed synchronously. But for Request service, two types of functions are provided; synchronous functions and asynchronous functions. An asynchronous and a synchronous functions are different in the timing when the called function returns the control to an application program. A synchronous function waits until FA SYSTEM for PC finishes the request, and returns its result. Though, an asynchronous function sends a request and returns the control to an application program at once without waiting for the result. The result can be checked by the other function. For example, the F_DownloadFileNumber function, which downloads an NC program, doesnt return until the download is finished (synchronous treatment). The F_DownloadFileNumberEx function requests the system descriptor ID which can be used to get the result. When an application program calls the F_Response function with the descriptor ID as an argument, it can be confirmed whether the download is finished. And if so, the result indicates that the download was successful or not. If an asynchronous function is used, one application program can handle more than one service at the same time because each asynchronous function doesnt wait for the result. When you use System service or Request service, you must judge the result. In such case, there are some useful functions like F_Response in the function group of Diagnosis and other services. For details on the log library, refer to "4.5 Log Library." -72to download an NC program, and returns at once. The return value is the
B-75044EN/02
4. FA LIBRARY
4.1.2
How to Read the Library Function

The functions are classified according to the service group explained in 4.2 System service, 4.3 Request service, and 4.4 Diagnosis and other services and 4.5 Log Service. As for System service, the most application program can be satisfied with the functions of only Clause 4.2. Almost all application specifications can be satisfied by only the functions of clauses 4.2.1 and 4.2.2. Refer to clauses 4.2.3 to 4.2.12 if necessary. As for Request service, refer to the function in accordance with the specification of your application. For details on Diagnostics and Other Services, be sure to read about the functions in clauses 4.4.1, 4.4.6 and 4.4.7. Refer to other clauses if necessary when these functions appear in the explanation of the function you use. Every function is explained by the items of SYNOPSIS, DESCRIPTION, and RETURN VALUE. SYNOPSIS describes the calling form of function. In case of VC++, F_ is given to the top of the function name. F_ isnt stuck to the function for VB. The contents of DESCRIPTION and RETURN VALUE are common with the function for VB and VC++. When you develop the application program with VB, regard the function name described in explanation as the name without F_. Some functions have the argument of the tool post number. In case of the multipath NC which has several tool posts, the tool post number indicates which tool post should comply with the request . As for DNC2, be sure to set up the value of 0 because the tool post number cant be used. As for DNC1 or DNC1/Ethernet, set the value of 1 in case of the first tool post. And set 2 in case of the second tool post. All functions of FA LIBRARY can be used for the NC connected with DNC1, DNC2 and DNC1/Ethernet, except for a special mention.
-73-
4. FA LIBRARY
B-75044EN/02
4.1.3
About the Development Language of the Application Program

The functions can be called from both of Microsoft Visual Basic Ver4.0(VB) and Microsoft Visual C++ Ver4.0(VC++). (For details on VB and VC++ versions, refer to "2.1 Computer Operating Environment.")
In case of Visual Basic

In case of VB, the user interface is provided with OLE Automation. So, Object is created by the CreateObject() function, and the service can be requested by calling Method of Object. FanucCom.Library must be specified when Object is created by CreateObject(). Dim Obj As Object Dim Rtn As Boolean Set Obj = CreateObject(FanucCom.Library) Rtn = Obj.Begin Rtn = Obj.CreateCommunication When FA LIBRARY is installed, FanucCom.Library is registered automatically to Registry in WindowsNT as OLE Automation.
In case of VC++
In case of C++, the user interface is provided with DLL. Class of C++ is not used for user interface. Therefore, each function is called directly. BOOL Rtn; Rtn = F_Begin(); Rtn = F_CreateCommunication(); In case of the library for C++, F_ is stuck to the top of a function name. This character indicates that the function is provided by FANUC. When you make an application program, the following files are used. K The file which must be included while an application program is compiled. INCLUDE FComLib.h K The library modules which must be combined while an application program is linked LIB FComLib.lib (for release) LIB FComLibD.lib (for debug) LIB LogLib.lib (for release) LIB LogLibD.lib (for debug) -74-
B-75044EN/02
4. FA LIBRARY
K The DLL files which are referred while an application program is running BIN FComLib.dll (for release) BIN FComLibD.dll (for debug) BIN LogLib.dll (for release) BIN LogLibD.dll (for debug) The above relative directories are continued from the directory where FA LIBRARY is installed. When an application program is compiled by using VC++, both of a debug and a release version module are created. The debug version module includes the debug information; the memory utilization, the records of tracing the control and so on. The release version module doesnt include these information. To develop an application program, debug the program in a debug version at first, and then check it with a release version. Though the program must be checked for both of a debug and a release version, these two processes make the quality program, and these efforts should be resulted in efficiency. By reason of VC++ descriptions, if a program is consisted of a debug and a release version modules, it doesnt work correctly. FA LIBRARY provides two modules; the debug and the release versions. When you develop the application with a debug version, please use the debug version library . And use the release version library when you make up an application program of a release version.
4.1.4
About Starting Applications You Have Developed

Pay attention to the following when starting applications made using this library. Let's assume that the application made by the user is named YourApp.exe and that the directory in which FA SYSTEM for PC is C: FpFaSys.
In case of Visual Basic

YourApp.exe starts whichever directory it is on.
In case of Visual C++

Place YourApp.exe in C: FpFaSys. If you place it in a different directory, add the path for pointing C: FpFaSys Bin to the system variable PATH. To set system variable PATH by starting [System] in the [Control Panel] and set in [Setup]. The library for VC++ is DLL, and these are stored to C: FpFaSys Bin. So, that location must be set to the OS.
-75-
4. FA LIBRARY
B-75044EN/02
4.1.5
About Sample Program

Sample programs are appended in the package of FA LIBRARY. These sample programs are made up of the FA LIBRARY functions described in Section 4.2 to 4.5.
Files and Directories

There are two sample programs made by using VC++(version 4.0) and VB (version 4.0). The two sample programs have the same operation and menu layout. The executable and the source files of the two programs are placed in the following directories. Type of program VC++ VB executable file BIN FComTst.exe BIN FComTVB.exe source file SAMPLE FComTst *.* SAMPLE FComTVB *.*
The above relative directories are continued from the directory where FA LIBRARY is installed. The following table shows the compatibility between FA LIBRARY functions and each communication protocol, and a list of sample files used by these functions.
-76-
B-75044EN/02
4. FA LIBRARY
Relationship between the functions of FA LIBRARY and the sample program files
Function Communication Protocol Compatibility DNC1 DNC2 Ethernet
DNC1/
VB frmCreateComm.frm
VC++ fCreateManager.cpp
4.2.1. Start of Communication Process 4.2.2. End of Communication Process 4.2.3. Start of Communication 4.2.4.Stop of Communication 4.2.5. Confirmation of Communication 4.2.6. Getting List of Registered Machine Numbers 4.2.7. Getting of List of Communicating Machines 4.2.12. Getting Information about Machine 4.3.1. Downloading NC Program requested by Computer 4.3.2. Uploading NC Program requested by Computer 4.3.3. External Reset 4.3.4. Cycle Start 4.3.5. Selecting NC Program in NC 4.3.6. Deleting NC Program in NC 4.3.7. Reading NC Identification 4.3.8. Reading List of NC Programs in NC 4.3.9. Establishing DNC1 Connection 4.3.10. Confirmation of DNC1 Connection 4.3.11. Reading Alarm Information 4.3.12. Reading Tool Offset 4.3.13. Writing Tool Offset 4.3.14. Reading Custom Macro Variable 4.3.15. Writing Custom Macro Variable 4.3.16. Reading Tool Life Management Information 4.3.17. Reading PMC Data 4.3.18. Writing PMC Data 4.3.19 Reading NC Parameters 4.3.20 Writing NC Parameters 4.3.21 Computer Start DNC Operation 4.3.22 Canceling Computer Start Download 4.3.23 Canceling Computer Start Upload 4.4.3. Freeing Descriptor ID 4.4.4. Getting Result of Asynchronous Treatment 4.4.5. Getting Error Code 4.4.6. End of FA LIBRARY
frmTerminateComm.frm fTerminateManager.cpp frmOpen.frm frmClose.frm frmIsOpen.frm frmMachineList.frm frmMachineList.frm frmMachineInfo.frm frmDownload.frm fOpen.cpp fClose.cpp fIsOpen.cpp fMachineNumber.cpp fMachineNumber.cpp fMachineInfo.cpp fDownload.cpp
frmUpload.frm
fUpload.cpp
frmReset.frm frmStart.frm frmSelect.frm frmDelete.frm frmIdentify.frm frmDirectory.frm frmEstablishDnc1.frm frmConfirmDnc1.frm frmAlarm.frm
fReset.cpp fStart.cpp fSelect.cpp fDelete.cpp fIdentify.cpp fDirectory.cpp fEstablishDnc1.cpp fConfirmDnc1.cpp fAlarm.cpp
frmReadToolOffset.frm fReadToolOffset.cpp frmWriteToolOffset.frm fWriteToolOffset.cpp frmReadMacro.frm frmWriteMacro.frm frmToolLife.frm fReadMacro.cpp fWriteMacro.cpp fToolLife.cpp
frmReadPMC.frm frmWritePMC.frm frmReadParam.frm frmWriteParam.frm frmDownload.frm frmDownload.frm frmUpload.frm frmAsync.frm frmAsync.frm frmMain.frm frmMain.frm
fReadPMC.cpp fWritePMC.cpp fReadParam.cpp fWriteParam.cpp fDownload.cpp fDownload.cpp fUpload.cpp fAsync.cpp fAsync.cpp FComTstView.cpp FComTstDoc.cpp
: Supported
: Not supported -77-
: To be supported
-: Not required
4. FA LIBRARY Using Sample Program

- Starting Sample Program
1 Confirm the next notes before starting the sample program.
B-75044EN/02
K A computer must be connected to NC correctly, and the settings of the Machine Configuration screen must correspond with the communication parameters in NC. The sample program can be started by clicking [ Sample (VB40)] or [Sample (VC++)] in the [FANUC System for PC] group.
The points for starting the VB sample program In case of VB, the user interface is provided with OLE Automation. So, Object is created by the CreateObject() function, and the services can be requested by calling Method of Object. About the Form_Load() function in the frmMain.frm file Set LogLib = CreateObject("LogClient.Library") Rtn = LogLib.InvokeLogServer("") Set FALib = CreateObject("FanucCom.Library") Rtn = FALib.Begin
The Object of OLE Automation can be created by the CreateObject() function of VB. The name of Object is FanucCom.Library. The FALib global variable is defined in the Common.bas module.
-78-
B-75044EN/02
4. FA LIBRARY
The points for staring the VC++ sample program In case of C++, the user interface is provided with DLL. The functions are not Class of C++. Therefore, each function is called directly. About the CFComTstDoc::CFComTstDoc() function in the CFComTstDoc.cpp file ::F_InvokeLogServer(""); ::F_Begin(); This is not necessary when FA LIBRARY is used with the LogServer already started. See "4.5 Log Library." This is absolutely necessary for initializing FA LIBRARY.
- Starting to communicate process

2 The main screen of the sample program is shown like this.
Select the [Start Communication Process] command from the [System Service] menu in the sample program's main menu.
Press the <Action> button. Communication was started if [Success] is displayed at [Result:]. If [Fail] is displayed, exit the [Start Communication Process] dialog and press the <Get Last Error> button under the menu. This allows you to find out the cause of the error.
-79-
4. FA LIBRARY
B-75044EN/02
Point in the VB sample program for starting the communication process About the cmdDoit_Click () function in the frmCreateComm.frm file Rtn = FALib.CreateCommunication()
Point in the VC++ sample program for starting the communication process About the CfCreateManager::OnOK() function in the fCreateManager.cpp file bRtn = ::F_CreateCommunication(); This starts the communication process. The return value is used for judging whether processing succeeded or failed.
- Downloading NC program
5 To download an NC program, place the NC program in the defaultdirectory in the computer. The default-directory is defined in the Machine Configuration screen. Click the [Download] command of the [Request Service 1] menu.
Enter the machine number in the [Machine Number] text box. Enter 0 in [Tool Post Number]. There are the four ways to download an NC program. An NC program can be downloaded by using any of the four ways. File Number: The files of the default-directory are arranged in order of ASCII code, and the file is selected according to that order. -80-
B-75044EN/02
4. FA LIBRARY
NC Program Number: The file named Oxxxx.yyy in the default-directory is downloaded. Where, xxxx is the NC program number specified in the above screen. yyy is the file extension specified in [Default Extension] of [General] of the Machine Configuration screen. File Name: The file is selected from the default-directory, and it is downloaded. File-Path: The file specified by the path in the screen is downloaded. When you want to download the O0003.DAT program in the defaultdirectory, click the [File Name] and enter O0003.DAT. Or click the [NC Program Number] and enter 3. 6 After the NC program to be downloaded is selected, check the [Synchronous] check box, and click the <Action> button. If [Success] appears in [Result], the download is successful. If [Failed] appears, click the <Get Last Error> button in the menu. The cause of the failure can be found out.
The points for the download in the VB sample program About the cmdDoit_Click() function in the frmDownload.frm file If optFileNumber.Value = True Then If chkSynchro.Value = 1 Then Rtn = FALib.DownloadFileNumber( _ MachineNumber, ToolPostNumber, _ FileNumber _ ) Else ID = FALib.DownloadFileNumberEx( _ MachineNumber, ToolPostNumber, _ FileNumber _ ) End If
-81-
4. FA LIBRARY
ElseIf optFileName.Value = True Then If chkSynchro.Value = 1 Then Rtn = FALib.DownloadFileName( _ MachineNumber, ToolPostNumber, _ FileName _ ) Else ID = FALib.DownloadFileNameEx( _ MachineNumber, ToolPostNumber, _ FileName _ ) End If ElseIf optONumber.Value = True Then If chkSynchro.Value = 1 Then Rtn = FALib.DownloadONumber( _ MachineNumber, ToolPostNumber, _ ONumber _ ) Else ID = FALib.DownloadONumberEx( _ MachineNumber, ToolPostNumber, _ ONumber_ ) End If ElseIf optFilePath.Value = True Then If chkSynchro.Value = 1 Then Rtn = FALib.DownloadFilePath( _ MachineNumber, ToolPostNumber, _ FilePath _ ) Else ID = FALib.DownloadFilePathEx( _ MachineNumber, ToolPostNumber, _ FilePath _ ) End If End If
B-75044EN/02
-82-
B-75044EN/02
4. FA LIBRARY
The points for the download in the VC++ sample program About the OnOK() function in the fDownload.cpp file switch(m_iFileType){ case 0: // File Number if(TRUE == m_bSynchro){ bRtn = ::F_DownloadFileNumber( m_lMachineNumber, m_lToolPostNumber, lFileNumber ); }else{ lID = ::F_DownloadFileNumberEx( m_lMachineNumber, m_lToolPostNumber, lFileNumber ); } break; case 1: // File Name if(TRUE == m_bSynchro){ bRtn = ::F_DownloadFileName( m_lMachineNumber, m_lToolPostNumber, (LPCTSTR)strFileName ); } else{ lID = ::F_DownloadFileNameEx( m_lMachineNumber, m_lToolPostNumber, (LPCTSTR)strFileName ); } break;
-83-
4. FA LIBRARY
case 2: // O Number if(TRUE == m_bSynchro){ bRtn = ::F_DownloadONumber( m_lMachineNumber, m_lToolPostNumber, lONumber ); }else{ lID = ::F_DownloadONumberEx( m_lMachineNumber, m_lToolPostNumber, lONumber ); } break; case 3: // File Path if(TRUE == m_bSynchro){ bRtn = ::F_DownloadFilePath( m_lMachineNumber, m_lToolPostNumber, (LPCTSTR)strFilePath ); }else{ lID = ::F_DownloadFilePathEx( m_lMachineNumber, m_lToolPostNumber, (LPCTSTR)strFilePath ); } break; }
B-75044EN/02
An NC program is selected by the file number, and it is downloaded with a synchronous treatment. The arguments are the machine number, the tool post number, and the file number specified in the screen. An NC program is selected by the file number, and it is downloaded with an asynchronous treatment. This function has the same arguments as the synchronous function. An NC program is selected by the NC program number, and it is downloaded with a synchronous treatment. The arguments are the machine number, the tool post number, and the NC program number specified in the screen. An NC program is selected by the NC program number, and it is downloaded with an asynchronous treatment. This function has the same arguments as the synchronous function.
-84-
B-75044EN/02
4. FA LIBRARY
An NC program is selected by the file name, and it is downloaded with a synchronous treatment. The arguments are the machine number, the tool post number, and the file name specified in the screen. An NC program is selected by the NC file name, and it is downloaded with an asynchronous treatment. This function has the same arguments as the synchronous function. An NC program is selected by the file path, and it is downloaded with a synchronous treatment. The arguments are the machine number, the tool post number, and the file path specified in the screen. An NC program is selected by the file path, and it is downloaded with an asynchronous treatment. This function has the same arguments as the synchronous function. In any case of synchronous functions, its return value indicates whether the download is successful or not. In case of asynchronous, the download is failed if the return value is zero. The non-zero return value indicates the descriptor ID for getting the download result.
Try to download an NC program with an asynchronous treatment. Clear the [Synchronous] check box, and then click the <Action> button. The descriptor ID is displayed in [ Return Value]. Click the [Asynchronous] command of the menu. The following dialog box will appear.
Enter the descriptor ID in [ID] of this dialog, and then click the <Response> button. When the download is in progress, In Progress is displayed in [Result]. When it is complete, Success or Failed is displayed. In case that In Progress is displayed, Click the <Response> button after a short time. If Failed is displayed, the error code is displayed in [Error Code] at the same time. When Success or Failed is displayed in [Result], click the <Free ID> button. -85-
4. FA LIBRARY
B-75044EN/02
The points for getting the result when an NC program is downloaded with an asynchronous treatment in the VB sample program. About the Response_Click() function in the frmAsync.frm file Rtn = FALib.Response(ID, Result, ErrorCode) If Rtn = True Then Select Case Result Case 0 lblResult.Caption = Msg_InProgress Case 1 lblResult.Caption = Msg_Success Case 2 lblResult.Caption = Msg_Failed lblError.Caption = "0x" + Hex(ErrorCode) End Select End If
The points for getting the result when an NC program is downloaded with an asynchronous treatment in the VC++ sample program. About the OnBtnAsyncResponse() function in the fAsync.cpp file bRtn = ::F_Response(m_lID, &lResult, &lError); if(TRUE == bRtn){ switch(lResult){ case 0: m_strResult.LoadString(IDS_INPROCESS); break; case 1: m_strResult.LoadString(IDS_SUCCESS); break; case 2: m_strResult.LoadString(IDS_FAILED); m_strErrorCode.Format("0x%8.8x", lError); break; } }
-86-
B-75044EN/02
4. FA LIBRARY
Gets the result of the asynchronous treatment. The m_IID argument is the descriptor ID entered in the screen. If the return value is TRUE, the function succeeded in getting the result. If the result is 0, the download is in progress. If the result is 1, the download is complete successfully. If the result is 2, the download is ended in failure. In failure, the cause can be found out by checking the error code.
The points for freeing the descriptor ID in the VB sample program About the cmdFreeID_Click() function in the frmAsync.cpp file Call FALib.FreeID(ID)
The points for freeing the descriptor ID in the VB sample program About the OnBtnAsyncFreeid() function in the Async.cpp file ::F_FreeID(m_lID); Frees the descriptor ID. The m_IID argument is the descriptor ID entered in the screen.
-87-
4. FA LIBRARY
- Reading PMC data
8
B-75044EN/02
Try to read the PMC data. Click the [Read PMC Data] command of the [Request Service 2] menu.
Enter the machine number and the tool post number. When you want to read the PMC address R0003 to R0007, enter R in the [Address of PMC data] text box, 3 in the [ Number of PMC Data], and 5 in the [Count of PMC Data]. Next, check the [Synchronous] check box, and then click the <Action> button. If the PMC data is read successfully, the PMC data is displayed. The [ Address of PMC Data] and [Number of PMC Data] can be entered with the same format regardless of the kind of NCs. But, the limit of PMC address varies according to the kind of PMC units. Refer to the PMC manual for details.
-88-
B-75044EN/02
4. FA LIBRARY
Note that the value of [Order] is not a PMC number. In the above case, a 1 of [Order] corresponds with R0003. And a 5 does R0007.
The points for reading the PMC data in the VB sample program About the cmdDoit_Click() function in the frmReadPMC.frm file If chkSynchro.Value = 1 Then ID = FALib.ReadPMCData( _ MachineNumber, ToolPostNumber, _ PMCAddress, PMCNumber, Count _ ) Rtn = CopyData(lblResult) Call FALib.FreeID(ID) If Rtn = True Then frmPMCDisplay.Show 1 End If Else ID = FALib.ReadPMCDataEx( _ MachineNumber, ToolPostNumber, _ PMCAddress, PMCNumber, Count _ ) End If About the CopyData() function in the frmReadPMC.frm file Rtn = FALib.GetCount(PMC_ID, PMCCount) ReDim PMC_Data(PMCCount) As Long Rtn = FALib.CopyPMCData( _ PMC_ID, PMC_Data(1), PMCCount, CopiedCount _ ) About the Form_Load() function in the frmPMCDisplay.frm file For Count = 1 To PMC_Count Item = DataToList(Count, PMC_Data(Count)) lstPMC.AddItem Item Next Count
-89-
4. FA LIBRARY
B-75044EN/02
The points for reading the PMC data in the VC++ sample program About the OnBtnReadpmcRead() function in the fReadPMC.cpp file CfPMCDisplay PMCDisplay; if(TRUE == m_bSynchro){ lID = ::F_ReadPMCData( m_lMachineNumber, m_lToolPostNumber, (LPCTSTR)m_strPMCAddress, m_lPMCNumber, m_lCount ); bRtn = PMCDisplay.Setup(lID, &m_strReadResult); ::F_FreeID(lID); if(TRUE == bRtn){ PMCDisplay.DoModal(); } }else{ lID = ::F_ReadPMCDataEx( m_lMachineNumber, m_lToolPostNumber, (LPCTSTR)m_strPMCAddress, m_lPMCNumber, m_lCount ); }
About the Setup() function in the fPMCDisplay.cpp file bRtn = ::F_GetCount(lID, &lTotal); Create((DWORD)lTotal); bRtn = ::F_CopyPMCData( lID, m_lplPMCData, lTotal, &lCopiedCount ); About the OnInitDialog() function in the fPMCDisplay.cpp file for(lLoopCount = 0; lLoopCount < m_lCount; lLoopCount++){ DataToList lLoopCount+1, m_lplPMCData[lLoopCount], &strBuf ); iRtn = m_CListPMCData.AddString((LPCTSTR)strBuf); }
-90-
B-75044EN/02
4. FA LIBRARY
Reads the PMC data with a synchronous treatment. The arguments are the machine number, the tool post number, the PMC address, the PMC number, and the count of the PMC data entered in the screen. Copies PMC data by using the descriptor ID. (The step to are executed.) The descriptor ID is freed. Displays the PMC data. (The step is executed.) Reads the PMC data with an asynchronous treatment. The arguments are the same as the synchronous function. Gets the count of PMC data. (If the application program already knew the value of the count, it doesnt need to call the function.) Creates the array for copying PMC data. Copies the PMC data to the array. To display PMC data, the PMC data copied in the array is translated into a character string, and writes it to the list box. This sequence is repeated according to the number of PMC data.
10 This step is explained about reading PMC data with an asynchronous treatment. The asynchronous and the synchronous treatment can be operated by the same settings, but clear the [Synchronous] check box and click the <Action> button. The descriptor ID is displayed in [ Return Value]. Click the [Asynchronous] command of the menu. The [Asynchronous Procedure] dialog will appear. Enter the descriptor ID in [ID] of the [ Asynchronous Procedure] dialog, and then click the <Response> button. If Success is displayed in [Result] of the [Asynchronous Procedure] dialog, Click the <Display Data> button in the [Read PMC Data] dialog. The PMC data is displayed. Lastly click the <Free ID> button in the [Asynchronous Procedure] dialog.
-91-
4. FA LIBRARY
- Exiting the Communication Process
B-75044EN/02
11 Select the [Exit Communication Process] command from the [System Service] menu in the sample program's main menu. The dialog box below appears.
12 Press the <Action> button. Communication was started if [Success] is displayed at [Result:]. If [Fail] is displayed, exit the [Start Communication Process] dialog and press the <Get Last Error> button under the menu. This allows you to find out the cause of the error.
Point in the VB sample program for exiting the communication process About the cmdDoit_Click () function in the frmCreateComm.frm file ComputerName = txtComputerName.Text Rtn = FALib.TerminateCommunication(ComputerName)
Point in the VC++ sample program for exiting the communication process About the CfCreateManager::OnOK() function in the fCreateManager.cpp file lpszHostName = (LPCTSTR)m_strHostName; bRtn = ::F_TerminateCommunication(lpszHostName); Set the name of the computer on which the communication process is to be exited. Set "". This starts the communication process. The return value is used for judging whether processing succeeded or failed.
-92-
B-75044EN/02
4. FA LIBRARY
- Finishing the sample program

13 Click the [End] command of the [File] menu in the sample program. The sample program is finished.
The points for finishing the VB sample program About the Form_Unload() function in the frmMain.frm file FALib.End Set FALib = Nothing LogLib.TerminateLogServer Set LogLib = Nothing
The points for finishing the VC++ sample program About the OnCloseDocument() function in the FcomTstDoc.cpp file ::F_End(); ::F_TerminateLogServer(); Calls the function which terminates FA LIBRARY. In case of VB, Object is cleared by substituting Nothing. Execute this to terminate the LogServer. To start the LogServer, clear the object when the following is executed: Set LogLib = CreateObject("LogClient.Library")
-93-
4. FA LIBRARY
B-75044EN/02
14 The above describes how to operate the typical services in the sample program. In addition, the sample program includes the following services. For more information on each function in FA LIBRARY, refer to the explanation of each function described later.
-94-
B-75044EN/02
4. FA LIBRARY
4.2
SYSTEM SERVICE
System service functions are used for starting and terminating FA SYSTEM for PC, acquiring setting information, getting operating status and controlling notice messages. To start and terminate FA SYSTEM for PC, use the F_CreateCommunication, F_Open, F_Close and F_TerminateCommunication functions. The following figure shows the relationship between programs that run on FA SYSTEM for PC and these four functions.
Level 1 Log Program Group
LogServer Program Level 2 Management Program Group FA System icon
CDA Manager Program Level 3
Communication Manager Program
This
icon
starts
all
programs in levels 1 to 3.
Communication Program Group
DNC1/Ethernet Communication Program
DNC1 Communication Program
DNC2 Communication Program
Reader/Puncher Communication Program
Levels 1 to 3 Start Procedure Programs must be started in order level 1 through to 3. Levels 1 to 3 Start and Exit Functions Level 1 Start by 4.5.1 F_InvokeLogServer and terminate by 4.5.2 F_TerminateLogServer. Level 2 Start by 4.2.1 F_CreateCommunication. This function also starts at the same time as level 3. Terminate by 4.2.2 F_TerminateCommunication. This function also terminates at the same time as level 3. Level 3 Start by 4.2.2 F_Open for each machine. This function is not required when F_CreateCommunication has been executed. Terminate by 4.2.3 F_Close for each machine. F_Open is used to restart communication. This function is not required when F_CreateCommunication has been executed.
-95-
4. FA LIBRARY
B-75044EN/02
To start FA SYSTEM for PC manually, click the [FA System] icon as described in "2.5 Starting and Stopping FA SYSTEM for PC." Follow the procedure below to communicate with an NC by FA SYSTEM for PC. First start a level 1 program. Start the LogServer by F_InvokeLogServer. Next, start levels 2 and 3 simultaneously using F_CreateCommunication. Communication with each machine cannot be initiated without starting F_CreateCommunication. If a level 2 program has been started by F_CreateCommunication, then you can terminate the communication program for each machine by F_Close or start the communication program for each machine by F_Open. When level 1 to 3 programs are started, download, upload and read/write of variables are possible using the functions described in "4.3 Request Service."
4.2.1
SYNOPSIS
Start of Communication Process < F_CreateCommunication > *
VB C++
Function CreateCommunication() As Boolean BOOL F_CreateCommunication(void);
DESCRIPTION
F_CreateCommunication starts the communication process in the computer where the application program is running. It is necessary that the communication process and the calling application are in the same directory. When the communication process is already started according to 2.5 Starting and Stopping the Communication Process, it isnt necessary to start it. This function doesnt have any effect if the communication process is already started.
NOTE 1 2 To execute this function, a level 1 program must already be executed. When this function is executed, the "4.2.3 Start of Communication<F_Open>" function is automatically executed on all machines set in the Machine Setup screen. So, the F_Open function need not be executed for each machine. If you execute the F_Open function after this function is executed, the error "Communication is already started (error code: 0x00010001)" occurs. You may ignore this error.
-96-
B-75044EN/02
4. FA LIBRARY
RETURN VALUE
TRUE is returned if F_CreateCommunication succeeds, FALSE is returned if it fails. In failure, an error code can be acquired by calling F_GetLastError.
4.2.2
SYNOPSIS
End of Communication Process < F_TerminateCommunication > *
VB C++
Function TerminateCommunication (ByVal ComputerName As String) As Boolean BOOL F_TerminateCommunication (LPCTSTR ComputerName);
DESCRIPTION
F_TerminateCommunication terminates the communication process which is running in the computer specified by ComputerName. When the value of ComputerName is NULL, or when the character length of ComputerName is zero, F_TerminateCommunication can terminate the communication process in the computer where the application program is running .
NOTE 1 To exit FA SYSTEM for PC, be sure to execute this function to exit level 2 programs. Level 2 programs are not exited even if you execute F_Close for all machines. 2 When this function is executed, the "4.2.4 Stop of Communication<F_Close>" function is automatically executed on all machines set in the Machine Setup screen. So, the F_Close function need not be executed for each machine. If you execute the F_Close function after this function is executed, the error "Communication Manager is not started (error code: 0x1004020f)" occurs. You may ignore this error.
RETURN VALUE
TRUE is returned if F_TerminateCommunication succeeds, FALSE is returned if it fails. In failure, an error code can be acquired by calling F_GetLastError.
-97-
4. FA LIBRARY
B-75044EN/02
4.2.3
SYNOPSIS
Start of Communication < F_Open >
VB C++
Function Open(ByVal MachineNumber As Long) As Boolean BOOL F_Open(LONG MachineNumber);
DESCRIPTION
F_Open starts communicating with the NC of the machine number specified by MachineNumber.
NOTE 1 This function is used to start communication for each machine. To use this function, you must execute F_InvokeLogServer and F_CreateCommunication to start level 1 and level 2 programs. If you execute this function when level 1 and level 2 functions are not started, the error "Communication Manager is not started (error code: 0x1004020f)" occurs. 2 When you execute F_CreateCommunication, communication with all registered machines is started.
RETURN VALUE
TRUE is returned if F_Open succeeds, FALSE is returned if it fails. In failure, an error code can be acquired by calling F_GetLastError.
-98-
B-75044EN/02
4. FA LIBRARY
4.2.4
SYNOPSIS
Stop of Communication < F_Close >
VB C++
Function Close(ByVal MachineNumber As Long) As Boolean BOOL F_Close(LONG MachineNumber);
DESCRIPTION
F_Close stops communicating with the NC of the machine number specified by MachineNumber. F_Close is applied to level 3 programs.
NOTE 1 This function is used for terminating communication with each machine. Level 2 programs are not terminated even if you execute this function on all machines. To exit FA SYSTEM for PC, be sure to execute F_TerminateCommunication. 2 When you execute F_TerminateCommunication, communication with all registered machines is terminated.
RETURN VALUE
TRUE is returned if F_Close succeeds, FALSE is returned if it fails. In failure, an error code can be acquired by calling F_GetLastError.
4.2.5
SYNOPSIS
Confirmation of Communication
< F_IsOpen >
VB C++
Function IsOpen (ByVal MachineNumber As Long) As Boolean BOOL F_IsOpen(LONG MachineNumber);
DESCRIPTION
F_IsOpen checks whether the computer communicates with the NC of the machine number specified by MachineNumber.
RETURN VALUE
F_IsOpen returns TRUE if the computer is communicating with the specified machine. Otherwise, FALSE is returned.
-99-
4. FA LIBRARY
B-75044EN/02
4.2.6
SYNOPSIS
Getting List of Registered Machine Numbers <F_GetAllMachineNumber >
VB C++ VB
Function GetAllMachineNumber (ByVal ComputerName As String) As Long LONG F_GetAllMachineNumber (LPCTSTR ComputerName); Function CopyMachineNumber (ByVal ID As Long, MachineList As Long, ByVal Count As Long, CopiedCount As Long) As Boolean
C++
BOOL F_CopyMachineNumber (LONG ID, LONG* MachineList, LONG Count, LONG* CopiedCount);
DESCRIPTION
The following describes the procedure for getting the list of the registered machines which are defined in the Machine Configuration screen. 1 F_GetAllMachineNumber gets the list of the machines registered in the computer specified by ComputerName. When the function succeeds, the return value indicates the descriptor ID for pointing the list of the registered machine numbers. 2 F_GetCount gets the number of the registered machines associated with the descriptor ID. ID specifies the descriptor ID returned by F_GetAllMachineNumber. Refer to Clause 4.4.1 for details 3 F_CopyMachineNumber takes out the list of the registered machine numbers. ID specifies the descriptor ID returned by F_GetAll MachineNumber. Count specifies the number of the registered machines you want to read at a time. MachineList points to the array for placing machine numbers. The array must be composed of the four-byte integral elements of the same number as Count specifies.
-100-
B-75044EN/02
4. FA LIBRARY
MachineList
V V V
Count
Four-byte integer
CopiedCount points to the buffer of four-byte integer for placing the number of the actual copied machines F_CopyMachineNumber takes out the machine numbers from the internal information associated with the descriptor ID, and copies them to the array specified by MachineList. The number of the machines you want to copy is specified by Count. The number of the actual copied machines is placed in CopiedCount. The machine numbers acquired by F_CopyMachineNumber are copied in order of the number. F_CopyMachineNumber can copy machine numbers with dividing into several times. When F_CopyMachine Number returns, the copy offset is advanced to the next location of the actual copied machine number. 4 F_Seek can move the copy offset to the machine number you want to copy by using F_CopyMachineNumber. 5 Call F_FreeID to free the descriptor ID when the copy is finished.
RETURN VALUE
F_GetAllMachineNumber returns the descriptor ID of the positive integer for pointing the list of the registered machine number if it succeeds, and a value of 0 is returned if it fails. TRUE is returned if F_CopyMachineNumber succeeds, FALSE is returned if it fails. In failure, an error code can be acquired by calling F_GetLastError.
-101-
4. FA LIBRARY
B-75044EN/02
4.2.7
SYNOPSIS
Getting List of Communicating Machines < F_GetOpenMachineNumber >
VB C++
Function GetOpenMachineNumber(ByVal ComputerName As String) As Long LONG F_GetOpenMachineNumber(LPCTSTR ComputerName);
DESCRIPTION
The following describes the procedure for getting the list of the communicating machine numbers. 1 F_GetOpenMachineNumber can get the list of the machines which are communicating with the computer specified by ComputerName. When the function succeeds, the return value indicates the descriptor ID for pointing the list of the communicating machines. 2 F_CopyMachineNumber takes out the machines associated with the descriptor ID. Refer to Clause 4.2.6 Getting List of Registered Machine Numbers for the details
RETURN VALUE
F_GetOpenMachineNumber returns the descriptor ID of a positive integer for placing the list of the communicating machines if it succeeds, and a value of 0 is returned if it fails. In failure, an error code can be acquired by calling F_GetLastError.
-102-
B-75044EN/02
4. FA LIBRARY
4.2.8
SYNOPSIS
Start of Receiving Notice Message < F_StartNotice >
VB C++
Function StartNotice (ByVal ComputerName As String) As Boolean BOOL F_StartNotice(LPCTSTR ComputerName);
DESCRIPTION
When an application program calls F_StartNotice, the communication process starts sending notice messages to it. A notice message is the information for notifying an application program of the status of the communication process. The communication process reports the start and end of downloading/uploading by operating NC side to an application program. The communication process is running in the computer specified by ComputerName. When the value of ComputerName is NULL, a notice message will be sent from the communication process in the computer where the calling application program is running. Only one application can receive notice messages from the communication process. When one application has already called the function and has been receiving a notice message from the computer specified by ComputerName, other applications fail in the call of this function.
RETURN VALUE
TRUE is returned if F_StartNotice succeeds, FALSE is returned if it fails. In failure, an error code can be acquired by calling F_GetLastError.
-103-
4. FA LIBRARY
B-75044EN/02
4.2.9
SYNOPSIS
End of Receiving Notice Message < F_StopNotice >
VB C++
Function StopNotice(ByVal ComputerName As String) As Boolean BOOL F_StopNotice(LPCTSTR ComputerName);
DESCRIPTION
When an application program calls F_StopNotice, the communication process stops sending the notice messages. The communication process is running in the computer specified by ComputerName. When the value of ComputerName is NULL, the function selects the communication process in the computer where the application program is running. F_StopNotice can be called by the application program that F_StartNotice before. called
RETURN VALUE
TRUE is returned if F_StopNotice succeeds, FALSE is returned if it fails. In failure, an error code can be acquired by calling F_GetLastError.
4.2.10
SYNOPSIS
Getting Descriptor ID of Notice Message < F_GetNoticeID >
VB
Function GetNoticeID (ID As Long, RequestCode As Long, MachineNumber As Long) As Boolean
C++
BOOL F_GetNoticeID (LONG* ID, LONG* RequestCode, LONG* MachineNumber);
DESCRIPTION
F_GetNoticeID reads the notice message sent by the communication process. When a message is sent, the descriptor ID of the positive integer is placed in ID, the request code is placed in RequestCode, and the machine number is placed in MachineNumber. When there is no message, the value of 0 is set to ID. And no value is set to RequestCode and MachineNumber.
RETURN VALUE
TRUE is returned if F_GetNoticeID succeeds, FALSE is returned if it fails. In failure, an error code can be acquired by calling F_GetLastError.
-104-
B-75044EN/02
4. FA LIBRARY
4.2.11
SYNOPSIS
Getting the Notice Message of the File Transfer < F_CopyNoticeFileTransfer >
VB
Function CopyNoticeFileTransfer (ByVal ID As Long, Type As Long, ToolPostNumber As Long, Key As String) As Boolean
C++
BOOL F_CopyNoticeFileTransfer (LONG ID, LONG* Type, LONG* ToolPostNumber, LPCTSTR Key);
DESCRIPTION
When F_GetNoticeID returns the following request code, F_CopyNoticeFileTransfer can take out the notice message. Request Code 0x00100001 0x00100002 Explanation The Start and End of Downloading NC Program Requested by NC The Start and End of Uploading NC Program Requested by NC ID specifies descriptor ID returned by F_GetNoticeID. The notice message is placed in the following arguments. Type points to the four-byte integral flag for placing either of the start or end flag. The value of 0x0 is the start flag, and 0xFFFFFFFF is the end flag. ToolPostNumber points to the four-byte integral value for placing the tool post number. Key points to the four-byte integral value for placing the key used to transfer. Call F_FreeID to free the descriptor ID when F_CopyNotice FileTransfer is finished.
RETURN VALUE
TRUE is returned if F_CopyNoticeFileTransfer succeeds, FALSE is returned if it fails. In failure, an error code can be acquired by calling F_GetLastError.
-105-
4. FA LIBRARY
B-75044EN/02
4.2.12
SYNOPSIS
Getting Information about Machine < F_GetMachineInfo >
VB
Function GetMachineInfo (ByVal MachineNumber As Long, ByVal Name As String, ByVal Protocol As String) As Boolean
C++
BOOL F_GetMachineInfo (LONG MachineNumber, LPCTSTR Name, LPCTSTR Protocol);
DESCRIPTION
F_GetMachineInfo reads the information of the machine MachineNumber The machine information is placed in the following arguments. Name points to the buffer for placing the machine name. Protocol points to the buffer for placing the protocol type. Each buffer must be a sequence of 33 characters or more length and each character string is terminated by a NULL character. The following is the character string written in Protocol . The String of Protocol DNC1 DNC2 RP DNC1ETHER Explanation DNC1 DNC2 Reader/Puncher DNC1/Ethernet specified by
RETURN VALUE
TRUE is returned if F_GetMachineInfo succeeds, FALSE is returned if it fails. F_GetMachineInfo fails if the protocol type of a machine is registered with NONE in the Machine Configuration Screen. In failure, an error code can be acquired by calling F_GetLastError.
-106-
B-75044EN/02
4. FA LIBRARY
4.3
4.3.1
REQUEST SERVICE
Downloading NC Program requested by Computer < F_Download... >

FA LIBRARY provides the four functions which can download an NC program by using one of file number, NC program number, file name, and full path, explained in Section 1.3. The four functions can be called with a synchronous and an asynchronous treatment.
NOTE When DNC1/Ethernet is used for communicating with an NC, the download is not reset even if you press the RESET key on the NC during a download of the NC program requested by the computer. (Until either the download ends successfully, or the download does not end until an NC memory overflow or other error causes an NC alarm.) To cancel the download of the NC program requested by the computer, use the "cancel download of the NC program requested by the computer " function described later. To use this function, you must execute the download of the NC program requested by the computer asynchronously. If the download is executed synchronously, the application will not be returned to until the download function ends. For this reason, the cancel function cannot be used.
SYNOPSIS
<The file to be downloaded is specified by file number> In case of the synchronous treatment
VB Function DownloadFileNumber (ByVal MachineNumber As Long, ByVal ToolPostNumber As Long, ByVal FileNumber As Long) As Boolean C++ BOOL F_DownloadFileNumber (LONG MachineNumber, LONG ToolPostNumber, LONG FileNumber);
In case of the asynchronous treatment

VB Function DownloadFileNumberEx (ByVal MachineNumber As Long, ByVal ToolPostNumber As Long, ByVal FileNumber As Long) As Long
-107-
4. FA LIBRARY
C++ LONG F_DownloadFileNumberEx (LONG MachineNumber, LONG ToolPostNumber, LONG FileNumber);
B-75044EN/02
<The file to be downloaded is specified by file name> In case of the synchronous treatment
VB Function DownloadFileName (ByVal MachineNumber As Long, ByVal ToolPostNumber As Long, ByVal FileName As String) As Boolean C++ BOOL F_DownloadFileName (LONG MachineNumber, LONG ToolPostNumber, LPCTSTR FileName);

VB Function DownloadFileNameEx (ByVal MachineNumber As Long, ByVal ToolPostNumber As Long, ByVal FileName As String) As Long C++ LONG F_DownloadFileNameEx (LONG MachineNumber, LONG ToolPostNumber, LPCTSTR FileName);
<The file to be downloaded is specified by NC program number > In case of the synchronous treatment
VB Function DownloadONumber (ByVal MachineNumber As Long, ByVal ToolPostNumber As Long, ByVal ONumber As Long) As Boolean C++ BOOL F_DownloadONumber (LONG MachineNumber, LONG ToolPostNumber, LONG ONumber);

VB Function DownloadONumberEx (ByVal MachineNumber As Long, ByVal ToolPostNumber As Long, ByVal ONumber As Long) As Long C++ LONG F_DownloadONumberEx (LONG MachineNumber, LONG ToolPostNumber, LONG ONumber);
-108-
B-75044EN/02
4. FA LIBRARY
<The file to be downloaded is specified by full path > In case of the synchronous treatment
VB Function DownloadFilePath (ByVal MachineNumber As Long, ByVal ToolPostNumber As Long, ByVal FilePath As String) As Boolean C++ BOOL F_DownloadFileName (LONG MachineNumber, LONG ToolPostNumber, LPCTSTR FilePath);

VB Function DownloadFilePathEx (ByVal MachineNumber As Long, ByVal ToolPostNumber As Long, ByVal FilePath As String) As Long C++ LONG F_DownloadFileNameEx (LONG MachineNumber, LONG ToolPostNumber, LPCTSTR FilePath);
F_Download... indicates the synchronous functions in the four kinds of functions shown in the above. F_Download...Ex indicates the asynchronous functions in the four kinds of functions shown in the above. F_Download...(Ex) indicates both of the synchronous and asynchronous functions. the
DESCRIPTION
Proceed to the following procedure 1,2 in case of the synchronous treatment. Proceed to the following procedure 1,3,4 in case of the asynchronous treatment. 1 F_Download...(Ex) downloads an NC program to the NC memory. There are the four ways to specify the file to be downloaded like these. How to Specify File Number File Name NC Program Number Full Path of File Name of Function F_DownloadFileNumber(Ex) F_DownloadFileName(Ex) F_DownloadONumber(Ex) F_DownloadFilePath(Ex)
-109-
4. FA LIBRARY
B-75044EN/02
The four functions have the common arguments of MachineNumber and ToolPostNumber. MachineNumber specifies a machine number. ToolPostNumber specifies a tool post number. If DNC2 is used, 0 must be set. A A A file file NC number name is is specified number specified by is by FileNumber of by of
F_DownloadFileNumber(Ex). The range is from 1 to 9999. FileName specified F_Download Onumber of FileName(Ex). program F_DownloadONumber(Ex). The full path is specified by FilePath of F_Download FilePath (Ex). Section 1.3 explains the rule for downloading the NC program specified by a file number, a file name, a NC program number, and a full path. When the file to be downloaded is specified by file number, it is chosen according to the files sorted in order of the ASCII code. When the file is specified by file name, the specified file is selected from the default-directory. When the file is specified by NC program number, the file, whose name is composed of Oxxxx(where, xxxx indicates a NC program number) and the registered file extension, is downloaded. When the file is specified by full path, the specified file is downloaded without using the above rule. 2 F_Download... doesnt return until the download is finished. You can know whether the function has succeeded or not by the return value. 3 F_Download...Ex requests the system to download an NC program, and returns at once. The return value is descriptor ID for pointing the result. You must check whether the request is finished or not, and whether its result is success or not by substituting the descriptor ID to F_Response. 4 Call F_FreeID to free the descriptor ID after getting the result of F_Download...Ex by using F_Response.
RETURN VALUE
TRUE is returned if F_Download... succeeds, FALSE is returned if it fails. F_Download...Ex returns the positive integer of the descriptor ID for pointing the result if it succeeds, the value of 0 is returned if it fails. In failure, an error code can be acquired by calling F_GetLastError. -110-
B-75044EN/02
4. FA LIBRARY
4.3.2
Uploading NC Program Requested by Computer < F_Upload... >

FA LIBRARY provides the two functions which can upload an NC program by using either of NC program number and full path explained in Section 1.3. The two functions can be called with a synchronous and an asynchronous treatment.
NOTE When DNC1/Ethernet is used for communicating with an NC, the upload is not reset even if you press the RESET key on the NC during the upload of the NC program requested by the computer. (Until either the upload ends successfully, or the upload does not end until an NC memory overflow or other error causes an NC alarm.) To cancel the upload of the NC program requested by the computer, use the "cancel upload of the NC program requested by the computer" function described later. To use this function, you must execute the upload of the NC program requested by the computer asynchronously. If the upload is executed synchronously, the application will not be returned to until the upload function ends. For this reason, the cancel function cannot be used.
SYNOPSIS
<In case that NC program number specifies the file which the uploaded NC program is stored in > In case of the synchronous treatment
VB Function UploadONumber (ByVal MachineNumber As Long, ByVal ToolPostNumber As Long, ByVal ONumber As Long) As Boolean C++ BOOL F_UploadONumber (LONG MachineNumber, LONG ToolPostNumber, LONG ONumber);

VB Function UploadONumberEx (ByVal MachineNumber As Long, ByVal ToolPostNumber As Long, ByVal ONumber As Long) As Long C++ LONG F_UploadONumberEx (LONG MachineNumber, LONG ToolPostNumber, LONG ONumber);
-111-
4. FA LIBRARY
B-75044EN/02
<In case that full path specifies the file which the uploaded NC program is stored in > In case of the synchronous treatment
VB Function UploadFilePath (ByVal MachineNumber As Long, ByVal ToolPostNumber As Long, ByVal ONumber As Long, ByVal FilePath As String) As Boolean C++ BOOL F_UploadFilePath (LONG MachineNumber, LONG ToolPostNumber, LONG ONumber, LPCTSTR FilePath);

VB Function UploadFilePathEx (ByVal MachineNumber As Long, ByVal ToolPostNumber As Long, ByVal ONumber As Long, ByVal FilePath As String) As Long C++ LONG F_UploadFilePathEx (LONG MachineNumber, LONG ToolPostNumber, LONG ONumber, LPCTSTR FilePath);
F_Upload... indicates the synchronous functions in the two kinds of functions shown in the above. F_Upload...Ex indicates the asynchronous functions in the two kinds of functions shown in the above. F_Upload...(Ex) indicates both of the synchronous and the asynchronous functions.
DESPRICTION
Proceed to the following procedure 1,2 in case of the synchronous treatment. Proceed to the following procedure 1,3,4 in case of the asynchronous treatment. 1 F_Upload...(Ex) uploads an NC program from the specified NC. There are the two ways to store the upload file like these. How to Store NC Program Number Full Path Name of Function F_UploadONumber(Ex) F_UploadFilePath(Ex)
The two functions have the common arguments of MachineNumber, ToolPostNumber and Onumber. MachineNumber specifies a machine number. ToolPostNumber specifies a tool post number.
-112-
B-75044EN/02
4. FA LIBRARY
ONumber specifies NC program number you want to upload from the NC. F_UploadONumber(Ex) uploads the NC program specified by ONumber , and stores it in the file specified by the same ONumber argument. Section 1.3 explains the way to store the file created from NC program number. The uploaded NC program is stored in the file whose name is composed of Oxxxx(where, xxxx is the NC program number) and the registered file extension. The file is stored in the directory registered for each machine. F_UploadFilePath(Ex) uploads the NC program specified by ONumber, and stores it in the file specified by FilePath. 2 F_Upload... doesnt return until the request is finished. You can know whether the function has succeeded or not by the return value. 3 F_Upload...Ex requests the system to upload an NC program, and returns at once. The return value is the descriptor ID for pointing the result. You must check whether request is finished or not, and whether its result is success or not by calling F_Response. 4 Call F_FreeID to free the descriptor ID after getting the result of F_Upload...Ex from F_Response.
RETURN VALUE
TRUE is returned if F_Upload... succeeds, FALSE is returned if it fails. F_Upload...Ex returns the positive integer of the descriptor ID for pointing the result if it succeeds, the value of 0 is returned if it fails. In failure, an error code can be acquired by calling F_GetLastError.
-113-
4. FA LIBRARY
B-75044EN/02
4.3.3
SYNOPSIS
External Reset < F_Reset >
In case of the synchronous treatment

VB Function Reset (ByVal MachineNumber As Long, ByVal ToolPostNumber As Long) As Boolean C++ BOOL F_Reset (LONG MachineNumber, LONG ToolPostNumber);

VB Function ResetEx (ByVal MachineNumber As Long, ByVal ToolPostNumber As Long) As Long C++ LONG F_ResetEx (LONG MachineNumber, LONG ToolPostNumber);
F_Reset(Ex) indicates both of the synchronous and the asynchronous treatment.
DESCRIPTION
Proceed to the following procedure 1,2 in case of the synchronous treatment. Proceed to the following procedure 1,3,4 in case of the asynchronous treatment. 1 F_Reset(Ex) resets the NC specified by Machine Number and ToolPostNumber. 2 F_Reset doesnt return until the treatment is finished. You can know whether the function has succeeded or not by the return value. 3 F_ResetEx requests the system to reset the NC, and returns at once. The return value is the descriptor ID for pointing the result. You must check whether the request is finished or not, and whether its result is success or not by calling F_Response. 4 Call F_FreeID to free the descriptor ID after getting the result of F_ResetEx by calling F_Response.
RETURN VALUE
TRUE is returned if F_Reset succeeds, FALSE is returned if it fails. F_ResetEx returns the positive integer of the descriptor ID for pointing the result if it succeeds, the value of 0 is returned if it fails. In failure, an error code can be acquired by using F_GetLastError. -114-
B-75044EN/02
4. FA LIBRARY
NOTE This function cannot be used on DNC1/Ethernet. (It is scheduled to be supported in the future.) Use the PMC data write function to execute a reset via the ladder program.
4.3.4
SYNOPSIS
Cycle Start < F_Start >

VB Function Start (ByVal MachineNumber As Long, ByVal ToolPostNumber As Long) As Boolean C++ BOOL F_Start (LONG MachineNumber, LONG ToolPostNumber);

VB Function StartEx (ByVal MachineNumber As Long, ByVal ToolPostNumber As Long) As Long C++ LONG F_StartEx (LONG MachineNumber, LONG ToolPostNumber);
F_Start(Ex) indicates both of the synchronous and the asynchronous treatment.
DESCRIPTION
Proceed to the following procedure 1,2 in case of the synchronous treatment. Proceed to the following procedure 1,3,4 in case of the asynchronous treatment. 1 F_Start(Ex) starts the NC specified by MachineNumber and ToolPostNumber. 2 F_Start doesnt return until the treatment is finished. You can know whether the function has succeeded or not by the return value. 3 F_StartEx requests the system to start the NC, and returns at once. The return value is the descriptor ID for pointing the result. You must check whether the request is finished or not, and whether its result is success or not by calling F_Response. 4 Call F_FreeID to free the descriptor ID after getting the result of F_StartEx by calling F_Response. -115-
4. FA LIBRARY RETURN VALUE
B-75044EN/02
TRUE is returned if F_Start succeeds, FALSE is returned if it fails. F_StartEx returns the positive integer of the descriptor ID for pointing the result, if it succeeds. The value of 0 is returned if it fails. In failure, an error code can be acquired by using F_GetLastError.
NOTE This function cannot be used on DNC1/Ethernet. (It is scheduled to be supported in the future.) Use the PMC data write function to execute a cycle start via the ladder program.
4.3.5
SYNOPSIS
Selecting NC Program in NC < F_Select >

VB Function Select (ByVal MachineNumber As Long, ByVal ToolPostNumber As Long, ByVal ONumber As Long) As Boolean C++ BOOL F_Select (LONG Onumber); MachineNumber, LONG ToolPostNumber, LONG

VB Function SelectEx (ByVal MachineNumber As Long, ByVal ToolPostNumber As Long, ByVal ONumber As Long) As Long C++ LONG F_SelectEx (LONG MachineNumber, LONG ToolPostNumber, LONG ONumber);
F_Select(Ex) indicates both of the synchronous and the asynchronous functions.
-116-
B-75044EN/02
4. FA LIBRARY
DESCRIPTION
Proceed to the following procedure 1,2 in case of the synchronous treatment. Proceed to the following procedure 1,3,4 in case of the asynchronous treatment. 1 F_Select(Ex) selects the NC program in the NC specified by MachineNumber and ToolPostNumber. ONumber specifies the NC program number you want to select. The range is from 1 to 9999. 2 F_Select doesnt return until the treatment is finished. You can know whether the function has succeeded or not by the return value. 3 F_SelectEx requests the system to select the NC program in the NC memory, and returns at once. The return value is the descriptor ID for pointing the result. You must check whether the request is finished or not, and whether its result is success or not by calling F_Response. 4 Call F_FreeID to free the descriptor ID after getting the result of F_SelectEx by calling F_Response.
RETURN VALUE
TRUE is returned if F_Select succeeds, FALSE is returned if it fails. F_SelectEx returns the positive integer of the descriptor ID for pointing the result if it succeeds. The value of 0 is returned if it fails. In failure, an error code can be acquired by using F_GetLastError.
4.3.6
SYNOPSIS
Deleting NC Program in NC < F_Delete >

VB Function Delete (ByVal MachineNumber As Long, ByVal ToolPostNumber As Long, ByVal ONumber As Long) As Boolean C++ BOOL F_Delete (LONG MachineNumber, LONG ToolPostNumber, LONG Onumber);
-117-
4. FA LIBRARY
VB Function DeleteEx
B-75044EN/02
(ByVal MachineNumber As Long, ByVal ToolPostNumber As Long, ByVal ONumber As Long) As Long C++ LONG F_DeleteEx (LONG MachineNumber, LONG ToolPostNumber, LONG ONumber);
F_Delete(Ex) indicates both of the synchronous and the asynchronous functions.
DESCRIPTION
Proceed to the following procedure 1,2 in case of the synchronous treatment. Proceed to the following procedure 1,3,4 in case of the asynchronous treatment. 1 F_Delete(Ex) deletes the NC program in the NC specified by MachineNumber and ToolPostNumber. ONumber specifies the NC program number you want to delete. The range is from 1 to 9999. 2 F_Delete doesnt return until the treatment is finished. You can know whether the function has succeeded or not by the return value. 3 F_DeleteEx requests the system to delete the NC program, and returns at once. The return value is the descriptor ID for pointing the result. You must check whether the request is finished or not, and whether its result is success or not by calling F_Response. 4 Call F_FreeID to free the descriptor ID after getting the result of F_DeleteEx by calling F_Response.
RETURN VALUE
TRUE is returned if F_Delete succeeds, FALSE is returned if it fails. F_DeleteEx returns the positive integer of the descriptor ID for pointing the result if it succeeds. The value of 0 is returned if it fails. In failure, an error code can be acquired by calling F_GetLastError.
-118-
B-75044EN/02
4. FA LIBRARY
4.3.7
SYNOPSIS
Reading NC Identification < F_Identify >

VB Function Identify (ByVal MachineNumber As Long, ByVal Identify As String) As Boolean C++ BOOL F_Identify (LONG MachineNumber, LPCTSTR Identify);

VB C++ Function IdentifyEx (ByVal MachineNumber As Long) As Long LONG F_IdentifyEx(LONG MachineNumber);
F_Identify(Ex) indicates both of the synchronous and the asynchronous functions.

VB C++ Function F_CopyIdentify (ByVal ID As Long, ByVal Identify As String) As Boolean BOOL F_CopyIdentify(LONG ID, LPCTSTR Identify);
DESCRIPTION
Proceed to the following procedure 1,2 in case of the synchronous treatment. Proceed to the following procedure 1,3,4 in case of the asynchronous treatment. 1 F_Identify(Ex) gets the identification of the NC specified by MachineNumber. In case of DNC1, the information is the sequence of the character string in order of model name, version, and vender name. Each data is separated by a comma , and the information is terminated by a NULL character. In case of DNC2, the information is the sequence of the character string in order of model name and version. Each data is separated by a comma , and the information is terminated by a NULL character. 2 F_Identify reads the identification and takes out it. Identify points to the buffer for placing the NC identification with terminated by a NULL character. The buffer must be a sequence of 129 characters or more length. F_Identify doesnt return until the treatment is finished. You can know whether the function has succeeded or not by the return value. -119-
4. FA LIBRARY
3
B-75044EN/02
F_IdentifyEx requests the system to read the NC identification, and returns at once. The return value is the descriptor ID for pointing the result. You must check whether the request is finished or not, and whether its result is success or not by calling F_Response. When the request is finished successfully, F_Copy IdentifyEx can take out the NC identification. ID specifies the descriptor ID returned by F_IdentifyEx. Identify points to the buffer for placing the NC identification with terminated by a NULL character. The buffer must be a sequence of 129 characters or more length.
Call F_FreeID to free the descriptor ID returned by IdentifyEx after taking out the NC identification.
RETURN VALUE
TRUE is returned if F_Identify succeeds, FALSE is returned if it fails. F_IdentifyEx returns the positive integral value of the descriptor ID for pointing the result if it succeeds, the value of 0 is returned if it fails. TRUE is returned if F_CopyIdentify succeeds, FALSE is returned if it fails. In failure, an error code can be acquired by calling F_GetLastError.
4.3.8
SYNOPSIS
Reading List of NC Program in NC < F_AllFileDirectory >
VB
Function AllFileDirectory (ByVal MachineNumber As Long, ByVal ToolPostNumber As Long) As Long
C++
LONG F_AllFileDirectory (LONG MachineNumber, LONG ToolPostNumber);
The above functions run as the synchronous treatment. If you want to call them as the asynchronous treatment, carry out AllFileDirectoryEx or F_AllFileDirectoryEx. (F_)AllFileDirectory and (F_)AllFileDirectoryEx have the same argument and the same type of the return value.
VB Function CopyFileDirectory (ByVal ID As Long, ONumber As Long, ByVal Count As Long, CopiedCount As Long) As Boolean C++ BOOL F_CopyFileDirectory (LONG ID, LONG* ONumber,LONG Count, LONG* CopiedCount);
-120-
B-75044EN/02
4. FA LIBRARY
DESCRIPTION
Proceed to the following procedure 1,2,4,5,6,7, and 8 in case of the synchronous treatment. Proceed to the following procedure 1,3,4,5,6,7, and 8 in case of the asynchronous treatment. 1 F_AllFileDirectory(Ex) reads the list of NC programs in the NC specified by MachineNumber and ToolPostNumber. 2 F_AllFileDirectory doesnt return until the treatment is finished. You can know whether the function has succeeded or not by the return value. On success, the return value indicates the descriptor ID for pointing the list of NC program. 3 F_AllFileDirectoryEx requests the system to read the directory list, and returns at once. The return value is the descriptor ID for pointing the result. You must check whether the request is finished or not, and whether its result is success or not by calling F_Response. 4 When F_AllFileDirectory(Ex) is finished successfully, you can take out the list as follows. 5 F_GetCount gets the number of the NC programs associated with the descriptor ID. ID specifies the descriptor ID returned by F_AllFileDirectory(Ex). Refer to Clause 4.4.1 for details. 6 F_CopyFileDirectory takes out the list of the NC programs associated with the descriptor ID. ID specifies the descriptor ID returned by F_AllFileDirectory(Ex). Count specifies the number of the NC programs you want to copy at a time. Onumber points to the array for placing the NC programs. The array must be composed of the four-byte integral elements of the same number as Count specifies.
ONumber
V V V
Count
Four-byte integer
-121-
4. FA LIBRARY
B-75044EN/02
CopiedCount points to the four-byte integral buffer for placing the actual copied number. F_CopyFileDirectory takes out the NC programs from the descriptor ID, and copies them to the array specified by ONumber. Count specifies the number of NC programs you want to copy. The number of the actual copied NC program number is set to CopiedCount. F_CopyFileDirectory can copy an NC program number with dividing into several times. When F_CopyFileDirectory returns, the copy offset is advanced to the next location of the actual copied NC program. 7 F_Seek can move the copy offset to the NC program you want to copy by using F_CopyFileDirectory. 8 Call F_FreeID to free the descriptor ID when you finish the copy of NC programs.
RETURN VALUE
F_AllFileDirectory(Ex) returns the descriptor ID of the positive integer for pointing the list of the NC program if it succeeds. And a value of 0 is returned if it fails. TRUE is returned if F_CopyFileDirectory succeeds, FALSE is returned if it fails. In failure, an error code can be acquired by using F_GetLastError.
-122-
B-75044EN/02
4. FA LIBRARY
4.3.9
SYNOPSIS
Establishing DNC1 Connection < F_EstablishDnc1 >

VB C++ Function EstablishDnc1 (ByVal MachineNumber As Long) As Boolean BOOL F_EstablishDnc1(LONG MachineNumber);

VB C++ Function EstablishDnc1Ex(ByVal MachineNumber As Long) As Long LONG F_EstablishDnc1Ex(LONG MachineNumber);
F_EstablishDnc1(Ex) indicates both of the synchronous and asynchronous functions.
the
DESCRIPTION
Proceed to the following procedure 1,2 in case of the synchronous treatment. Proceed to the following procedure 1,3,4 in case of the asynchronous treatment. 1 F_EstablishDnc1(Ex) establishes the DNC1 connection of the NC specified by MachineNumber. The function is effective to the machine registered to DNC1 in the Machine Configuration screen. 2 F_EstablishDnc1 doesnt return until the treatment is finished. You can know whether the function has succeeded or not by the return value. 3 F_EstablishDnc1Ex requests the system to make connection with the NC, and returns at once. The return value is the descriptor ID for pointing the result. You must check whether the request is finished or not, and whether its result is success or not by calling F_Response. 4 Call F_FreeID to free the descriptor ID after getting the result of F_EstablishDnc1Ex by calling F_Response.
RETURN VALUE
TRUE is returned if F_EstablishDnc1 succeeds, FALSE is returned if it fails. F_EstablishDnc1Ex returns the positive integer of the descriptor ID for pointing the result if it succeeds. The value of 0 is returned if it fails. In failure, an error code can be acquired when F_GetLastError is carried out.
-123-
4. FA LIBRARY
B-75044EN/02
4.3.10
SYNOPSIS
Confirmation of DNC1 Connection < F_ConfirmDnc1 >

VB Function ConfirmDnc1 (ByVal ComputerName As String, Linked As Long, CopiedCount As Long) As Boolean C++ BOOL F_ConfirmDnc1 (LPCTSTR ComputerName, LONG* Linked, LONG* CopiedCount);

VB C++ Function ConfirmDnc1Ex(ByVal ComputerName As String) As Long LONG F_ConfirmDnc1Ex(LPCTSTR ComputerName);
F_ConfirmDnc1(Ex) indicates both of the synchronous and asynchronous functions.

VB Function F_CopyDnc1Linked (ByVal ID As Long, Linked As Long, CopiedCount As Long) As Boolean C++
the
BOOL F_CopyDnc1Linked(LONG ID, LONG* Linked, LONG* CopiedCount);
DESCRIPTION
Proceed to the following procedure 1 and 2 in case of the synchronous treatment. Proceed to the following procedure 1,3,4, and 5 in case of the asynchronous treatment. 1 F_ConfirmDnc1(Ex) gets the list of the machines which are connected to the computer by DNC1 and which has been established. ComputerName specifies a computer name. When the value of ComputerName is NULL, the function can get the machines connected to the computer where the application program is running. 2 F_ConfirmDnc1 reads the established machines and takes out them. Linked points to the array for placing the machine number. The array must be composed of the 32 four-byte integral elements.
-124-
B-75044EN/02
4. FA LIBRARY
List
0 1 2
V V V
29 30 31
Four-bye integer
CoiedCount points to the four-byte integral buffer for placing the actual copied number. F_ConfirmDnc1 doesnt return until the treatment is finished. You can know whether the function has succeeded or not by the return value. 3 F_ConfirmDnc1Ex requests the system to read the data, and returns at once. The return value is the descriptor ID for pointing the list of the established machines. You must check whether the request is finished or not, and whether its result is success or not by calling F_Response. 4 When the request is finished successfully, F_CopyDnc1Linked can take out the list of the established machines. ID specifies the descriptor ID returned by F_ConfirmDnc1. Linked points to the array for placing the machine number. The array must be composed of the 32 four-byte integral elements. CoiedCount points to the four-byte integral buffer for placing the actual copied number. F_CopyDnc1Linked reads the list of the established machines from the descriptor ID, and copies them to the array pointed to by Linked. The actual copied number is set to CopiedCount. 5 Call F_FreeID to free the descriptor ID returned by
F_CopyDnc1Linkd after taking out the established machines.
RETURN VALUE
TRUE is returned if F_ConfirmDnc1 succeeds, FALSE is returned if it fails. F_ConfirmDnc1Ex returns the positive integer of the descriptor ID for pointing the list of the machines if it succeeds. The value of 0 is returned if it fails. In failure, an error code can be acquired by calling F_GetLastError.
-125-
4. FA LIBRARY
B-75044EN/02
4.3.11
SYNOPSIS
Reading Alarm Information < F_ReadAlarm >

VB Funciton ReadAlarm (ByVal MachineNumber As Long, ByVal ToolPostNumber As Long, Alarm As Long) As Boolean C++ BOOL F_ReadAlarm (LONG MachineNumber, LONG ToolPostNumber, LONG* Alarm);
In asynchronous treatment
VB Funciton ReadAlarmEx (ByVal MachineNumber As Long, ByVal ToolPostNumber As Long) As Long C++ LONG F_ReadAlarmEx (LONG MachineNumber, LONG ToolPostNumber);
F_ReadAlarm(Ex) indicates both of the synchronous and the asynchronous functions.

VB C++ Function F_CopyAlarm(ByVal ID As Long, Alarm As Long) As Boolean BOOL F_CopyAlarm(LONG ID, LONG* Alarm);
DESCRIPTION
Proceed to the following procedure 1 and 2 in case of the synchronous treatment. Proceed to the following procedure 1,3,4, and 5 in case of the asynchronous treatment. 1 F_ReadAlarm(Ex) reads the alarm information of the NC specified by MachineNumber and ToolPostNumber. 2 F_ReadAlarm reads the alarm information from NC, and sets to the four-byte integral buffer pointed to by Alarm.
-126-
B-75044EN/02
4. FA LIBRARY
The following table shows the alarm information in Alarm. List of Alarms
Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16-31
Description FS15 Background PS alarm Foreground PS alarm Overheat alarm Sub CPU error Excessive synchronize error alarm Parameter write switch ON Overtravel alarm PMC error External error message (not used) Serious PS alarm (not used) Servo alarm I/O error Parameter entry requiring power OFF System error alarm (not used) FS0 P/S100 P/S000 P/S101 Other PS Overtravel Overheat Servo alarm (not used) (not used) (not used) (not used) (not used) (not used) (not used) (not used) (not used) (not used) FS16/FS18 P/S100 P/S000 P/S101 Other PS Overtravel Overheat Servo alarm (not used) APC alarm Spindle alarm Punch press alarm in PS5000 range Laser alarm (not used) Rigid tap alarm (not used) External error message (not used)
F_ReadAlarm doesnt return until the treatment is finished. You can know whether the function has succeeded or not by the return value. 3 F_ReadAlarmEx requests the system to read the alarm information, and returns at once. The return value is the descriptor ID for pointing the alarm information. You must check whether the request is finished or not, and whether its result is success or not by calling F_Response. 4 When request is finished successfully, F_CopyAlarm can take out the alarm information. ID specifies the descriptor ID returned by F_ReadAlarmEx. Alarm points to the four-byte integral buffer for placing the alarm information. 5 Call F_FreeID to free the descriptor ID returned by F_ReadAlarm after taking out the alarm information.
RETURN VALUE
TRUE is returned if F_ReadAlarm succeeds, FALSE is returned if it fails. F_ReadAlarmEx returns the positive integer of the descriptor ID for pointing the alarm information if it succeeds. The value of 0 is returned if it fails. In failure, an error code can be acquired by calling F_GetLastError . -127-
4. FA LIBRARY
B-75044EN/02
4.3.12
SYNOPSIS
Reading Tool Offset < F_ReadToolOffset >
VB
Function ReadToolOffset (ByVal MachineNumber As Long, ByVal ToolPostNumber As Long, ByVal OffsetType As Long, ByVal OffsetNumber As Long, ByVal Count As Long) As Long
C++
LONG F_ReadToolOffset (LONG MachineNumber, LONG ToolPostNumber, LONG OffsetType, LONG OffsetNumber, LONG Count);
The above functions run as the synchronous treatment. If you want to call them as the asynchronous treatment, carry out ReadToolOffsetEx or F_ReadToolOffsetEx. (F_)ReadToolOffset and (F_)ReadToolOffsetEx have the same arguments and the same type of the return value.
VB Function CopyToolOffset (ByVal ID As Long, ToolOffsetValue As Long, ToolOffsetExponent As Long) As Boolean C++ BOOL F_CopyToolOffset (LONG ID, LONG* ToolOffsetValue, LONG* ToolOffsetExponent);
DESCRIPTION
Proceed to the following procedure 1,2,4,5,6,7,8,9 and 10 in case of the synchronous treatment. Proceed to the following procedure 1,3,4,5,6,7,8,9 and 10 in case of the asynchronous treatment. 1 F_ReadToolOffset(Ex) reads the tool offset from the NC specified by MachineNumber and ToolPostNumber. OffsetType specifies the type of the tool offset. OffsetNumber specifies the start number of the tool offset you want to read. Count specifies the number of tool offsets you want to read at a time.
-128-
B-75044EN/02
4. FA LIBRARY
OffsetType values are constructed by OR-ing flags from the following table. Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Type of Tool Offset Wear Offset Geometric Offset Wear Offset Wear Offset Wear Offset Wear Offset Not Used Wear Offset Geometric Offset Geometric Offset Geometric Offset Geometric Offset Geometric Offset Not Used Not Used Where, M of Type of NC indicates the milling machine, and T indicates the turning machine. OffsetType values must not be constructed by both of the milling and the turning type offset flag. In case of DNC2, Geometric Offset Q must not be used. Dont set this flag to OffsetType in case of DNC2. 2 F_ReadToolOffset doesnt return until the treatment is finished. You can know whether the function has succeeded or not by the return value. On success, the return value indicates the descriptor ID for pointing the tool offset. 3 F_ReadToolOffsetEx requests the system to read the tool offset data, and returns at once. The return value is the descriptor ID for pointing the tool offset. You must check whether the request is finished or not, and whether its result is success or not by calling F_Response. 4 When request is finished successfully, you can take out the tool offset as follows. D(Cutter Offset' K(Cutter Offset ' X(X-axis Tool Offset Value' Z(Z-axis Tool Offset Value' R(Tool-tip Radius Offset Value' Y(Y-axis Tool Offset Value ' Type of NC M M T T T T T M M T T T T
Virtual Tool-tip direction Q H(Tool Length Offset' L(Tool Length Offset' U(X-axis Tool Offset Value ' W(Z-axis Tool Offset Value ' P(Tool-tip Radius Offset Value ) V(Y-axis Tool Offset Value '
-129-
4. FA LIBRARY
5
B-75044EN/02
F_CopyToolOffset copies the tool offset to the specified arrays. ID specifies the descriptor ID returned by F_ReadToolOffset(Ex). ToolOffsetValue points to the array for placing the tool offset value. ToolOffsetExponent points to the array for placing the exponent of the tool offset. Each array must be composed of 16 four-byte elements. F_CopyToolOffset takes out one tool offset from the descriptor ID, and F_CopyToolOffset places it in the array pointed to by ToolOffsetValue and ToolOffsetExponent .
OffsetType specifies the type of tool offset with the bit flag. The position of the bit flag(0~15) indicates the type of the tool offset as shown at the former table. And the bit position(0~15bit) corresponds to the element number(0~15) of array pointed to by ToolOffsetValue and ToolOffsetExponent . For Example, when the bit 0 of OffsetType is ON, the Wear Offset D is placed in the first element of the arrays pointed to by ToolOffsetValue and ToolOffsetExponent. No value is placed in the other elements corresponding to the positions of inactive bits on OffsetType.
The tool offset value can be calculated by substituting the contents of the arrays pointed to by ToolOffsetValue and ToolOffsetExponent for the following equation. Tool offset value corresponding to the bit N = ToolOffsetValue[N] b10^('ToolOffsetExponent[N]'
-130-
B-75044EN/02
4. FA LIBRARY
Where, N is 0 to 15, and ^ indicates the power operation.
OffsetNumber ToolOffset Value ToolOffset Exponent
1 2 V V V 13 14 15 Four-byte integer V V V
0 Wear Offset D 1 Geometric Offset' 2 Geometric Offset
13 Geometric Offset 14 Geometric Offset' 15 'Not used'
Four-byte integer
OffsetNumber +1
V V V
OffsetNumber + Count -1
F_CopyToolOffset copies one tool offset data at a time. To get all the tool offset data, repeat F_CopyToolOffset the same times as the number specified by the Count argument of F_ReadToolOffset(Ex).
F_Seek can move the point to the tool offset you want to copy by using F_CopyToolOffset.
10 Call
F_FreeID
to
free
the
descriptor
ID
returned
by
F_ReadToolOffset (Ex) when you finish the copy of tool offsets.
RETURN VALUE
F_ReadToolOffset(Ex) returns a descriptor ID of the positive integer for pointing the tool offset if it succeeds. If it fails, a value of 0 is returned. TRUE is returned if F_CopyToolOffset succeeds, FALSE is returned if it fails. In failure, an error code can be acquired by calling F_GetLastError.
-131-
4. FA LIBRARY
B-75044EN/02
4.3.13
SYNOPSIS
Writing Tool Offset < F_WriteToolOffset >
VB
Function CreateToolOffsetID (ByVal MachineNumber As Long, ByVal ToolPostNumber As Long, ByVal OffsetType As Long, ByVal OffsetNumber As Long, ByVal Count As Long) As Long
C++
LONG F_CreateToolOffsetID (LONG MachineNumber, LONG ToolPostNumber, LONG OffsetType, LONG OffsetNumber, LONG Count);
VB
Function SetToolOffset (ByVal ID As Long, ToolOffsetValue As Long, ToolOffsetExponent As Long) As Boolean
C++
BOOL F_SetToolOffset (LONG ID, LONG* ToolOffsetValue, LONG* ToolOffsetExponent);

VB C++ Function WriteToolOffset(ByVal ID As Long) As Boolean BOOL F_WriteToolOffset(LONG ID);

VB C++ Function WriteToolOffsetEx(ByVal ID As Long) As Long LONG F_WriteToolOffsetEx(LONG ID);
F_WriteToolOffset(Ex) indicates both of the synchronous and the asynchronous functions.
DESCRIPTION
To write a tool offset data, you must go through the three procedures as follows; - Creating the descriptor ID for pointing the tool offset - Setting a tool offset data on the area pointed to by the descriptor ID - Writing it to NC Proceed to the following procedure 1,2,4 and 5 in case of the synchronous treatment. Proceed to the following procedure 1,3,5,6 and 7 in case of the asynchronous treatment.
-132-
B-75044EN/02
4. FA LIBRARY
1 F_CreateToolOffsetID creates the area for setting the tool offset data , and returns the descriptor ID. MachineNumber specifies a machine number. ToolPostNumber specifies a tool post number. OffsetType specifies the type of the tool offset you want to write. Refer to 4.3.12 Read Tool Offset for meaning of OffsetType. OffsetNumber specifies the start address of tool offset number you want to write. Count specifies the number of the tool offset you want to write. 2 F_SetToolOffset sets the tool offset data to the area pointed to by the descriptor ID. ID specifies the descriptor ID returned by F_CreateToolOffsetID. ToolOffsetValue points to the array where the tool offset data is written by the application program. ToolOffsetExponent points to the array where the exponent of the tool offset is written by the application program. Each array must be composed of the 16 four-byte integral elements. You set the tool offset to the arrays. Refer to 4.3.12 Reading Tool Offset for the way to write it to ToolOffsetValue and ToolOffsetExponent . In case of DNC2, OffsetType values must be constructed by the following flags. 0 bit only 0, 1 bits 0, 1, 8, 9 bits 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 bits 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 10, 11, 12, 13 bits 3 F_SetToolOffset copies one tool offset data to the area pointed to by the descriptor ID at a time. To write all the tool offset data to the area, repeat F_SetToolOffset the same times as the number specified by the Count argument of F_CreateTool OffsetID. 4 F_WriteToolOffset(Ex) writes the tool offset data associated with the descriptor ID. For Example, the N-th tool offset number copied by F_SetToolOffset is set to the N-th element of the area created by F_CreateToolOffsetID. And the N-th data is written as the (OffsetNumber+N-1)-th address of tool offset to the NC. Where, the range of N is from 1 to Count.
-133-
4. FA LIBRARY
5
B-75044EN/02
F_WriteToolOffset doesnt return until the treatment is finished. You can know whether the function has succeeded or not by the return value. You dont need to free the descriptor ID returned by F_CreateToolOffset.
F_WriteToolOffsetEx requests the system to write the tool offset data, and returns at once. If F_WriteToolOffsetEx succeeds, it returns the same descriptor ID as F_CreateToolOffset returns. Otherwise, the value of 0 is returned. In failure, you dont need to free the descriptor ID returned by F_CreateToolOffset. On success, you check whether the request is finished or not, and whether its result is success or not by calling F_Response.
Call
F_FreeID
to
free
the
descriptor
ID
returned
by
F_WriteToolOffsetEx after the request is finished.
RETURN VALUE
F_CreateToolOffsetID returns the descriptor ID for pointing the tool offset if it succeeds. If it fails, a value of 0 is returned. TRUE is returned if F_SetToolOffset succeeds, FALSE is returned if it fails. TRUE is returned if F_WriteToolOffset succeeds, FALSE is returned if it fails. F_WriteToolOffsetEx returns the descriptor ID for pointing the result if it succeeds. If it fails, a value of 0 is returned. In failure, an error code can be acquired by calling F_GetLastError.
-134-
B-75044EN/02
4. FA LIBRARY
4.3.14
SYNOPSIS
Reading Custom Macro Variable < F_ReadCustomMacroVariable >
VB
Function F_ReadCustomMacroVariable (ByVal MachineNumber As Long, ByVal ToolPostNumber As Long, ByVal VariableNumber As Long, ByVal Count As Long) As Long
C++
LONG F_ReadCustomMacroVariable (LONG MachineNumber, LONG ToolPostNumber, LONG VariableNumber, LONG Count);
The above functions run as the synchronous treatment. If you want to call them as the asynchronous or and treatment, carry out ReadCustomMacroVariableEx VariableEx. (F_)ReadCustomMacroVariable value . F_ReadCustomMacroVariable(Ex) indicates both of the synchronous and the asynchronous functions.
VB Function F_CopyCustomMacroVariable (ByVal ID As Long, VariableValue As Long, VariableExponent As Long, ByVal Count As Long, CopiedCount As Long) As Boolean C++ LONG F_CopyCustomMacroVariable (LONG ID, LONG* VariableValue, LONG* VariableExponent, LONG Count, LONG* CopiedCount);
F_ReadCustomMacro (F_)ReadCustomMacro
VariableToolEx have the same arguments and the same type of the return
DESCRIPTION
Proceed to the following procedure 1,2,4,5,6,7,8 and 9 in synchronous treatment. Proceed to the following procedure 1,3,5,6,7,8 and 9 in case of the asynchronous treatment. 1 F_ReadCustomMacroVariable(Ex) reads the custom macro variable from the NC specified by MachineNumber and ToolPostNumber. VariableNumber specifies the start number of the custom macro variable you want to read. Count specifies the number of the custom macro variables you want to read. case of the
-135-
4. FA LIBRARY
2
B-75044EN/02
F_ReadCustomMacroVariable doesnt return until the request is finished. You can know whether the function has succeeded or not by the return value. On success, the return value indicates the descriptor ID for pointing the custom macro variable.
F_ReadCustomMacroVariableEx requests the system to read the custom macro variable, and returns at once. The return value is the descriptor ID for pointing the custom macro variable. You must check whether the request is finished or not, and whether its result is success or not by calling F_Response.
When request is finished successfully, you can take out the custom macro variables as follows.
F_CopyCustomMacroVariable copies the custom macro variable to the specified arrays. ID specifies the descriptor ID returned by F_ReadCustomMacroVariable(Ex). Count specifies the number of the custom macro variables you want to copy at a time. VariableValue points to the array for placing the custom macro variable. VariableExponent points to the array for placing the exponents of the custom macro variables. Each array must be composed of the four-byte integral elements of the same number as Count specifies.
Variable Value Variable Exponent
V V V
V V V
Count
Four-byte integer
Four-byte integer
CopiedCount points to the four-byte integer for placing the actual copied number.
-136-
B-75044EN/02
4. FA LIBRARY
F_CopyCustomMacroVariable takes out the custom macro variables from the descriptor ID, and places them in the array pointed to by VariableValue and VariableExponent. Count specifies the number of the custom macro variables you want to copy at a time. The actual copied number is placed in the buffer pointed to by CopiedCount. The custom macro variable can be calculated by substituting the contents of the arrays pointed to by VariableValue and VariableExponent for the following equation. The N-th Custom Macro Variable = VariableValue[N] b10^( ' VariableExponent[N] ) Where, N is from 0 to (Count ' 1). And, ^ indicates the power operation. 6 F_CopyCustomMacroVariable can copy several variables with dividing into several times. When F_CopyCustomMacroVariable returns, the copy offset is advanced to the next location of the actual copied data. 7 F_Seek can move the copy offset to the custom macro variable you want to copy by using F_CopyCustom MacroVariable. 8 Call F_FreeID to free the descriptor ID returned by
F_ReadCustomMacroVariable(Ex) when you finish taking out the custom macro variables .
RETURN VALUE
F_ReadCustomMacroVariable(Ex) returns a descriptor ID for pointing the custom macro variable if it succeeds. If it fails, a value of 0 is returned. TRUE is returned if F_CopyCustomMacroVariable succeeds, FALSE is returned if it fails. In failure, an error code can be acquired when F_GetLastError is carried out.
-137-
4. FA LIBRARY
B-75044EN/02
4.3.15
SYNOPSIS
Writing Custom Macro Variable < F_WriteCustomMacroVariable >

VB Function F_WriteCustomMacroVariable (ByVal MachineNumber As Long, ByVal ToolPostNumber As Long, ByVal VariableNumber As Long, ByVal Count As Long, VariableValue As Long, VariableExponent As Long) As Boolean C++ BOOL F_WriteCustomMacroVariable (LONG MachineNumber, LONG ToolPostNumber, LONG VariableNumber, LONG Count, L ONG* VariableValue, LONG* VairableValue);

VB Function F_WriteCustomMacroVariableEx (ByVal MachineNumber As Long, ByVal ToolPostNumber As Long, ByVal VariableNumber As Long, ByVal Count As Long, VariableValue As Long, VariableExponent As Long) As Long C++ LONG F_WriteCustomMacroVariableEx (LONG MachineNumber, LONG ToolPostNumber, LONG VariableNumber, LONG Count, LONG* VariableValue, LONG* VairableValue);
F_WriteCustomMacroVariable(Ex) indicates both of the synchronous and the asynchronous functions.
DESCRIPTION
Proceed to the following procedure 1 and 2 in case of the synchronous treatment. Proceed to the following procedure 1,3 and 4 in case of the asynchronous treatment. 1 F_WriteCustomMacroVariable(Ex) variable to the NC specified ToolPostNumber. VariableNumber specifies the start address of the custom macro variable you want to write. Count specifies the number of the custom macro variables you want to write. ToolOffsetValue and ToolOffsetExponent point to the arrays where the custom macro variables are written. writes by the custom macro and
MachineNumber
-138-
B-75044EN/02
4. FA LIBRARY
each array must be composed of the four-byte integral elements of the same number as Count specifies. You set the custom macro variable to the arrays. Refer to the 4.3.14 Reading Custom Macro Variable for the way to write data to VariableValue and VariableExponent. 2 F_WriteCustomMacroVariable doesnt return until the request is finished. You can know whether the function has succeeded or not by the return value. 3 F_WriteCustomMacroVariableEx requests the system to write the custom macro variable, and returns at once. The return value is the descriptor ID for pointing the result. You must check whether the request is finished or not, and whether its result is success or not by calling F_Response. 4 Call F_FreeID to free the descriptor ID returned by
F_WriteCustomMacroVariableEx when the request is finished.
RETURN VALUE
TRUE is returned if F_WriteCustomMacroVariable succeeds, FALSE is returned if it fails. F_WriteCustomMacroVariableEx returns a descriptor ID for pointing the custom macro variable if it succeeds. If it is fails, a value of 0 is returned. In failure, an error code can be acquired by calling F_GetLastError .
-139-
4. FA LIBRARY
B-75044EN/02
4.3.16
SYNOPSIS
Reading Tool Life Management Information < F_ReadToolLife >
VB
Function F_ReadToolLife (ByVal MachineNumber As Long, ByVal ToolPostNumber As Long, ByVal ToolGroupNumber As Long, ByVal Count As Long) As Long
C++
LONG F_ReadToolLife (LONG MachineNumber, LONG ToolPostNumber, LONG ToolGroupNumber, LONG Count);
The above functions run as the synchronous treatment. If you want to call them as the asynchronous treatment, carry out ReadToolLifeEx or F_ReadToolLifeEx. (F_)ReadToolLife and (F_)ReadToolLifeEx have the same arguments and the same type of the return value. F_ReadToolLife(Ex) indicates both of the synchronous and the asynchronous functions.
VB Function F_CopyToolLifeParameter (ByVal ID As Long, ToolGroupNumber As Long, ToolUsed As Long, ToolLife As Long, ToolCount As Long) As Boolean C++ BOOL F_CopyToolLifeParameter (LONG ID, LONG* ToolGroupNumber, LONG* ToolUsed, LONG* ToolLife, LONG* ToolCount); VB Function F_CopyToolLife (ByVal ID As Long, ToolNumber As Long, ToolLengthCompensation As Long, CutterCompensation As Long, ToolInformation As Long, ByVal Count As Long, CopiedCount as Long) As Boolean C++ BOOL F_CopyToolLife (LONG ID, LONG* ToolNumber, LONG* ToolLengthCompensation, LONG* CutterCompensation, LONG* ToolInformation, LONG Count, LONG* CopiedCount); VB C++ Function F_SeekToolLife (ByVal ID As Long, ByVal Offset As Long) As Boolean BOOL F_SeekToolLife(LONG ID, LONG Offset);
-140-
B-75044EN/02
4. FA LIBRARY
DESCRIPTION
Proceed to the following procedure 1,2,4,5,6,7,8 and 9 in synchronous treatment. Proceed to the following procedure 1,3,4,5,6,7,8 and 9 in case of the asynchronous treatment. 1 F_ReadToolLife(Ex) reads the tool life data from the NC specified by MachineNumber and ToolPostNumber. ToolGroupNumber specifies the start address of the tool group you want to read. Count specifies the number of the tool group data you want to read. 2 F_ReadToolLife doesnt return until the request is finished. You can know whether the function has succeeded or not by the return value. On success, the return value indicates the descriptor ID for the tool life data 3 F_ReadToolLifeEx requests the system to read the tool life data, and returns at once. The return value is the descriptor ID for placing the tool life data. You must check whether the request is finished or not, and whether its result is success or not by calling F_Response. 4 When request is finished successfully, you can take out the tool life data as follows. 5 F_Seek moves the copy offset to the tool group you want to take out. F_CopyToolLifeParameter, F_Seek. Offset of F_Seek is from the value of 0 to (Count of F_ReadTool Offset(Ex) '1). For example, ToolGroupNumber is set to 5, Count is set to 3, and then you read the tool life data by using F_ReadToolOffset. In this case, the following table shows the relations between Offset of F_Seek and the tool group number of F_CopyToolLifeParameter, F_CopyToolLife, and F_SeekToolLife. Offset of F_Seek 0 1 2 Tool Group Number ' ' ' F_CopyToolLife and F_SeekToolLife takes out the tool life data of the tool group moved by case of the
The tool group number must be changed by using F_Seek. -141-
4. FA LIBRARY
6
B-75044EN/02
F_CopyToolLifeParameter takes out the information of the tool group number specified by F_Seek. ID specifies the descriptor ID returned by F_ReadToolLife(Ex). ToolGroupNumber points to the buffer for placing the tool group number. ToolUsed points to the buffer for placing the tool life counter. ToolLife points to the buffer for placing the tool life. ToolCount points to the buffer for placing the number of tools. Each buffer must be the four-byte integer. If the specified tool group is not registered in the NC, the value of 0 is placed in ToolUsed, ToolLife, and ToolCount . F_CopyToolLife takes out the information of the tool which belongs to the tool group number specified by F_Seek. ID specifies the descriptor ID returned by F_ReadToolLife(Ex). Count specifies the number of you want to read. ToolLengthCompensation points to the array for placing the tool length offset. CutterCompensation points to the array for placing the cutter offset. ToolInformation points to the array for placing the tool information. Each array pointed to by ToolLengthCompensation, CutterCompensation, and ToolInformation must be composed of the four-byte integral elements of the same number as Count specifies. CopiedCount points to the four-byte integral buffer for placing the actual copied number. F_CopyToolLife takes out the tool life information from the descriptor ID, and places them in the Cutter arrays pointed to by and ToolLengthCompensation, ToolInformation. Count specifies the number of tool life data you want to read at a time. The actual copied number is placed in the buffer pointed to by CopiedCount. The following value is placed in ToolInformation . 0: 1: 2: 3: The current using tool The registered tool The tool life is run out. The tool is skipped Compensation
-142-
B-75044EN/02
4. FA LIBRARY
ToolGroupNumber
ToolGroup Number ToolUsed Four-byte integer ToolLength Compensation Cutter Compensation
ToolLife ToolCount Four-byte integer Tool Information
V V V
V V V
V V V
Tool Count
Four-byte integer ToolGroupNumber +1
Four-byte integer
Four-byte integer
V V V
ToolGroupNumber +Count - 1
F_CopyToolLife can copy information with dividing into several times. When F_CopyToolLife returns, the pointer is advanced to the next location of the actual copied data.
F_SeekToolLife can move the copy offset to the tool life information you want to copy by using F_CopyToolLife. ID specifies the descriptor ID returned by F_ReadToolLife(Ex). Offset specifies the number of the tool life information you want to read. The range of Offset is from the value of 0 to (ToolCount '1).
Call
F_FreeID
to
free
the
descriptor
ID
returned
by
F_ReadToolLife(Ex) when you finish the copy of tool life information.
RETURN VALUE
F_ReadToolLife(Ex) returns a descriptor ID for pointing the tool life information if it succeeds. If it fails, a value of 0 is returned. TRUE is returned if F_CopyToolLifeParameter succeeds, FALSE is returned if it fails. TRUE is returned if F_CopyToolLife succeeds, FALSE is returned if it fails. TRUE is returned if F_SeekToolLife succeeds, FALSE is returned if it fails. In failure, an error code can be acquired by calling F_GetLastError. -143-
4. FA LIBRARY
NOTE
B-75044EN/02
This function cannot be used on DNC1/Ethernet. (It is scheduled to be supported in the future.)
4.3.17
SYNOPSIS
Reading PMC Data < F_ReadPMCData >
VB
Function F_ReadPMCData (ByVal MachineNumber As Long, ByVal ToolPostNumber As Long, ByVal PMCAddress As String, ByVal PMCNumber As Long, ByVal Count As Long) As Long
C++
LONG F_ReadPMCData (LONG MachineNumber, LONG ToolPostNumber, LPCTSTR PMCAddress, LONG PMCNumber, LONG Count);
The above functions run as the synchronous treatment. If you want to call them as the asynchronous treatment, carry out ReadPMCDataEx or F_ReadPMCDataEx. (F_)ReadPMCData and (F_)ReadPMCDataEx have the same arguments and the same type of the return value. F_ReadPMCData(Ex) indicates both of the synchronous and asynchronous function.
VB Function F_CopyPMCData (ByVal ID As Long, PMCData As Byte, ByVal Count As Long, CopiedCount As Long) As Boolean C++ BOOL F_CopyPMCData (LONG ID, BYTE* PMCData, LONG Count, LONG* CopiedCount);
DESCRIPTION
Proceed to the following procedure 1,2,4,5 and 6 in case of the synchronous treatment. Proceed to the following procedure 1,3,4,5 and 6 in case of the asynchronous treatment. 1 F_ReadPMCData(Ex) reads the PMC data from the NC specified by MachineNumber and ToolPostNumber . PMCAddress specifies the PMC address such as the one character of X or R. And must be terminated by the NULL character. PMCNumber specifies the start address of the PMC number. Count specifies the number of the PMC data you want to read.
-144-
B-75044EN/02
4. FA LIBRARY
2 F_ReadPMC doesnt return until the request is finished. You can know whether the function has succeeded or not by the return value. On success, the return value indicates the descriptor ID for pointing the PMC data. 3 F_ReadPMCEx requests the system to read the PMC data, and returns at once. The return value is the descriptor ID for pointing the PMC data. You must check whether the request is finished or not, and whether its result is success or not by using F_Response. 4 When F_ReadPMC(Ex) finished successfully, please proceed to the next step. 5 F_CopyPMCData can take out the PMC data. ID specifies the descriptor ID returned by F_ReadPMCData(Ex). Count specifies the number of the PMC data you want to read. PMCData points to the array for placing the PMC data. The array must be composed of the four-byte integral elements of the same number as Count specifies. The PMC data is placed in only the least significant byte of the four-byte integer. CopiedCount points to the four-byte integral buffer for placing the number of the actual copied data.
PMCData

V V V Count 'Up to 32 elements'

Least Significant byte of four-byte integer
F_CopyPMCData takes out the PMC data from the descriptor ID, and places them in the array pointed to by PMCData. The actual copied number is placed in the array pointed to by CopiedCount. 6 F_CopyPMCData can copy PMC data with dividing into several times. When F_CopyPMCData returns, the offset is advanced to the next location of the actual copied data.
-145-
4. FA LIBRARY
7
B-75044EN/02
F_Seek can move the copy offset to the PMC data you want to copy by using F_CopyPMCData.
Call F_FreeID to free the descriptor ID returned by F_ReadPMCData (Ex) when you finish taking out PMC data.
RETURN VALUE
F_ReadPMCData(Ex) returns a descriptor ID for pointing the PMC data if it succeeds. If it fails, a value of 0 is returned . TRUE is returned if F_CopyPMCData succeeds, FALSE is returned if it fails. In failure, an error code can be acquired when F_GetLastError is carried out.
4.3.18
SYNOPSIS
Writing PMC Data< F_WritePMCData >

VB Function F_WritePMCData (ByVal MachineNumber As Long, ByVal ToolPostNumber As Long, ByVal PMCAddress As String, ByVal PMCNumber As Long, ByVal Count As Long, PMCData As Byte) As Boolean VC++ BOOL F_WritePMCData (LONG MachineNumber, LONG ToolPostNumber, LPCTSTR PMCAddress, LONG PMCNumber, LONG Count, BYTE *PMCData );

VB Function F_WritePMCDataEx (ByVal MachineNumber As Long, ByVal ToolPostNumber As Long, ByVal PMCAddress As String, ByVal PMCNumber As Long ByVal Count As Long, PMCData As Byte) As Long VC++ LONG F_WritePMCDataEx (LONG MachineNumber, LONG ToolPostNumber, LPCTSTR PMCAddress, LONG PMCNumber, LONG Count, BYTE *PMCData );
F_WritePMCData(Ex) indicates both of the synchronous and the asynchronous functions.
-146-
B-75044EN/02
4. FA LIBRARY
DESCRIPTION
Proceed to the following procedure 1 and 2 in case of the synchronous treatment. Proceed to the following procedure 1,3 and 4 in case of the asynchronous treatment. 1 F_WritePMCData(Ex) writes the PMC data to the NC specified by MachineNumber and ToolPostNumber. PMCAddress specifies the PMC address such as the one character of R or D. And must be terminated by NULL. PMCNumber specifies the start address of the PMC number. Count specifies the number of the PMC data you want to write. But the maximum is 32. PMCData points to the array where the PMC data is written. The array must be composed of the four-byte integral elements of the same number as Count specifies. You set the PMC data to PMCData. The PMC data must be set in only the least significant byte of the four-byte integer. Three higher order bytes must be set to the value of 0. Refer to Reading PMC Data for the way to write the PMC data to PMCData. 2 F_WritePMCData doesnt return until the request is finished. You can know whether the function has succeeded or not by the return value. 3 F_WritePMCEx requests the system to write the PMC data, and returns at once. The return value is the descriptor ID for pointing the result. You must check whether the request is finished or not, and whether its result is success or not by using F_Response. 4 Call F_FreeID to free the descriptor ID return by F_WritePMCEx after the request is finished.
RETURN VALUE
TRUE is returned if F_WritePMCData succeeds, FALSE is returned if it fails. F_WritePMCDataEx returns a descriptor ID of the positive integer for pointing the result if it succeeds. If it fails, a value of 0 is returned. In failure, an error code can be acquired by calling F_GetLastError.
-147-
4. FA LIBRARY
B-75044EN/02
4.3.19
SYNOPSIS
Reading NC Parameters < F_ReadParameter >
VB
Function ReadParameter (ByVal MachineNumber As Long, ByVal ToolPostNumber As Long, ByVal ParameterNumber As Long, ByVal DataFormat As Long, ByVal ParameterAxis As Long) As Long
VC++
LONG F_ReadParameter (LONG MachineNumber, LONG ToolPostNumber, LONG ParameterNumber, LONG DataFormat, LONG ParameterAxis);
The function names in the above example are for a case where processing is carried out synchronously. The function names for when processing is carried out asynchronously become F_ReadParameterEx. The type of argument and return value is the same in both synchronous and asynchronous processing. The description F_ReadParameter(Ex) indicates both synchronous and asynchronous processing.
VB VC++ Function CopyParameter (ByVal ID As Long, Parameter As Long) As Boolean BOOL F_CopyParameter (LONG ID, Long* Parameter);
DESCRIPTION
Proceed to 1, 2 and 4 to 7 in the case of synchronous processing. Proceed to 1 and 3 to 7 in the case of synchronous processing. 1 F_ReadParameter(Ex) reads parameters from the NC having the machine number specified by MachineNumber and tool post number specified by ToolPostNumber. For ParameterNumber, specify the number of the parameter to be read; for DataFormat, the data format of the parameter to be read; and for ParamaterAxis, the data of which axis to be read when the parameter to be read is an axis type. Set the following values according to the data format of the parameter to be read in DataFormat.
Data Format 1 2 3 4 Data Format of Parameter to be Read Bit type Byte type Word type 2-word type
For details on the data format of the parameter to be read, refer to the NC Instruction Manual. -148-
B-75044EN/02
4. FA LIBRARY
If the parameter to be read is not an axis type, specify ParameterAxis as "0". If the parameter to be read is an axis type, set an OR-ed value of the following bit flags to ParameterAxis.
Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Axis Whose Parameter Is To be Read 1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis 9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis (not used)
F_ReadParameter is a synchronous process. So, there is no return value from the function until processing ends. The return value is used for judging whether processing succeeded or failed. If processing is successful, the return value becomes the descriptor ID to the parameter.
F_ReadParameteEx is an asynchronous process. So, there is a return value from the function immediately after processing is requested. The return value becomes the descriptor ID to the parameter. When F_Response is executed, whether or not processing ends lets you know where processing succeeded or failed.
When the parameter is read successfully, the following process can be carried out.
When F_CopyParameter is executed, the value of the read parameter can be obtained. Set the value of the descriptor ID, the return value of F_ReadParameter(Ex), to ID. The value of the read parameter is copied to Parameter. Even if the parameter is an axis type or not, set the pointer to the 16-element x 4byte integer array. -149-
4. FA LIBRARY
B-75044EN/02
F-CopyParameter extracts the parameter from the information specified by the descriptor ID and copies it to Parameter.
Parameter
V V V
Always 16 elements
4-byte integer
If the parameter is not an axis type, the value is copied to element 0 of the parameter. If the parameter is an axis type, specify the axis to be read according to the bit flag position in the ParameterAxis argument of F_ReadParameter(Ex). The position (0 to 15) of this bit flag corresponds to the element number (0 to 15) of the array parameter. For example if bit 0 is raised in ParameterAxis, the value of the 1st axis is copied to element 0 of the array parameter. Nothing is written to elements in the array that correspond to bit positions whose ParameterAxis bit flag is not raised.
When copying of the parameter value ends, execute F_FreeID to release the descriptor ID.
NOTE Reading of bit type data is carried out in byte units; reading of only specified bits is not possible. Judge which bit is required from the data that is read in byte units.
RETURN VALUE
F_ReadParameter returns a descriptor ID to the parameter if it succeeds. If it fails, a value of 0 is returned. F_ReadParameterEx returns a descriptor ID to the parameter if it succeeds. If it fails, a value of 0 is returned. TRUE is returned if F_CopyParameter succeeds, FALSE is returned if it fails. If processing fails, an error code can be acquired by calling F_GetLastError.
NOTE This function cannot be used on DNC2. (It is scheduled to be supported in the future.)
-150-
B-75044EN/02
4. FA LIBRARY
4.3.20
SYNOPSIS
Writing NC Parameters < F_WriteParameter >
In the case of synchronous processing

VB Function WriteParameter (ByVal MachineNumber As Long, ByVal ToolPostNumber As Long, ByVal ParameterNumber As Long, ByVal DataFormat As Long, ByVal ParameterAxis As Long, Parameter As Long) As Boolean VC++ BOOL F_WriteParameter (LONG MachineNumber, LONG ToolPostNumber, LONG ParameterNumber, LONG DataFormat, LONG ParameterAxis, LONG *Parameter );
In the case of asynchronous processing

VB Function WriteParameterEx (ByVal MachineNumber As Long, ByVal ToolPostNumber As Long, ByVal ParameterNumber As Long, ByVal DataFormat As Long, ByVal ParameterAxis As Long, Parameter As Long) As Long VC++ LONG F_WritePMCDataEx (LONG MachineNumber, LONG ToolPostNumber, LONG ParameterNumber, LONG DataFormat, LONG ParameterAxis, Long *Parameter );
The description F_WriteParameter(Ex) means both synchronous and asynchronous processing.
DESCRIPTION
Read 1 and 2 in the case of synchronous processing. Read 1, 3 and 4 in the case of synchronous processing. 1 F_WriteParameter(Ex) writes parameters to the NC having the machine number specified by MachineNumber and tool post number specified by ToolPostNumber. For ParameterNumber, specify the number of the parameter to be written; for DataFormat, the data format of the parameter to be written; and for ParamaterAxis, the data of which axis to be written when the parameter to be written is an axis type. Specify the values of the parameters to be written to the NC in Parameter. In parameter, set the pointer to the 16-element x 4-byte integer array. For details on how to set values to DataFormat, ParameterAxis and Parameter, see 4.3.19 Reading Parameters.
-151-
4. FA LIBRARY
2
B-75044EN/02
F_WriteParameter is a synchronous process. So, there is no return value from the function until processing ends. The return value is used for judging whether processing succeeded or failed.
F_WriteParameteEx is an asynchronous process. So, there is a return value from the function immediately after processing is requested. The return value becomes the descriptor ID to the processing results. When F_Response is executed, whether or not processing ends lets you know where processing succeeded or failed.
When processing ends, execute F_FreeID to release the descriptor ID.
NOTE Writing of bit type data is carried out in byte units; writing of only specified bits is not possible. During writing of bit type data, read the parameter area in which the bit to write belongs as a bit type specification, and write that parameter as a bit type specification after changing the bits that require changing.
RETURN VALUE
TRUE is returned if F_WriteParameter succeeds, FALSE is returned if it fails. F_WriteParameterEX returns a descriptor ID to the parameter if it succeeds. If it fails, a value of 0 is returned. If processing fails, an error code can be acquired by calling F_GetLastError.
NOTE This function cannot be used on DNC2. (It is scheduled to be supported in the future.)
-152-
B-75044EN/02
4. FA LIBRARY
4.3.21
Computer Start DNC Operation < F_Dnc... >

This function is valid only for machines connected by DNC1/Ethernet. There are four ways of specifying the file for DNC operation as described in section 1.3: by "file number," "file name," "NC program number" and "full path of file." Each method has synchronous and asynchronous processing modes. The DNC operation procedure on the series 16i/18i: (1) Turn the NC's DNC1 signal to ON, and then set the NC to the MEM mode. The NC enters the RMT mode. (2) Cycle start the NC. The MDI screen displays RMT-START. (3) DNC operation is started on the NC by transferring the desired program for DNC operation from your computer by the F_Dnc function.
NOTE When DNC1/Ethernet is used, DNC operation is canceled by pressing the RESET key during DNC operation started on your computer. Transfer is not canceled even if the RESET key is pressed on the NC during download or upload processing for startup on your computer. Transfer, however, can be canceled using the cancel functions "F_DownloadCancel" and "F_UploadCancel" on your computer.
SYNOPSIS
<Specifying the file for DNC operation by its file number> In the case of synchronous processing
VB Function DncFileNumber (ByVal MachineNumber As Long, ByVal ToolPostNumber As Long, ByVal FileNumber As Long) As Boolean VC++ BOOL F_DncFileNumber (LONG MachineNumber, LONG ToolPostNumber, LONG FileNumber);

VB Function DncFileNumberEx (ByVal MachineNumber As Long, ByVal ToolPostNumber As Long, ByVal FileNumber As Long) As Long VC++ LONG F_DncFileNumberEx (LONG MachineNumber, LONG ToolPostNumber, LONG FileNumber);
-153-
4. FA LIBRARY
<Specifying the file for DNC operation by its file name> In the case of synchronous processing
VB Function DncFileName
B-75044EN/02
(ByVal MachineNumber As Long, ByVal ToolPostNumber As Long, ByVal FileName As String) As Boolean VC++ BOOL F_DncFileName (LONG MachineNumber, LONG ToolPostNumber, LPCTSTR FileName);

VB Function DncFileNameEx (ByVal MachineNumber As Long, ByVal ToolPostNumber As Long, ByVal FileName As String) As Long VC++ LONG F_DncFileNameEx (LONG MachineNumber, LONG ToolPostNumber, LPCTSTR FileName);
<Specifying the file for DNC operation by NC program number> In the case of synchronous processing
VB Function DncONumber (ByVal MachineNumber As Long, ByVal ToolPostNumber As Long, ByVal ONumber As Long) As Boolean VC++ BOOL F_DncONumber (LONG MachineNumber, LONG ToolPostNumber, LONG ONumber);

VB Function DncONumberEx (ByVal MachineNumber As Long, ByVal ToolPostNumber As Long, ByVal ONumber As Long) As Long VC++ LONG F_DncONumberEx (LONG MachineNumber, LONG ToolPostNumber, LONG ONumber);
-154-
B-75044EN/02
4. FA LIBRARY
<Specifying the file for DNC operation by its full path> In the case of synchronous processing
VB Function DncFilePath (ByVal MachineNumber As Long, ByVal ToolPostNumber As Long, ByVal FilePath As String) As Boolean VC++ BOOL F_DncFileName (LONG MachineNumber, LONG ToolPostNumber, LPCTSTR FilePath);

VB Function DncFilePathEx (ByVal MachineNumber As Long, ByVal ToolPostNumber As Long, ByVal FilePath As String) As Long VC++ LONG F_DncFileNameEx (LONG MachineNumber, LONG ToolPostNumber, LPCTSTR FilePath);
The description F_Dnc... indicates synchronous processing of the above four types of functions. The description F_Dnc...Ex indicates asynchronous processing of the above four types of functions. The description F_Dnc...(Ex) indicates both synchronous and asynchronous processing.
DESCRIPTION
Read 1 and 2 in the case of synchronous processing. Read 1, 3 and 4 in the case of synchronous processing. 1 F_Dnc...(Ex) transfers NC program files from your computer to the NC for DNC operation. The following table shows the four ways of specifying the file for DNC operation.
Method of Specification File number File name NC program number Full path of file Name of Function F_DncFileNumber(Ex) F_DncFileName(Ex) F_DncONumber(Ex) F_DncFilePath(Ex)
There are MachineNumber and ToolPostNumber for the common argument. For MachineNumber, specify the machine number. For ToolPostNumber, specify the tool post number. -155-
4. FA LIBRARY
B-75044EN/02
At F_DncFileNumber(Ex), specify the file number by FileNumber. Any value from 1 to 9999 can be specified. At F_DncFileName(Ex), specify the file name by FileName. At F_DncONumber(Ex), specify the NC program by ONumber. At D_DncFilePath(Ex), specify the full path of the file by FilePath. Section 1.3 describes the rules for transferring NC programs specified by file number, file name and NC program number. When files to be transferred are specified by file order, specified files in ASCII sorted order are subject to DNC operation. When files are specified by file name, files having the same name are subject to DNC operation. When files are specified by NC program number, files having a name in the format Oxxxx (xxxx: specified NC program number) followed by an extension are subject to DNC operation. When files are specified by full path of file, files having the full specified path are transferred regardless of the above rules. 2 F_Dnc... is a synchronous process. So, there is no return value from the function until DNC operation ends. The return value is used for judging whether processing succeeded or failed. 3 F_Dnc... is an synchronous process. So, there is a return value from the function immediately after DNC operation is requested. The return value becomes the descriptor ID to the processing results. When F_Response is executed, whether or not processing ends lets you know where processing succeeded or failed. 4 When processing ends, execute F_FreeID to release the descriptor ID.
RETURN VALUE
TRUE is returned if F_Dnc... succeeds, FALSE is returned if it fails. F_Dnc...Ex returns a descriptor ID to the parameter if it succeeds. If it fails, a value of 0 is returned. If processing fails, an error code can be acquired by calling F_GetLastError.
-156-
B-75044EN/02
4. FA LIBRARY
4.3.22
Canceling Computer Start Download < F_DownloadCancel >

This function is valid only for machines connected by DNC1/Ethernet. This function cancels the download that is started by starting up your computer.
NOTE 1 To use this function, you must execute the download of the NC program requested by the computer asynchronously. If the download is executed synchronously, the application will not be returned to until the download function ends. For this reason, the cancel function cannot be used. 2 Processing at normal completion of this function differs from cancellation of an actual download. Make sure that the asynchronous download function ended by a cancel by the F_Response function (error code 0x6000012c).
SYNOPSIS
VB Function DownloadCancel (ByVal MachineNumber As Long, ByVal ToolPostNumber As Long) As Boolean VC++ BOOL F_ DownloadCancel (LONG MachineNumber, LONG ToolPostNumber);
DESCRIPTION
1 F_DownloadCancel ends the process that was downloaded by computer startup to the NC having the machine number specified by MachineNumber and tool post number specified by ToolPostNumber. 2 The cancel request is reset before the download is started even if it is started after F_DownloadCancel is executed. So, the download is not canceled.
RETURN VALUE
TRUE is returned if F_DownloadCancel succeeds, FALSE is returned if it fails. If processing fails, an error code can be acquired by calling F_GetLastError. If the specified machine is not in the process, FALSE is returned.
-157-
4. FA LIBRARY
B-75044EN/02
4.3.23
Canceling Computer Start Upload < F_UploadCancel >

This function is valid only for machines connected by DNC1/Ethernet. This function cancels the upload that is started by starting up your computer.
NOTE 1 To use this function, you must execute the upload of the NC program requested by the computer asynchronously. If the upload is executed synchronously, the application will not be returned to until the upload function ends. For this reason, the cancel function cannot be used. 2 Processing at normal completion of this function differs from cancellation of an actual upload. Make sure that the asynchronous upload function ended by a cancel by the F_Response function (error code 0x6000012c).
SYNOPSIS
VB Function UploadCancel (ByVal MachineNumber As Long, ByVal ToolPostNumber As Long) As Boolean VC++ BOOL F_ UploadCancel (LONG MachineNumber, LONG ToolPostNumber);
DESCRIPTION
1 F_UploadCancel ends the process that was uploaded by computer startup to the NC having the machine number specified by MachineNumber and tool post number specified by ToolPostNumber. 2 The cancel request is reset before the upload is started even if it is started after F_UploadCancel is executed. So, the upload is not canceled.
RETURN VALUE
TRUE is returned if F_UploadCancel succeeds, FALSE is returned if it fails. If processing fails, an error code can be acquired by calling F_GetLastError. If the specified machine is not in the process, FALSE is returned.
-158-
B-75044EN/02
4. FA LIBRARY
4.4
4.4.1
SYNOPSIS
DIAGNOSIS AND OTHER SERVICES
Initialization Processing < F_Begin >
VB VC++
Function Begin() As Boolean BOOL F_Begin(void);
DESCRIPTION
F_ Begin executes initialization processing of this library. Execute this function before you use this library.
RETURN VALUE
TRUE is returned if F_Begin succeeds, FALSE is returned if it fails. If processing fails, an error code can be acquired by calling F_GetLastError.
4.4.2
SYNOPSIS
Getting Number of Data < F_GetCount >
VB C++
Function GetCount(ByVal ID As Long, Count As Long) As Boolean BOOL F_GetCount(LONG ID, LONG* Count);
DESCRIPTION
F_GetCount counts the data associated with the descriptor ID, and places the count number in the buffer pointed to by Count. The contents of count data are different according to the specified descriptor ID. Refer to the explanation of each function returning the descriptor ID.
RETURN VALUE
TRUE is returned if F_GetCount succeeds, FALSE is returned if it fails. In failure, an error code can be acquired by calling F_GetLastError.
-159-
4. FA LIBRARY
B-75044EN/02
4.4.3
SYNOPSIS
Moving Offset Location of Data < F_Seek >
VB C++
Function Seek (ByVal ID As Long, ByVal Offset As Long) As Boolean BOOL F_Seek(LONG ID, LONG Offset);
DESCRIPTION
F_Seek movies the offset location of the data to Offset. The data is different according to the specified descriptor ID. Refer to the explanation of each function returning the descriptor ID. When the value of 0 is set to Offset, the offset location is moved to the first data. When the (Count of F_GetCount '1) is set, it is moved to the last data.
RETURN VALUE
TRUE is returned if F_Seek succeeds, FALSE is returned if it fails. In failure, an error code can be acquired when F_GetLastError is carried out.
4.4.4
SYNOPSIS
Freeing Descriptor ID < F_FreeID >
VB C++
Sub FreeID(ByVal ID As Long) void F_FreeID(LONG ID);
DESCRIPTION
F_FreeID frees the Descriptor ID specified by ID. The descriptor ID must be freed after using it. After carrying out the function, you cant access the data associated with the freed descriptor ID.
RETURN VALUE
This function doesnt have the return value.
-160-
B-75044EN/02
4. FA LIBRARY
4.4.5
SYNOPSIS
Getting Result of Asynchronous Treatment < F_Response >
VB C++
Function Response (ByVal ID As Long, Result As Long, ErrorCode As Long) As Boolean BOOL F_Response(LONG ID, LONG* Result, LONG* ErrorCode);
DESCRIPTION
F_Response places the result of a treatment associated with the descriptor ID in the buffer specified by Result. If the result is 0, the treatment isnt finished. If the result is 1, the treatment is finished successfully. If the result is 2, the treatment is finished in failure. When the result is 2, the error code is set to the buffer specified by ErrorCode. Make sure to check ErrorCode of this function when an asynchronous function is finished in failure. In that case, you cant check the error code by using F_GetLastError.
RETURN VALUE
TRUE is returned if F_Response succeeds, FALSE is returned if it fails. If F_Response is finished in failure, an error code can be acquired by using F_GetLastError.
4.4.6
SYNOPSIS
Getting Error Code < F_GetLastError >
VB C++
Function F_GetLastError() As Long DLONG F_GetLastError(void);
DESCRIPTION
F_GetLastError returns the error code. The error code indicates the cause of the latest failed function in one application program. When an application program consists of more than one thread, the last failed function in all the threads causes the error code returned by F_GetLastError. Note the design for the application program, including several threads. If a function is finished in failure, the error code indicates the cause of the failure.
RETURN VALUE
The error code is returned.
-161-
4. FA LIBRARY
B-75044EN/02
4.4.7
SYNOPSIS
End of FA LIBRARY
< F_End >
VB C++
Sub End() void F_End(void);
DESCRIPTION
F_End terminates FA LIBRARY. Call this function when an application program is finished. After this function is carried out, an application program cant call the functions of FA LIBRARY.
RETURN VALUE
This function doesnt have the return value.
-162-
B-75044EN/02
4. FA LIBRARY
4.5
LOG LIBRARY
This section describes the interface specifications relating to the functions provided by the log library of FA SYSTEM for PC. FA SYSTEM for PC creates various logs for monitoring operation. (Details of these logs are described in 5. Monitoring FA SYSTEM for PC.) All of these logs are managed and created by the LogServer program. For this reason, the LogServer must be started before you start FA SYSTEM for PC. The log library starts and terminates this LogServer.
When Is Log Library required?

The log library functions are not used when FA SYSTEM for PC is started from the [FA System] icon. This is because log library is automatically executed to start the LogServer when the [FA System] icon is started. To call each of the FA LIBRARY functions individually without using the [FA System] icon (that is, to directly use the F_CreateCommunication and F_Open functions), start the LogServer from the log library, and then use FA LIBRARY.
Log Library Call Method

The log library is a module separate from FA LIBRARY. Start log library from VB and VC++ as follows. When starting from VB, the log library is supplied by OLE Automation. For this reason, create an object by the function CreatObject(), and call the method of that object. The name used when creating the object is LogClient.Library. When starting from VC++, the log library is supplied by DLL. The library is not a class. For this reason, each function is called directly.
FA LIBRARY and Log Library Call Order

To call each function individually such as in the sample program without using the [FA System] icon, start the LogServer from the log library, and use FA LIBRARY. To terminate the functions, terminate FA LIBRARY, and then shut down the LogServer from the log library. The following shows an example of how to do this in the FComTVB sample program.
-163-
4. FA LIBRARY
Starting the LogServer by the log library Set LogLib = CreateObject("LogClient.Library") Rtn = LogLib.InvokeLogServer("") 'FA library start processing Set FALib = CreateObject("FanucCom.Library") Rtn = FALib.Begin() 'Initialization process 'Execute FA library services. 'FA library termination processing FALib.TerminateCommunication("") FALib.End Set FALib = Nothing Terminating the LogServer by the log library LogLib.TerminateLogServer Set LogLib = Nothing ''Termination of
B-75044EN/02
Rtn = FALib.CreateCommunication() 'Start of communication
communication process 'End processing
-164-
B-75044EN/02
4. FA LIBRARY
4.5.1
SYNOPSIS
Starting LogServer < F_InvokeLogServer >
VB VC++
Function InvokeLogServer(ByVal LogServerDir As String) As Long LONG F_InvokeLogServer(LPCTSTR LogServerDir);
DESCRIPTION
F_InvokeLogServer starts the LogServer (LogSvr.exe). Set "" to LogServeDir when FA SYSTEM for PC is installed and the LogServer location has not been moved. When "" is set, the LogServer in the installation directory of FA SYSTEM for PC is started. (The LogServer is installed to "C: Fpfasys Bin" assuming that "C: Fpfasys" is the directory in which FA SYSTEM for PC is installed.) When the LogServer has been moved, set its drive name and directory name. For example, let's assume that the LogServer has been moved to "D:YourApp". In this case, set either of the following depending on whether you programmed in VC++ or VB: F_InvokeLogServer("D: YourApp"); (VC++) LogLib.InvokeLogServer("D: YourApp"); (VB)
RETURN VALUE
TRUE is returned if F_InvokeLogServer succeeds, FALSE is returned if it fails. If processing fails, an error code can be acquired by calling F_GetLastError.
4.5.2
SYNOPSIS
Terminating LogServer < F_TerminateLogServer >
VB VC++
Function TerminateLogServer() As Boolean BOOL F_TerminateLogServer(void);
DESCRIPTION
F_TerminateLogServer terminates the LogServer.
RETURN VALUE
TRUE is returned if F_TerminateLogServer succeeds, FALSE is returned if it fails. If processing fails, an error code can be acquired by calling F_GetLastError.
-165-
5. OBSERVATION OF FA SYSTEM FOR PC
B-75044EN/02
OBSERVATION OF FA SYSTEM FOR PC

FA SYSTEM for PC reports the status of itself. When an event is occurred and an operator needs to handle it immediately, the message appears in the computer display. When the operator doesnt need to handle the event at once, the message is written in the log file without preventing himor her from working the job. The Log Viewer is the tool for displaying the contents of the log file.
The Log Viewer can be started by double-clicking the [Log Viewer] program in the [FA System for PC] group.
-166-
B-75044EN/02
5.1
5.1.1
LOG VIEWER
About Log Message

The log messages are classified according to the source and the type of messages as follows. (1) Source of Messages K FA LIBRARY Messages related to FA LIBRARY. The information of NC PROGRAM MANAGE-MENT is included here because NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT is programmed by using FA LIBRARY. K DNC1 Messages related to DNC1 communication. K DNC2 Messages related to DNC2 communication. K Reader/Puncher Messages related to Reader/Puncher. K DNC/Ethernet Messages related to DNC1/Ethernet communication. K Communication process Messages related to the communication management. K Database server Messages related to the database of FA SYSTEM for PC. (2) Type of Message K Transmission Message Messages related to the download/upload of NC programs. K Error Message Errors of FA SYSTEM for PC. K Internal Message The internal status of FA SYSTEM for PC. -167-
B-75044EN/02
Therefore, there are the ten log files. (File names are put in parentheses.) K Transmission log K Error log of FA LIBRARY K Internal log of FA LIBRARY K Error log of DNC1 K Internal log of DNC1 K Error log of DNC2 K Internal log of DNC2 K Error log of Reader/Puncher K Internal log of Reader/Puncher (TransLog) (FComLibErrLog) (FComLibDetailLog) (DNC1ErrLog) (DNC1DetailLog) (DNC2ErrLog) (DNC2DetailLog) (RPErrLog) (RPDetailLog) (D1EErrLog) (D1EDetailLog)
K Error log of DNC1/Ethernet communication K Internal log of DNC1/Ethernet communication K Error log of communication process K Internal log of communication process
(MNGErrLog) (MNGDetailLog)
The latest 2000 messages are saved in each log file. These files are placed in the LOG sub-directory under the directory which FA SYSTEM for PC is installed in.
-168-
B-75044EN/02
5.1.2
The Contents of Transmission Log File

The following shows the display of the transmission log.
K START The time when the transfer of NC program is started. K END The time when the transfer of NC program is finished. K FUNCTION Indicates the type of the transfer. K Machine Indicates the machine which an NC program is transferred to. K RESULT Indicates the result. If the transfer is succeeded, a OK is displayed. If it is failed, the error code of FA SYSTEM for PC is displayed. As for error codes , refer to C. Error Code. K COMMENTS Indicates the comment such as the file name of the transferred NC program.
-169-
B-75044EN/02
5.1.3
The Contents of Log File

All log files are shown as the same display format by using the Log Viewer screen. The following example shows the display of the DNC2ErrLog file.
K NO The machine number which the event is occurred in. K LEVEL 00 indicates an error. Other values indicate the normal processing status. The larger the value is, the more the information is described in detail. K DATE The date when the event was occurred. K COMMENTS Indicates the comments of the event. In case of error, the head of message is; ERROR: (XXXXXXXXh/YYYY) Where, XXXXXXXX indicates an eight character hexadecimal number, and means the error code of FA SYSTEM for PC. For more information of error codes, refer to C. Error Code. YYYY indicates a four character decimal number, and means the error code of Windows API(Application Programming Interface) function which is the cause of the failure of FA SYSTEM for PC.
-170-
B-75044EN/02
5.1.4
About Log Viewer

By giving the example of the transmission log, this section describes how to use Log Viewer. Menu Bar Tool Bar Title Bar
Form
Status Bar
Title Bar
The title of log file is displayed in Title Bar. When the search function is used, the search condition appears at the same time. The title bar in case that the machine number 7 is searched
Menu Bar
Menu Bar contains File, Display, Option, and Help menus.
Tool Bar
By using the list box, you can select the log file you want to display. And by clicking the buttons, you can execute such commands as the print, update, monitor, and search.
Form
The contents of the log file are displayed. The latest 2000 messages can be saved in the log files. And the Log Viewer can display messages as many as you set the value to [View Record Number] command of the [Option] menu. The default value is 200.
-171-
5. OBSERVATION OF FA SYSTEM FOR PC Status Bar
B-75044EN/02
Status Bar usually displays the latest updated time and the number of displayed messages. While the Log Viewer is updating the display, the progress bar is displayed. The latest updated time and monitoring message is displayed while the monitor. The ordinary displayed status bar
The status bar while the Log Viewer is updated.
The status bar on monitoring
5.1.5
Using Log Viewer
Opening the log file

1 2 3 Click the [Open] command in the [File] menu. The [Open] dialog box will appear. Select the log file you want to see from the list. The contents of the selected file is displayed. When you want to see other files, repeat the above step 1. You can execute more than one the Log Viewer screen at the same time. You can open the log file by using the list box instead.
Copying the Log

1 2 Click the [Copy] command of the [File] menu. The [Copy] dialog box will appear. Select the directory, and enter the file name. Click the <OK> button. The contents of the log file are saved in your named file.
-172-
B-75044EN/02
Cleaning up the Log File

Click the [Clear] command of the menu. The contents of the log file are cleaned up.
NOTE The cleared contents cannot be undone.
Printing the Log Messages

The way that the messages are selected by using a record number 1 Click the [Print] command of the [File] menu. The [Print] dialog box will appear. Or click the [Print] button, the [Print] dialog box will appear.
2 3
Enter the beginning and ending records you want to print. Click the <OK> button. The selected messages are printed.
The way that the messages are selected by using a mouse 1 2 By using a mouse, drag the messages you want to print. Click the [Print] command of the [File] menu. The [Print] dialog will appear. Click the [Print] button instead, the [Print] dialog box will appear. The beginning and ending records have been entered automatically in the [Print] dialog box. 3 Click the <OK> button. The dragged messages are printed.
-173-
5. OBSERVATION OF FA SYSTEM FOR PC Selecting a Font

1 2 3 4
B-75044EN/02
Click the [Print] command in the [File] menu. The [Print] dialog will appear. Click the <Font setting> button. The [Font setting] dialog will appear. Select the font you want to use. Please select a small font size if possible. Click the <OK> button. The selected font is registered.
Setting a Printer
1 2 3 Click the [Printer setting] command of the [File] menu. The [Printer setting] dialog will appear. Set up printer settings if you want. Please select a broad size paper if possible. Click the <OK> button. The printer settings are registered.
NOTE If the printer can not support the registered parameter, it is ignored.
Changing the view of Tool Bar

1 Click the [Tool bar] command of the [Display] menu. The view of the tool bar is changed. When a check mark is set, the tool bar is displayed. When a check mark is cleared, the tool bar is not displayed.
Changing the view of Status Bar

1 Click the [Status bar] command of the [Display] menu. The view of the status bar is changed. When a check mark is set, the status bar is displayed. When a check mark is cleared, the status bar is not displayed.
Monitoring the Log Viewer

1 Click the [Monitor] command of the [Display] menu. The monitor state of the Log Viewer is changed. When a check mark is set, the Log Viewer updates the log information periodically. When a check mark is cleared, the monitoring is not executed. Click the [Monitor] button instead. The monitoring state is changed.
-174-
B-75044EN/02

NOTE 1 When the monitor is executed, you can not use the function except for the [End], [ Stop the monitor], and [Change the monitor interval] command. The horizontal scroll bar can be used in monitoring, but the vertical scroll bar can not be used. 2 If the monitor interval is too short, a computer may be overloaded. Please set up intervals of over ten seconds.
Searching the Log Message

The way that the message is searched by using the menu 1 Click the [Search] command of the [Display] menu. The sub menu will appear. Sub Menu
Click the item you want to search from the sub menu. The [Search] dialog box will appear.
In case that the machine number is selected
Enter the item you want to search, and click the <OK> button. The selected log information is displayed.
The way that the message is searched by using the button You can search the log information by using the button instead.
-175-

NOTE
B-75044EN/02
The search command can search the log information displayed in the Log Viewer. Note that all contents of the log file are not searched.
Updating the Log Message

The way that the message is updated by using the menu 1 Click the [Renewal Log] command of the [Display] menu. The newest information is displayed. The way that the message is updated by using the button Click the [Renewal Log] button instead. The contents of the Log Viewer are updated automatically.
Setting the Monitor Interval

1 2 Click the [Monitor Interval] command of the [Option] menu. The [Monitor interval] dialog box will appear. Enter the interval, and click the <OK> button. The interval value is registered. The value ranges from one second to 120 seconds.
NOTE 1 2 If the monitor interval is too short, a computer may be overloaded. Please set up the interval of over ten seconds. The interval can be set for each Log Viewer.
Setting the Number of Messages

1 2 Click the [View Record Number] command in the [Option] menu. The [View Record Number] dialog box will appear. Enter the number of messages, and click the <OK> button. The value is registered. The value ranges from one message to 2000 messages.
NOTE 1 2 If the number of messages is too many, a computer may be overloaded. Please set up a number under 200 messages. The value can be set for each Log Viewer.
-176-
B-75044EN/02
5.2
LogServer
The LogServer receives the various log writing requests on the FA SYSTEM for PC and creates a log file.
5.2.1
Setting log creation ON/OFF

LogServer allows you to set whether or not to create log files for each log. If you execute FA LIBRARY functions in short cycles, the load placed on the PC is increased as detailed logs for the FA LIBRARY and communication process are frequently created. If this happens, you can reduce the load placed on the system by not creating detailed logs, and creating only error logs.
NOTE If you set LogServer so that a detailed log is not created, you may not be able to parse the details of operation that was being carried out when the error occurred. Check operation thoroughly before you disable the creation of detailed logs.
If you disable the creation of detailed logs, the settings will be reflected immediately without the need to restart FA SYSTEM for PC. The settings are saved, so the settings are valid even when FA SYSTEM for PC is started next. The procedure for setting log creation ON/OFF by Log Server is as follows: 1 2 3 The LogServer that was started as an icon is displayed as a window. Expand the tree view to display the log name. A log having a log name prefixed by (*) will be created. Each click turns the display of the * ON and OFF, and switches creation of the log ON and OFF. When you have finished setting log creation, return the LogServer to its original icon.
-177-
B-75044EN/02
The following example disables creation of the following detailed logs to read data at a short cycle using DNCI/Ethernet: Communication manager (MngDetailLog) FA LIBRARY (FComlibDetailLog) DNC1/Ethernet (D1EDetailLog) For details on the log displayed on the left, see 5.1.1 Log information.
-178-
B-75044EN/02
6. LIST FILE MANAGEMENT
LIST FILE MANAGEMENT

NOTE Transfer by List File can be used only when the Reader/Puncher interface protocol is in use.
Two or more NC programs can be registered to a List File and transferred. (For details on the List File transfer function, refer to 1.6 List File Transfer Function.) Two screens are provided for managing List Files: 1 2 Edit List File screen Screen for creating and editing List Files List File Monitor screen Screen for monitoring transfers made using List Files. The chapter describes how to operate from these screens.
-179-
B-75044EN/02
6.1
EDIT LIST FILE SCREEN OPERATIONS

The Edit List File screen is where you create and edit List Files. To display the Edit List File screen, start [Edit List Files] in the [FANUC FA System for PC] group dialog box.
You can also start [Edit List Files] from the NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT screen.
6.1.1
Structure of Edit List File Screen

The figure below shows the Edit List File screen and details when LIST001.LST List File for machine number 1 is being edited.
-180-
B-75044EN/02

Directory
Menu bar
O number used for extended transfer
Directory name List File name
Registration file directory selection combo box
Contents of List File List Box
Registration file name List Box
Number of records
Buttons for changing order/deleting contents of List File
File type to be displayed Buttons for adding/inserting from in registration file name registration file to List list box File
Directory
Displays the machine name to which the List File currently being edited belongs. The machine name is displayed in the following format: <3-digit machine number>.<machine name>
Directory Name
Displays the directory in which the List File currently being edited is saved.
List File Name

Displays the name of the List File currently being edited.
-181-
6. LIST FILE MANAGEMENT Registration File Directory Selection Combo Box
B-75044EN/02
This combo box is for selecting the directory to be displayed in the [Register File Name] list box. When you select Same directory as List File, a list of files in the directory currently displayed at [Directory Name] is displayed in the [Register File Name] list box. When you select Different directory from List File, a dialog box for selecting the drive and directory appears.
File Type To Be Displayed in Registration File Name List Box

Selects the type of file to be displayed in the [Register File Name] list box.
Registration File Name List Box

Displays the file name to be registered to the List File.
Button for Adding/Inserting from Registration File to List File

The <Add> button is enabled when the file currently displayed in the [Register File Name] list box is selected. When you press the <Add> button, the file selected in the [Register File Name] list box is appended to the end of the [List File Details] list box. The <Insert> button is enabled when the file currently displayed in the [Register File Name] list box is selected, and the record to insert is selected in the [List File Details] list box. When you press the <Insert> button, the file selected in the [Register File Name] list box is inserted in front of the record currently selected in the [Register File Name] list box.
List File Details List Box

Displays the details of the List Files currently being edited in the order in which they are to be transferred. [Instruct Transfer] displays the instruction details as such as [Pause] and [Skip]. The names of registered NC program files are displayed in their full path at [File Name].
Buttons for Changing Order/Deleting Contents of List File

These buttons are for changing the order of List Files and deleting List Files. Each of these buttons are enabled by selecting a line in the [List File Details] list box. The <Top> button moves the selected record to the top. The <Up> button moves the selected record up one record. The <Down> button moves the selected record down one record. The <End> button moves the selected record to the end of the records. The <Delete> button deletes the selected record. The <Delete All> button deletes all records. -182-
B-75044EN/02
O Number Used for Extended Transfer

In the extended transfer mode, the O number in the registered NC programs is not transferred. If you check the [Specify O Number at Extended Transfer] check box, the [O Number] text box is enabled, and the O number entered here can be transferred. Enter a 4-digit number. If you uncheck the [Specify O Number at Extended Transfer] check box, the O number of the first file registered to the List File is transferred. This setting is ignored in the separate transfer mode.
Number of Records
Displays the currently registered number of records.
6.1.2
Editing List Files

Creating New List Files To create a new List File, click the [New] command in the [File] menu. The [New] dialog box appears.
Select the directory for saving the List File from the [Directory] combo box. If you select a machine name in the [Directory] combo box, the default directory of the machine selected in the [Directory Name] text box is displayed. If you select <Any Directory> in the [Directory] combo box, select the directory by the button to the right of the [Directory Name] text box.
NOTE Select the machine name at [Directory], and display the default directory of the machine to communicate with at [Directory Name]. If you select <Any Directory> at [Directory], specify a directory other than the default directory at the [Directory Name] button and create a List File, you will no longer be able to call the List File from the NC.
-183-

2
B-75044EN/02
Enter the name of the new List File in the [List File] text box, and press the <Start> button. The file name does not need a file extension. The List File extension set in the Machine Setup screen is added to the file name according to the machine selected in the [Directory] combo box. To edit an existing file, enter the file name in the [List File] text box, and press the <Start> button. When you specify an existing file, a confirmation dialog box for checking if it is OK to delete the file and create a new file appears.
Opening Existing List Files

To edit an existing List File, click the [Open] command in the [File] menu. The [Open] dialog box appears.
Select the directory containing the List File in the [File Directory] combo box. The directory name is displayed in the [Directory Name] text box.
When you select the List File name from the list box, the List File name selected in the [List File Name] text box is displayed. You can also enter the List File name to edit directly in the [List File Name] text box.
Press the <Open> button.
-184-
B-75044EN/02
Registering NC Programs to Transfer to List Files

Use the <Add> or <Insert> buttons. 1 2 Select the file to register in the [Register File Name] list box. The <Add> button is enabled when you select the file currently displayed in the [Register File Name] list box. When you press the <Add> button, the file selected in the [Register File Name] list box is appended to the end of the [List File Details] list box. Instead of the <Add> button, you can also add files by double-clicking the file to register in the [Register File Name] list box. 3 The <Insert> button is enabled when the file currently displayed in the [Register File Name] list box is selected, and the record to insert is selected in the [List File Details] list box. When you press the <Insert> button, the file selected in the [Register File Name] list box is inserted in front of the record currently selected in the [Register File Name] list box.
Changing the Transfer Order of List Files

Use the <Top>, <Up>, <Down> and <End> buttons. 1 2 Select the record whose transfer order you want to change in the [List File Details] list box. The <Top> button moves the selected record to the top. The <Up> button moves the selected record up one record. The <Down> button moves the selected record down one record. The <End> button moves the selected record to the end of the records. In addition to using the above buttons, you can also change the transfer order by dragging and dropping by the mouse. 1 2 Press the record whose transfer order you want to change in the [List File Details] list box with the left mouse button to select. If you move the mouse with the left mouse button held down, the < mark appears at the beginning of the record you selected, and a blank record prefixed with the > mark is inserted at the record where you want to move the record to. 3 Release the left mouse button. The selected record is moved.
Example: Inserting O0008 between O0005 and O0006.
-185-
6. LIST FILE MANAGEMENT Deleting Records in List Files

Use the <Delete> or <Delete All> buttons. 1 2
B-75044EN/02
Select the record you want to delete in the [List File Details] list box. The <Delete> button deletes the selected records. The <Delete All> button deletes all records.
Setting the Transfer Instructions to Each Record in the List File

Use the [Edit] menu. To set the transfer instruction to a specified record, use the [Skip], [Pause] and [Cancel] commands in the [Edit] - [Instruct Transfer] menu. To set the transfer instruction to all records following a specified record, use the [Skip] and [Cancel] commands in the [Edit] - [Instruct Transfer] - [Specify All Subsequent Records] menu. The meanings of the various commands are as follows: K When you instruct [Skip], that record is not transferred, and transfer of subsequent records is continued. K When you instruct [Pause], transfer of all records following that record is not carried out and transfer is paused. The pause state can be confirmed in the List File Monitor screen. To cancel the pause, specify the [Cancel] command in the List File Monitor screen. Example of List File transfer Monitor screen
Example: Paused
To cancel a [Skip] or [Pause] specification, use the [Cancel] command.
-186-
B-75044EN/02

NOTE The meanings [Cancel] in Edit List File screen and [Cancel] in List File Monitor screen are different. K [Cancel] in Edit List File screen [Skip] and [Pause] are canceled by all transmission using specified List Files. K [Cancel] in List File Monitor screen [Skip] and [Pause] are canceled by only the List File currently being transferred.
Transfer by the [Edit] menu is specified as follows: 1 2 Select the record whose transfer order you want to change in the [List File Details] list box. Set the [Skip], [Pause] or [Cancel] commands in the [Edit] menu.
In addition to transfer by the [Edit] menu, you can also instruct transfer in the context menu of the right mouse button. 1 Bring the mouse cursor to the record whose transfer order you want to change in the [List File Details] list box, and press the right mouse button. 2 The same menu as the [Edit] menu appears.
Registering Files in the Same Directory as List Files Using Only the File Name
Normally, the files to transfer to the List File are registered using their full path. The Option screen allows you to select whether to register only a file name or register the file by its full path. Specify registration by only a file name when you do not want to register a file using its full path to copy a List File to another machine having a different default directory. To set this, click the [Option] command in the [Tool] menu.
-187-
B-75044EN/02
In the List Files registered by only a file name, only the file name is displayed even in the [List File Details] list box.
Overwriting List Files

To save the file currently being edited under the same name, click the [Overwrite] command in the [File] menu.
Saving to List Files Under a New Name

To save the file currently being edited under a new name, click the [Save As] command in the [File] menu. The [Save As] dialog box appears.
1 2 3
Select the directory for saving the List File from the [Directory] combo box. The directory name is displayed in the [Directory Name] text box. Enter the List File name that you want to save to from the [List File Name] text box. Click the <Save> button.
Exiting the Screen

Click the [Exit] Command in the [File] menu.
-188-
B-75044EN/02
6.2
LIST FILE MONITOR SCREEN OPERATIONS

The List File Monitor screen automatically displays the transfer status according to the List File at each monitor cycle.
6.2.1
Structure of List File Monitor Screen

The List File Monitor screen is as follows: Monitor machine number and machine name Menu bar Original List File name
Details of List Files currently being transferred
Monitor Machine Number and Machine Name

Select the machine to monitor in the [Monitor Machine] combo box.
-189-
6. LIST FILE MANAGEMENT Original List File Name
B-75044EN/02
The List File name created in the Edit List File screen is displayed. Nothing is displayed if a List File is not being transferred.
Details of List Files Currently Being Transferred

This screen monitors and displays the status of List Files currently being transferred at each monitor cycle described later. K Transfer instruction Displays the transfer instruction set in the Edit List File screen. K File name Displays the file name set in the Edit List File screen. The displayed order is the transfer order. K Transfer results Displays the current transfer status: Transferred Skipped Paused Transfer of this record has ended. This record has not been transferred, and the next record has been processed. This record has not been transferred, and transfer has been paused. Specify [Cancel] to resume transfer. Nothing is displayed if a List File is not being transferred.
6.2.2
List File Monitor Operations
Changing the Monitor Machine

Select the machine to monitor in the [Monitor Machine] combo box.
Changing the Monitor Cycle

If you execute the [Set Monitor Cycle] in the [Display] menu, the [Monitor Cycle] dialog box appears. Drag the slider to change the monitor cycle, and press the <OK> button. The monitor cycle default is 10 seconds.
Updating to Latest Monitor Information

If you execute the [Set Monitor Cycle] in the [Display] menu, the latest monitor information is displayed regardless of the monitor cycle.
-190-
B-75044EN/02
Pausing Monitor Display

To pause monitor display without exiting the screen, press the <Pause Monitor> button. Each press of this button toggles between <Pause Monitor> and <Start Monitor>. Whether or not monitor is in progress is displayed on the screen's title bar. If monitor is in progress, List File Monitor Monitoring is displayed, and if monitor is stopped, List File Monitor - Monitor Stopped is displayed.
Changing the Transfer Instruction

Change the transfer instruction, for example, to cancel the pause transfer instruction or skip a non-transferred record in order to resume transfer of a paused record. To change the transfer instruction, use the [Skip], [Pause] and [Cancel] commands in the [Edit] - [Instruct Transfer] menu. To set the same instruction to all records following a specified record, use the [Skip] and [Cancel] commands in the [Edit] - [Instruct Transfer] - [Specify All Subsequent Records] menu. The meanings of the various commands are as follows: K When you instruct [Skip], that record is not transferred, and transfer of subsequent records is continued. K When you instruct [Pause], transfer of all records following that record is not carried out and transfer is paused. Transfer by the [Edit] menu is specified as follows: 1 2 Select the record whose transfer order you want to change in the [List File Details] list box. Set the [Skip], [Pause] or [Cancel] commands in the [Edit] menu.
In addition to transfer by the [Edit] menu, you can also instruct transfer in the context menu of the right mouse button. 1 Bring the mouse cursor to the record whose transfer order you want to change in the [List File Details] list box, and press the right mouse button. 2 The same menu as the [Edit] menu appears.
-191-
6. LIST FILE MANAGEMENT Changing the Order, Adding and Deleting NC Programs to be Transferred
B-75044EN/02
For all records following a paused record, you can change the order of NC programs to be transferred, add and register new NC programs or delete NC programs. When you execute the [Edit List] command in the [Edit] menu, the Edit screen appears. Operations in this screen are the same as in the Edit List File screen.
NOTE The Edit screen displays records that were registered after the paused record.
-192-
APPENDIX
B-75044EN/02
APPENDIX
A. SAMPLE OF NC PARAMETER SETTINGS
SAMPLE OF NC PARAMETER SETTINGS

The following tables show the sample NC parameters. When you set these parameters to the NC unit actually, refer to the NC Operators manual. Sample Parameters (DNC1)
Parameter 'Default Value' Series 16/18 0020=10 Series 15 0020=4 0021=4 0022=4 0023=4 Connection type 'Multi-point) Station address (2~17) Baud rate (460.8Kbps) 0133=51 5060=51 0251=51 0142=2~17 5062=2~17 0348=2~17 0141=2 5061=2 0347=2 Series 0 I/O=10
Input/output device number
Whether the ISO code contains a parity bit (With parity bit) Punch code (ISO) TV check (Not checked) MAP Parameter screen (Displayed)
0000.1=1
0000.2=0
ISO=1
0131.3=1
0000.4=0
0051.3=1
TV=0
0000.0=0
TV=0
389.0=1
-195-
APPENDIX
B-75044EN/02
Sample Parameters (DNC2)

Parameters 'Default Value' Input/output device 0020=10 0020=4 0021=4 0022=4 0023=4 RS232C stop bit (2) The ISO code contains a parity bit or not (Without a parity bit) Parity 'EVEN) Whether to check CD in the RS232C 'Not checked' Interface used between the host and NC (RS232C) Whether to check the BCC value 'Checked' Whether to check the ER signal 'Checked' Error code for negative response 'Negative response is indicated by an error code' RS232C baud rate (9600) Timeout value for the no response timer (5) Timeout value for the EOT signal timer (5) Retry for an invalid transmission protocol or no response (5) Retry for NAK (3) Max number of characters that can be received (256) Datagram length (256) MAP parameter screen (Displayed) PMC data 'Data number order type' End of block 'LF) 0100.3=1 4=1 (NOTE) 0000.3=1 0070.7=1 0070.7=1 389.0=1 389.0=1 0149=256 5055=256 0490=256 0490=256 0148=256 5054=256 0370=256 0325=256 0146=3 5053=3 0369=3 0324=3 0145=5 5052=5 0368=5 0323=5 0144=5 5051=5 0366=5 0321=5 0143=5 5050=5 0365=5 0320=5 0140.0=0 0140.2=0 0140.3=1 0133=11 5056.0=0 5056.2=0 5056.3=1 5083=11 0396.0=0 0396.2=0 0396.3=1 0251=11 0396.0=0 0396.2=0 0396.3=1 0251=11 0134.1=1 0134.4=1 0135.3=0 5000.1=0 5000.4=1 5000.0=0 0051.1=1 0051.4=1 0055.3=0 0051.1=1 0051.4=1 0055.3=0 0131.3=1 0000.2=1 0051.3=1 0051.3=1 00131.0=1 5082=2 0051.0=1 0051.0=1 I/O=10 I/O=10 Series 16/18 Series 15 Series 0-MC Series0-TC
NOTE:
When the PMC-NA unit (except for PMC-NA2) is used in Series 15, this parameter must be set. -196-
B-75044EN/02
APPENDIX
Sample Parameters (Reader/Puncher)

Parameters 'Default Value' Input/output device (1) Stop bit (2) ISO code contains a parity bit or not 'With parity bit' Reader/puncher device number Specification No. of reader/puncher (Floppy cassette) Baud rate '9600' TV check 'Checked' Punch code 'ISO' TV check during control out 'checked' End of block 'LF) Feed 'Not punched' O8000~O8999 (Cannot be edited) O9000~O9999 (Cannot be edited) Registering the program 'All programs are registered' Registering the program (When programs are loaded without deleting the previously loaded programs' If program is over-written 'Alarm is indicated' M02/M30/M99 'Not be assumed as program end' 3201.6=1 2200.3=1 0019.6=1 3201.2=0 2200.1=0 0015.6=0 3201.0=0 2200.0=0 0045.0=0 3201.1=0 2200.2=1 0045.1=0 3202.4=1 2201.0=1 0010.4=1 3202.0=1 0011.0=1 0389.2=1 0101.7=1 0002.7=1 0100.3=1 0000.3=1 0070.7=1 0100.1=1 0000.1=0 0018.6=1 0000.1=1 0000.4=0 ISO=1 0000.0=1 0000.0=1 TV=1 0103=11 0102=3 5001=1 5110=8 (or'' 5112=11 0002.2=0 0038.7=1 0038.6=1 0552=11 0101.3=0 0000.2=0 ISO=1 0101.0=1 0020=0 Series 16/18 Series 10/11/12/15 0020=1 0021=1 5111=2 0002.0=1 I/O=0 Series 0
-197-
APPENDIX
B-75044EN/02
Sample parameters When DNC1/Ethernet Is Used As Communication Protocol

Parameters (Default Value) Input/output device number IP address 0020=6 Required only during DNC operation Set the IP address assigned to the NC to be connected. Set this value to NC IP Address2 in the Machine Setup screen. Sub net mask Set the subnet mask assigned to the NC to be connected. No setting is provided for the Machine Setup screen. Router IP address Set the router IP address assigned to the NC to be connected. No setting is provided for the Machine Setup screen. TCP port number Set the TCP port number assigned to the NC to be connected. Set this value to NC TCP Port Number in the Machine Setup screen. UDP port number Set the UDP port number assigned to the NC to be connected. When two or more NCs are to be connected, all values must be set to the same value. Set the same value as the udp port in the FANUC_C4_SERVER service that is entered to the services file on your computer. Time interval (the survival signal is transmitted once every 0.5 seconds) This is the interval for the survival signal that is transmitted from the NC. The interval is set in 10 ms. Set 50. Series 16i/18i
-198-
B-75044EN/02
APPENDIX
B. SAMPLE OPERATION FOR NC
SAMPLE OPERATION FOR NC

The following shows the sample operations of NC. When you operate an NC unit, refer to the NC Operators manual.
-199-
APPENDIX
B-75044EN/02
B.1
DNC1, DNC2
Sample operations for FS16/18

Procedure for Downloading an NC Program (NC Program Number) The NC program to be downloaded is selected by NC Program Number. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Change the NC mode to Edit. Push the <PROG> function key. Push the [OPRT] soft key. Push the [+] soft key. Push the [READ] soft key. Input the O????. Where, the ???? indicates the NC program number you want to read. Push the [EXEC] soft key.
Procedure for Uploading an NC Program (NC Program Number) The uploaded NC program is saved by using NC Program Number. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Change the NC mode to Edit. Push the <PROG> function key. Push the [OPRT] soft key. Push the [+] soft key. Push the [PUNCH] soft key. Input O????. Where, the ???? indicates the NC program number you want to punch. It is also used for saving the uploaded program. Push the [EXEC] soft key.
-200-
B-75044EN/02
APPENDIX
Procedure for DNC Operation (NC Program Number) The NC program is selected by NC Program Number. 1 2 3 4 Change the NC mode to MDI. Push the <SYSTEM> function key. Push the [+] soft key twice. Push the [C-OPER] soft key. The following display will appear.
[COMMUNICATION OPERATION] [DNC FILE SELECTION] -
> MDI **** **** **** ****
5 6 7 8 9
Push the [OPRT] soft key. Push the [STRING] soft key. Input O????.PRG. Where, the ???? indicates the NC program number. Push the [INPUT] soft key. Push the [STRING] soft key.
10 Change the NC mode to Memory. 11 Change the NC mode to RMT by raising the DNCI signal in the PMC unit. 12 When the cycle start signal is raised, the DNC operation is started.
-201-
B. SAMPLE OPERATION FOR NC Sample Operations for FS15
APPENDIX
B-75044EN/02
Procedure for Downloading an NC Program (NC Program Number) The NC program to be downloaded is selected by NC Program Number. 1 2 3 4 5 Change the NC mode to Edit. To select the PROGRAM(MEMORY) display, push the [PROGRAM] soft key. Push the ' soft key twice.
Push the [READ] soft key. Input ,O????. Where, the ???? indicates the NC program number you want to read. A , character can be inputted by pushing both the # key and the shift key.
Push the [EXEC] soft key.
Procedure for Uploading an NC Program (NC Program Number) The uploaded NC program is saved by using NC Program Number. 1 2 3 4 5 Change the NC mode to Edit. To select the PROGRAM(MEMORY) display, push the [PROGRAM] soft key. Push the [ '] soft key twice. Push the [PUNCH] soft key. Input ,O????. Where, the ???? indicates the NC program number you want to punch. It is also used for saving the uploaded program. A , character can be inputted by pushing both the # key and the shift key. 6 Push the [EXEC] soft key.
-202-
B-75044EN/02
APPENDIX
Procedure for DNC Operation (NC Program Number) The NC program is selected by NC Program Number. 1 2 3 4 Change the NC mode to TAPE. Push the [SETTING] soft key. Push the [CHAPTER] soft key twice. Push the [COMMU.OPERAT] soft key. The following display will appear.
COMMUNICATION OPERATION DNC FILE SELECTION O0001 N0001
5 6 7
Input O????.PRG. Where, the ???? indicates the NC program number. Push the [INPUT] soft key. When the cycle start signal is raised, the DNC operation is started.
Sample Operations for FS0

Procedure for Downloading an NC Program (NC Program Number) The NC program to be downloaded is selected by NC Program Number. 1 2 3 4 5 Change the NC mode to Edit. Push the <PRGRM> function key. Push the [I/O]soft key. Input O????. Where, the ???? indicates the NC program number you want to read. Push the [READ] soft key.
-203-
APPENDIX
B-75044EN/02
Procedure for Uploading an NC Program (NC Program Number) The uploaded NC program is saved by using NC Program Number. 1 2 3 4 5 Change the NC mode to Edit. Push the <PRGRM> function key. Push the [I/O] soft key. Input O????. Where, the ???? indicates the NC program number you want to punch. It is also used for saving the uploaded program. Push the [PUNCH] soft key.
Procedure for DNC Operation (NC Program Number) The NC program is selected by NC Program Number. 1 2 3 Change the NC mode to MDI. Push the <DGNOS PARAM> function key. Push the [MAP] soft key. The following display will appear.
[MAP PARAMETER] (SETTING) DNC FILE SELECTION O0001 N0001
NUM. ( )( )(
MDI )(
)(
4 5 6 7 8 9
Push the [STRING] soft key. Input O????.PRG. Where, the ???? indicates the NC program number. Push the <INPUT> function key. Change the NC mode to AUTO. Raise the DNCI signal in the PMC unit. When the cycle start signal is raised, the DNC operation is started.
To execute the DNC operation, raise the bit 0 of the NC parameter address 389. The MAP PARAMETER display becomes active, and the SERVO SETTING display becomes inactive.
-204-
B-75044EN/02
APPENDIX
B.2
READER/PUNCHER
Sample Operation for FS16/18

Procedure for Downloading an NC Program (File Number) The NC program to be downloaded is selected by File Number. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Change the NC mode to Edit. Push the <PROG> function key. Push the [READ] soft key. Input ??. Where, the ?? indicates the file number you want to read. Push the [F-SET] soft key. Push the [EXEC] soft key.
Procedure for Uploading an NC Program (File Name) The uploaded NC program is saved by using File Name. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Change the NC mode to Edit. Push the <PROG> function key. Push the [PUNCH] soft key. Input ????. Where, the ???? indicates the file name you want to punch. Push the [O-SET] soft key. Push the [EXEC] soft key.
-205-
APPENDIX
B-75044EN/02
Procedure for Uploading an NC Program (NC Program Number) The uploaded NC program is saved by using NC Program Number. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Change the NC mode to Edit. Push the <PROG> function key. Push the [PUNCH] soft key. Input ????. Where, the ???? indicates the file name. Push the [O-SET] soft key. Input ??. Where, the ?? indicates the file number. Push the [F-SET] soft key. Push the [EXEC] soft key.
The system cant name the uploaded NC program by using the file number which is inputted in the above step 6. But the system finds the NC program number from the contents of the uploaded NC program and uses it as a file name.
Procedure for displaying the List 1 2 3 4 5 Change the NC mode to Edit. Push the <PROG> function key. Push the [FLOPPY] soft key. Push the [OPRT] soft key. Push the <PAGE > and <PAGE > key. The pages are turned .
Procedure for Deleting an NC Program 1 2 3 4 5 6 Change the NC mode to Edit. Push the <PROG> function key. Push the [F-DEL] soft key. Input ??. Where, the ?? indicates the file number you want to delete. Push the [F-SET] soft key. Push the [EXEC] soft key.
-206-
B-75044EN/02
APPENDIX
Procedure for DNC Operation (File Number)
The NC program is selected by File Number. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Change the NC mode to RMT. Push the <PROG> function key. Push the [FL.SDL] soft key. Push the [OPRT] soft key. Push the [SELECT] soft key. Input ??. Where, the ?? indicates the file number. Push the [F-SET] soft key. Push the [EXEC] soft key. When the cycle start signal is raised, the DNC operation is started.
Sample Operations for FS10/11/12/15

Procedure for Downloading an NC Program (File Number) The NC program to be downloaded is selected by File Number. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Change the NC mode to Edit. To select the PROGRAM(MEMORY) display, push the [PROGRAM] soft key. Push the [READ] soft key. Push the [FILE#] soft key. Input ??. Where, the ?? indicates the file number you want to read. Push the [ALL] soft key.
Procedure for Downloading an NC Program (File Name) The NC program to be downloaded is selected by File Name. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Change the NC mode to Edit. To select the PROGRAM(MEMORY) display, push the [PROGRAM] soft key. Push the [READ] soft key. Push the [FILE NAME] soft key. Input ABC. Where, the ABC indicates the file name you want to read. Push the [ALL] soft key.
-207-
APPENDIX
B-75044EN/02
Procedure for Uploading an NC Program (File Name) The uploaded NC program is saved by using File Name. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Change the NC mode to Edit. To select the PROGRAM(MEMORY) display, push the [PROGRAM] soft key. Push the [PUNCH] soft key. Push the [PROGRAM#] soft key. Input ????. Where, the ???? indicates the file name you want to punch. Push the [EXEC] soft key.
Procedure for Uploading an NC Program (NC Program Number) The uploaded NC program is saved by using NC Program Number. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Change the NC mode to Edit. To select the PROGRAM(MEMORY) display, push the [PROGRAM] soft key. Push the [PUNCH] soft key. Push the [FILE#] soft key. Input ??. Push the [THIS PROGRAM] soft key.
The system cant name the uploaded NC program by using the file number which is inputted in the above step 6. but the system finds the NC program number from the contents of the uploaded NC program and uses it as a file name.
Procedure for displaying the List 1 2 3 4 Change the NC mode to Edit. Push the [PROG] soft key. Push the [DRCTRY FLOPPY] soft key. Push the <PAGE > and <PAGE > key. The pages are turned.
-208-
B-75044EN/02
APPENDIX
Procedure for Deleting an NC Program 1 2 4 5 6 7
Change the NC mode to Edit. Push the [PROG] soft key. Push the [DELETE] soft key. Push the [FILE#] soft key. Input ??. Where, the ?? indicates the NC program number you want to delete. Push the [EXEC] soft key.
Procedure for DNC Operation (File Number) The NC program is selected by File Number. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Change the NC mode to Tape. Push the [PROG] soft key. Push the [SEARCH] soft key. Push the [FILE#] soft key. Input ??. Where, the ?? indicates the file number. Push the [EXEC] soft key. When the cycle start signal is raised, the DNC operation is started.
-209-
B. SAMPLE OPERATION FOR NC Sample Operation for FS0-C
APPENDIX
B-75044EN/02
Procedure for Downloading an NC Program (File Number) The NC program to be downloaded is selected by File Number. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Change the NC mode to Edit. Push the <PRGRM> function key. Push the [READ]soft key. Input ??. Where, the ?? indicates the file number you want to read. Push the <INPUT> function key. Push the [EXEC] soft key.
Procedure for Uploading an NC Program (File Name) The uploaded NC program is saved by using File Name. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Change the NC mode to Edit. Push the <PRGRM> function key. Push the [PUNCH]soft key. Input ????. Where, the ???? indicates the file name you want to punch. Push the <INPUT> function key. Push the [EXEC] soft key.
Procedure for Uploading an NC Program (NC Program Number) The uploaded NC program is saved by using NC Program Number. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Change the NC mode to Edit. Push the <PRGRM> function key. Push the [PUNCH]soft key. Input ????. Push the <INPUT> function key. Input ??. Push the <INPUT> function key. Push the [EXEC] soft key.
The system cant name the uploaded NC program by using the file number which is inputted in the above step 6. but the system finds the NC program number from the contents of the uploaded NC program and uses it as a file name. -210-
B-75044EN/02
APPENDIX
Procedure for displaying the List 1 2 3 4
Change the NC mode to Edit. Push the <PRGRM> function key. Push the [FLOPPY] soft key. Push the <PAGE > and <PAGE > key. The pages are turned.
Procedure for Deleting an NC Program 1 2 3 4 5 6 Change the NC mode to Edit. Push the <PRGRM> function key. Push the [DELETE] soft key. Input ??. Where, the ?? indicates the file number you want to delete. Push the <INPUT> function key. Push the [EXEC] soft key.
Procedure for DNC Operation (File Number) The NC program is selected by File Number. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Change the NC mode to AUTO. Enter the DNC1 signal from the PMC, and set to the RMT mode. Push the <PRGRM> function key. Push the [FL.SDL] soft key. Push the [SELECT] soft key. Input ??. Where, the ?? indicates the file number. Push the <INPUT> function key. Push the [EXEC] soft key. When the cycle start signal is raised, the DNC operation is started.
-211-
B. SAMPLE OPERATION FOR NC Sample Operation for FS0-A/0-B
APPENDIX
B-75044EN/02
Procedure for Downloading an NC Program (File Number) The downloading NC program is selected by File Number. 1 2 3 4 Change the NC mode to Edit. Push the <PRGRM> function key. Input N??. Where, the ?? indicates the file number you want to read. Push the <INPUT> function key twice.
Procedure for Uploading an NC Program (File Name) The uploaded NC program is saved by using File Name. 1 2 3 4 Change the NC mode to Edit. Push the <PRGRM> function key. Input O????. Where, the O???? indicates the file name you want to punch. Push the <START> function key.
Procedure for Deleting an NC Program 1 2 3 4 Change the NC mode to Edit. Push the <PRGRM> function key. Input N??. Where, the ?? indicates the file number you want to delete. Push the <START> function key.
Procedure for DNC Operation (File Number) The NC program is selected by File Number. 1 2 3 4 5 Change the NC mode to AUTO. Push the <PRGRM> function key. Input N??. Where, the ?? indicates the file number. Push the <INPUT> function key. When the cycle start signal is raised, the DNC operation is started.
-212-
B-75044EN/02
APPENDIX
B.3
DNC1/ETHERNET
NOTE 1 2 NC start cannot be downloaded, uploaded or deleted on DNC1/Ethernet. (These scheduled to be supported in the future.) When DNC operation is carried out on DNC1/Ethernet, download from your computer after executing a cycle start on the NC.
FS16i/18i Operation Example

DNC Operation Procedure of NC Program (NC program number) Determine the NC program to be run taking the NC program number as the key. 1 2 3 4 Set the NC to the MEM mode. Set the DNC1 signal on the PMC, and set to the RMT mode. Start the NC by a cycle start. The NC displays RMT-START. Download the NC program for DNC operation from your computer.
-213-
C. ERROR CODE
APPENDIX
B-75044EN/02
ERROR CODE
The following error codes are returned by the F_GetLastError function of FA LIBRARY.
Error Codes about General of Communication Process (0x00010000 ~ 0x0001ffff)

0x00010000 The system cannot terminate the communication process because more than one machine is communicating with the computer. Try again after all the machine communications are stopped. 0x00010001 The system cannot open the communication for the specified machine because it is already communicating with the computer. The communication of a machine cannot be opened twice. 0x00010002 The system is initializing the DNC1 internal process. Try again after a short time. 0x00010003 The communication is not opened for the specified machine yet. Check that the machine was opened correctly. 0x00010006 The communication is not opened for the specified machine yet. It is possible that the system is not set up correctly.
Error Codes about DNC1 of Communication Process (0x00020000 ~ 0x0002ffff)

0x00020102 The specified machine number is illegal. Check the machine number is set to the Machine Configuration screen. 0x00020106 During the execution of the function, the system received the request to stop the DNC1 communication process. The function is canceled. 0x00020107 The system is replying the other request for the specified machine. Try again after a short time. 0x0002010c NC program number is illegal. The range must be from 1 to 9999. -214-
B-75044EN/02
APPENDIX
C. ERROR CODE
Error Codes about DNC2 of Communication Process (0x00030000 ~ 0x0003ffff)

0x00030103 The system cannot read the initial data stored in the registry of the computer. It is possible that the system is not set up correctly. 0x00030201 The system cannot open the serial port. Check that the specified machine is associated with the port correctly. 0x00030301 The negative response (reset error etc.) was sent from the NC side. Check that the NC operation is not canceled by the reset, and an error is not occurred in the NC side. 0x00030302 The ER line of RS232C was not raised. Check that the NC unit is not turned off, and the RS232C cable is not damaged. 0x00030409 During the communication, the system didnt receive any reply from the NC for a certain period of time. Check that the NC doesnt hang up. 0x00030411 The system received a negative response ( the reset error etc.) from the NC. Check that the NC operation is not canceled by the reset, and an error is not occurred in the NC side. 0x00030412 The ER line of RS232C was dropped. Check that the NC is not turned off, and the RS232C cable is not damaged. 0x00030413 The retry over of DNC2 was occurred. If the system can not communicate with the NC from the first, check the DNC2 parameters in both of the system and the NC. If the error is occurred during the communication, check that the NC unit is running without an alarm. 0x00030501 The internal error was occurred in the system. Check that the socket interface of WindowsNT is effective. It is possible that the system is not set up correctly. 0x00030502 The internal error was occurred in the system. Check that the socket interface of WindowsNT is effective. 0x00030503 The internal error was occurred in the system. Check that the communication process is running.
-215-
C. ERROR CODE
0x00030601
APPENDIX
B-75044EN/02
During the execution of a DNC2 command, the error was occurred. Though the error is occurred in the NC side, the NC parameter Error code for negative response is inactive. Set up the Error code for negative response parameter in the NC side.
0x00030602
The negative response of T_NP was sent from the NC side. Though the error is occurred in the NC side, the NC parameter Error code for negative response is inactive. Set up the Error code for negative response parameter in the NC side. Where, T_NP and the following T_BD, M_NR, N_NP, N_IL indicate the error types of DNC2 negative responses. For more information, refer to Volume II Protocol in FANUC DNC2 DESCRIPTIONS (B61992E).
0x00030603
The negative response of T_BD was sent from the NC side. Though the error is occurred in the NC side, the NC parameter Error code for negative response is inactive. Set up the Error code for negative response parameter in the NC side.
0x00030604
The negative response of T_MR was sent from the NC side. Though the error is occurred in the NC side, the NC parameter Error code for negative response is inactive. Set up the Error code for negative response parameter in the NC side.
0x00030605
The negative response of N_NP was sent from the NC side. Though the error is occurred in the NC side, the NC parameter Error code for negative response is inactive. Set up the Error code for negative response parameter in the NC side.
0x00030606
The negative response of N_IL was sent from the NC side. Though the error is occurred in the NC side, the NC parameter Error code for negative response is inactive. Set up Error code for negative response in the NC side.
0x00030607
The NC program number is not specified, or the number is beyond the range. Check that the NC program number is specified correctly.
0x00030609
The other DNC2 command is executing. Try again after finishing it.
0x00030f02
The value except 0 is specified in the tool post number. In case of DNC2, the value of 0 must be specified in the tool post number.
-216-
B-75044EN/02
APPENDIX
0x00030f03
C. ERROR CODE
The application program attempts to press the unsupported request to the system. Check the argument of the function.
0x00030f04
The invalid argument is specified in the function which requests the system to read the NC data. Check the argument of the function.
0x00030f05
The invalid argument is specified in the function which requests the system to write the NC data. Check the argument of the function.
0x00030f06
The value of 0 is specified in the count argument of the function which requests the system to read the NC data. The count value must be greater than or equal to 1.
0x00030f09
The combination of arguments about the tool offset function is illegal. The value of the arguments must adjust to either of the milling or the turning type.
0x00030f0c
The specified PMC address is illegal. Check the PMC address and the PMC number argument.
0x00030f0d
When the application program reads data from NC, the specified number of data is too large. Check the range of data supported by the NC.
Error Codes about Reader/Puncher of Communication Process (0x00040000 ~ 0x0004ffff)

0x0004100a Though the NC requests the system to delete the file, the system cant delete the file. Check that the specified file is existed, and it has the attribute of a deletion. 0x0004100f During the communication with the NC, the system received a bad character. Allowable characters are: blank space, ., -,lower-case and upper case alphabetics and numerics. It is possible that the received character codes are broken in the cause of wrong settings. Check the RS-232-C parameters . Check that the NC unit supports the Reader/Puncher protocol.
-217-
C. ERROR CODE
0x00041010
APPENDIX
B-75044EN/02
The system received the invalid command which is composed of 32 or more characters from the NC. Check that the NC supports the Reader/Puncher protocol.
0x00041018
While receiving the NC program, the system got a DC4 code before a ER code. It is possible that the NC is reset. If not, check the contents of the NC program in the NC memory.
0x0004101c
The error of TV check was occurred in the computer. Check that the TV check parameter of the NC is active.
0x00041021
The file to be downloaded is not found. Check that the specified file exists in the computer.
0x00041024
The system cannot distinguish an ISO code from an EIA code of the uploaded NC program. The system read a 100 characters from the top of the file, and automatically distinguished ISO/EIA codes by searching for the LF character from among these 1000 characters. However, the LF code was not found. (0x0a: ISO, 0x80: EIA) Check the contents of the NC program in the NC side.
0x00041025
There is not an NC program number in the contents of the uploaded NC program. The NC program number must be included in the contents of an NC program. Check the contents of the NC program in the NC side.
0x00041026
There are not the numerical characters continued from the O or : character (which indicates an NC program number) in the contents of the uploaded NC program. Check the contents of the NC program in the NC side.
0x00041028
While the system distinguishes an ISO code from an EIA code of the uploaded program, the illegal character was found. Check the contents of the NC program in the NC side.
0x0004102c
While downloading or uploading an NC program, the illegal character was found. Check the contents of the NC program in the NC side.
-218-
B-75044EN/02
APPENDIX
C. ERROR CODE
Communication Process Errors Relating to FA SYSTEM for PC DNC1/Ethernet (0x00060000 ~ 0x0006ffff)

0x00060102 The specified machine number is illegal. Check the machine number currently registered to the Machine Setup screen. 0x00060103 An invalid service was requested. The F_Start, F_Reset and F_ReadTooLife functions cannot be executed by DNC1/Ethernet. 0x00060106 Processing was aborted as the DNC1/Ethernet communication process termination request was received during processing of the request. 0xxx60107 Another process is currently being executed on the NC having the specified machine number. Wait a while before retrying. 0x0006010c The range of the NC program number specified by the download and upload request is illegal. Make sure that the NC program number is within the range 1 to 9999. 0x0006011b 0 (zero) was specified for arguments (offset type, and number of reads and writes) that require a value 1 or higher. Specify a value higher than 1. 0x0006011c An illegal value was specified to the offset type during reading and writing of tool offsets. Make sure that the correct NC name is set to <Machine Type> on the [Machine Information] tab in the Machine Setup menu, and check <Tool Offset Type> on the [Communication Tab]. 0x0006011e An illegal value was specified to the address type during reading and writing of tool offsets. Make sure that the correct NC name is set to <Machine Type> on the [Machine Information] tab in the Machine Setup menu, and check <PMC Address Specification Form> on the [Communication Tab]. 0x0006011f A value larger than 32 was specified as the number of reads and writes during reading and writing of PMC data. Set a number up to 32.
-219-
C. ERROR CODE
0x00060121
APPENDIX
An error occurred during reading and writing of NC parameters.
B-75044EN/02
Make sure that the correct NC name is set to <Machine Type> on the [Machine Information] tab in the Machine Setup menu, and check <Bit Type Data Type> on the [Communication Tab]. 0x00060123 Cannot connect to the NC by Ethernet. Check the DNC1/Ethernet setting in 2.6.3 Setups Relating to Machine Communication and the Ethernet cable connection. 0x00060125 An M198 call was received during DNC operation. M198 calls are not accepted. Make sure that the program name is not specified in Select DNC File in the NC's Communication OP screen. 0x00060126 An non-existent axis was specified during reading or writing of NC parameters. Check the maximum number of axes usable on the NC and the details of the axis specification. 0x00060128 Cannot connect to the C4 server. Check the DNC1/Ethernet setting in 2.6.3 Setups Relating to Machine Communication and the Ethernet cable connection. 0x0006012a The survival signal from the NC is interrupted. Probable causes are that the NC was turned OFF, or that the Ethernet cable is not connected. So, processing cannot be executed. Check the NC power supply and Ethernet cable. 0x0006012c 0x0006012d Download or upload started by the host was canceled by the cancel function. Though canceling of download or upload started by the host was requested by the host, the requested service is not currently being executed. Check the machine number to be canceled and the cancel details. 0x0006012e The NC program that is requested for downloading and DNC program does not contain an O number. Check the contents of the NC program. 0x0006012f The parameter number specified during reading and writing of parameters does not exist. Check the parameter number. 0x000604f0 The NC was turned OFF during Ethernet communications. Or, the Ethernet cable was cut. Check the NC power supply and Ethernet cable. -220-
B-75044EN/02
APPENDIX
0x000604fe (1)
C. ERROR CODE
A reset or emergency stop was executed on the NC during DNC operation by start up from the computer. Check the NC status and execute DNC operation again.
0x000604fe (2)
A non-executable program was executed by DNC operation. Check the program details.
0x000604ff (1) 0x000604ff (2) 0x000604ff (3) 0x00060503 (1)
Programs cannot be deleted in the MDI mode. Set to any mode other than the MDI mode. The currently selected program cannot be deleted in a mode other than the EDT mode. A currently executing program cannot be selected. 0 was specified as the offset number during reading and writing of the tool offset number. Or, a non-existent offset number on the NC was specified. Check the offset number.
0x00060503 (2)
A local variable or system variable, or non-existent macro number was specified during writing to the custom macro variable. Writing to local variables or system variables is not possible. Check the macro number.
0x00060503 (3)
A non-existent PMC data number was specified during reading and writing of PMC data. Check the PMC data Number.
0x00060503 (4)
A value outside of the parameter range was specified during reading and writing of NC parameters. Check the write data.
0x00060504 (1) 0x00060504 (2)
An illegal address was specified during reading and writing of PMC data. Check the address. Writing to all areas of addresses F and X and writing to R9000 onwards was specified. Writing to these areas is not possible.
0x00060505 (1) 0x00060505 (2)
When the 140 BP/S alarm occurred on the NC: Downloading to the program currently selected on the NC is not possible. When the 73 BP/S alarm occurred on the NC: Overwriting and downloading to an existing program is not possible. Check NC parameter 3201#1.
0x00060505 (3)
When the 72 BP/S alarm occurred on the NC: The number of programs that can be registered to the NC has been exceeded. Delete unwanted programs.
0x00060505 (4) 0x00060505 (5) 0x00060505 (6)
Programs not existing in the NC cannot be uploaded. Programs not existing in the NC cannot be selected. Programs not existing in the NC cannot be deleted. -221-
C. ERROR CODE
0x00060507
APPENDIX
B-75044EN/02
The NC program cannot be deleted as the memory protect key is ON. Turn the memory protect key OFF.
0x00060508
When the 70 BP/S alarm occurred on the NC: The insufficient memory error occurred on the NC during downloading. Delete unwanted programs, and try downloading again.
0x0006050b
The system number is wrongly specified. Specify the correct system number.
0x0006050c
Downloading in the MDI mode is not possible. Change the mode to the EDT or MEM mode.
0x0006050d
Though DNC operation started by the host was executed, the data transfer request has not arrived from the NC. Set the NC to the MEM mode, set the DNC1 signal to ON to set the NC to the RMT mode, execute a cycle start and execute DNC operation started by the host.
Other Errors Relating to FA SYSTEM for PC (0x10010000 ~ 0x1009ffff)

0x10010003 The computer ran out of memory during execution of FA SYSTEM for PC. Either terminate unwanted applications, or increase the virtual memory to secure more memory. 0x10011009 The computer ran out of memory during initialization of FA SYSTEM for PC. Either terminate unwanted applications, or increase the virtual memory to secure more memory. 0x10011102 The computer ran out of memory during initialization of FA SYSTEM for PC. Either terminate unwanted applications, or increase the virtual memory to secure more memory. 0x10011103 The computer ran out of memory during initialization of FA SYSTEM for PC. Either terminate unwanted applications, or increase the virtual memory to secure more memory. 0x10011106 Illegal machine number Communication can be carried out only with machines that can be set in the Machine Setup screen.
-222-
B-75044EN/02
APPENDIX
0x10011107 Illegal file number
C. ERROR CODE
Make sure that a number 1 or larger is set to the file number. A file having a number smaller than the specified file is registered to the default directory. Check the file number. 0x10011108 0x10011130 Illegal file name The default directory is not set in the Machine Setup screen. Set the default directory. 0x10011131 Though downloading of the top file was carried out by Reader/Puncher communication, the top file is not set. Set the top file in the Select Transfer File screen. 0x10011132 Failed to delete a file. Make sure that the file is not write-protected, or that it is not opened exclusively by another process. 0x10013001 Failed to get the port number from the services file. Make sure that the FANUC_PCFA_CDA entry is registered to the services file. 0x10013101 Failed to get the port number from the services file. Make sure that the FANUC_PFCA_CDA entry is registered to the services file. 0x1002010a The file to download does not exist. Make sure that the file to download exists. 0x1002010b The file to download cannot be opened. Check the attributes of the file to download. 0x1002010c The file to download does not contain an O number. Make sure that the file contains an O number. 0x1002010e 0x10020111 0x10020112 An error occurred during reading of the file to download. An error occurred during closing of the file to download. An error occurred during moving of the file to overwrite by upload. Check the attributes of the file to overwrite by upload. 0x10020113 An error occurred during creation of the file to upload. Make sure that the directory settings are correct. -223-
C. ERROR CODE
0x10020115 0x10020118
APPENDIX
An error occurred during writing of the file to upload. An error occurred during closing of the file to upload.
B-75044EN/02
Make sure that the network is normal when the network directory is used. 0x10022011 Data whose MSB (8th bit) is 1 has been found. Make sure that the NC program you are attempting to transfer does not contain any illegal characters (Kanji characters, half-size kana characters, etc.). 0x10022022 The O number of the file to download is more than 5 digits. Keep the number of O number digits to 4 or less. 0x10022023 The O number of the file to download is 0 (zero). Set the O number to a value other than 0. 0x10022035 The buffer overflowed in a flush stop state. Keep the capacity from the NC program end code up to the EOF or next O number to within several tens of bytes. 0x10022052 The subprogram call nesting level has exceeded 8. Limit the subprogram call nesting level to 8. 0x10022053 Failed to open the subprogram file. Check the access rights of the subprogram file. Make sure that the subprogram file is not in use by other processes. 0x10022054 The corresponding file for the subprogram call does not exist. Make sure that the subprogram file call exists. 0x10022055 The next O number was found in the subprogram file. Multi-volume files are not supported in subprogram files. 0x10022056 The subprogram file does not contain an M99 code. Subprogram files need an M99 code. 0x10022058 The O number in the file does not match the subprogram file name. The O number in the file must be the same as the subprogram file name. 0x10022059 An M02 or M30 codes was found in the subprogram file. The M02 or M30 codes cannot be used in subprogram files.
-224-
B-75044EN/02
APPENDIX
0x10022062
C. ERROR CODE
The M99 code was found in the main program for extended transfer of subprogram files. Main programs for extended transfer of subprogram files cannot contain an M99 code.
0x10022091
Failed to open the transfer file. Check the access rights of the transfer file. Make sure that the transfer file is not in use by other processes.
0x10022092
The transfer file does not exist. Make sure that the transfer file exists.
0x10022093
The transfer files in the separate transfer mode does not contain an O number. The files specified in the list need an O number in the separate transfer mode. (The O number in List Files is used only in extended transfer.)
0x100220a1
Line 1 of the NC program has exceeded 320 characters. Limit lines including subprogram calls to 320 characters per line.
0x100220a2
The P code is 0 (zero). Specify an O number (1 to 9999) valid for a P code.
0x100220a3
The P code is above 9999. Specify an O number (1 to 9999) valid for a P code.
0x100220a4
Two P codes are set. Do not specify two or more P codes in lines containing subprogram calls.
0x100220a5
Two L codes are set. Do not specify two or more L codes in lines containing subprogram calls.
0x10022104
An attempt was made to re-transfer an O number that has already been transfer. Make sure that two or files having the same O number are not specified in the list.
0x10022105 0x10022107
An MFC file exception occurred. Failed to move the original file by overwrite upload. Make sure that the original file is not in use by another process.
0x10022108
Failed to create the upload file. Make sure that the directory in which the upload file is created exists. Check the access rights of the directory in which the upload file is created. -225-
C. ERROR CODE
0x1002210a 0x1002210b 0x1002210d
APPENDIX
Failed to write to the upload file. Failed to close to the upload file. An attempt was made to overwrite and upload a read-only file. Make sure that the file has been correctly specified.
B-75044EN/02
0x1003000b
Failed to open the FA SYSTEM for PC setup data in the computer's registry. Make sure that FA SYSTEM for PC is set up correctly. Make sure that the Windows NT registry is not damaged.
0x1003000c
Failed to read the FA SYSTEM for PC setup data in the computer's registry. Make sure that FA SYSTEM for PC is set up correctly. Make sure that the Windows NT registry is not damaged.
0x10040102 0x10040105
The value of the specified machine number is illegal. The value of the specified descriptor is illegal. Make sure that the value of the descriptor returned from FA LIBRARY is used correctly, and that F_FreeID is not being executed on that descriptor.
0x10040106 0x1004010a
The name of the specified computer is illegal. The specified descriptor cannot be processed by this function. The correspondence between the details indicated by the descriptor and the function to be processed is in error such that the descriptor, that was handed over when the tool offset was read, was handed over to the function for copying the custom macro variable.
0x1004010b
An attempt was made to copy the results data even though the data read request failed.
0x1004010d
The read start position specified by F_Seek() is a value larger than the number of data items. Make sure that the value of the read start position is within the range 0 to a value smaller than the number of data items -1.
0x1004010f
The file name and full path of the file is not set in a download or upload in which the file name and full path of the file is specified.
0x10040110
The O number in an upload or download in which an O number is specified or the O number specified by a selection or deletion is illegal. Make sure that the O number is within the range 1 to 9999.
-226-
B-75044EN/02
APPENDIX
0x10040111 0x10040114
C. ERROR CODE
Cannot find the execution format file for the communication process. A machining center tool offset type is specified together with a lathe tool offset type during reading and writing of the tool offset.
0x10040118 (1)
0 (zero) was specified as the number of data items during reading and writing. Set within the range 1 to 32.
0x10040118 (2)
The tool offset type was not specified during reading and writing of the tool offset. Specify the tool offset type.
0x10040119 0x1004011c
No valid notification message The CDA Manager is not functioning. When CDA Manager cannot function properly, check that FANUC_PCFA_CDA is set to the services file. A line feed is needed at the end of each line of data registered to the services file.
0x1004011d 0x1004020f
No machines are set in the Machine Setup screen. The Communication Manager is not functioning. A probable cause is that F_Open was executed without executing F_CreateCommunication, or that F_Close was executed after F_TerminateCommunication was executed.
0x10040210 0x10060001
FANUC_PCFA_APP is not specified in the service file. An attempt was made to open an already opened List File. Close the file and try opening it again.
0x10060002
Failed to open the List File. When an attempt is being made to manipulate the List File by machine, make sure that the transfer is being carried out, and that the machine number is correct. When an attempt is being made to manipulate an existing original List File, make sure that another process is not manipulating the same file, and that the specified file name is correct. When an attempt is being made to manipulate a new original List File, make sure that the specified file is correct.
0x10060003
The specified List File does not exist. Make sure that the specified List File does not contain any errors. -227-
C. ERROR CODE
0x10060004 0x10060005 0x10060006
APPENDIX
Failed to close the List file. The specified List File is already opened.
B-75044EN/02
The application attempted to execute the function for auxiliary transfer functions. Make sure that the transfer function is correct.
0x1006000a
The record flag of the specified record is incorrect. The function that you attempted to manipulate is in a non-executable flag state. Check the record flag.
0x1006000b 0x1006000c 0x1006000d 0x1006000f
Failed to exclusively process (lock) the header. Failed to exclusively process (lock) the specified record section. The function for the original List File was executed on List Files by machine. The function for the List Files by machine was executed on the original List File.
0x10060010 0x10060011 0x10060012
Failed to seek the specified record. Failed to read from the List File. Could not read the data of anticipated size from the List File. Check the contents of the List File.
0x10060013 0x10060014
Failed to write to the List File. Failed to write to the data of size to which an attempt was made to write to the List File. Check the contents of the List File.
0x10060015
The O number flag of the specified record is incorrect. Check the specified O flag again.
0x10060016 0x10060017
Failed to exclusively process (unlock) the header. Failed to exclusively process (unlock) the specified record section.
-228-
B-75044EN/02
APPENDIX
0x10060018 Failed to open the registry. Make sure that the registry is correctly set.
C. ERROR CODE
The directory (HELPER_MACHINE_LIST_DIR) in which the List File is created for each machine is not set to the registry. Correctly set the registry. 0x10060019 Failed to read the key from the registry. Make sure that the registry is correctly set. 0x1006001a Failed to read the value from the registry. Make sure that the registry is correctly set. 0x1006001b The header flag of the List File by machine does not indicate Transferring. Make sure that the header flag indicates Transferring. 0x1006001c 0x1006001d An attempt was made to correct an already transferred record. The record having the record number specified in the List File does not exist. Check the number of records. 0x1009F001 The computer ran out of memory during execution of FA SYSTEM for PC. Either terminate unwanted applications, or increase the virtual memory to secure more memory. 0x1009F004 The machine to communicate with by DNC1/Ethernet is not correctly connected to the network. Check the Ethernet cable connection and network setup. Also make sure that the value of FANUC_C4_SERVER in the services files matches the value of UDP port No. in the ETHPRM parameter on the NC. 0x1009F005 Cannot connect to the FANUC C4 Server. Make sure that the FANUC C4 Server has started correctly by [Control Panel] - [Service]. Also, make sure that 127.0.0.1 is set as the [C4 Server Host Name] in the Machine Setup screen.
-229-
C. ERROR CODE
APPENDIX
B-75044EN/02
Error Codes returned from the NC (0x20010000 ~ 0x2002ffff)

0x2001fffe 0x2001fffd 0x2001fffc 0x2001fffb 0x2001fffa 0x2001fff9 0x2001fff8 0x2001fff7 The DNC1 service failed in the DNC1 board on the computer. The DNC1 connection is closed in the DNC1 board on the computer. The error was occurred in the DNC1 board on the computer. The illegal packet was received in the DNC1 board on the computer. The undefined command was received in the DNC1 board on the computer. The timeout error was occurred in the DNC1 board on the computer. The illegal reply was received in the DNC1 board on the computer. The syntax error of DNC1 message was found in the DNC1 board on the computer. 0x2001ffba 0x2002ffba 0x2001ffb9 0x2002ffb9 0x2001ffce 0x2002ffce 0x2001ffcd 0x2002ffcd 0x2001ffcc 0x2002ffcc 0x2001ffcb 0x2002ffcb 0x2001ffca 0x2002ffca No data item can be read. If the error is occurred when the application program attempts to read the tool offset data, the offset number is illegal. If the error is occurred when the application program attempts to read the custom macro variable, the macro variable number is illegal. If the error is occurred when the application program attempts to read the tool life data, the tool offset number is illegal. -230Too many data items were requested. Specified axis has not been mounted. Program number format error Negative program number Command exchange sequence error Command syntax error
B-75044EN/02
APPENDIX
0x2001ffc9 0x2002ffc9 0x2001ffc6 0x2002ffc6 0x2001ffc5 0x2002ffc5 0x2001ff00 0x2002ff00 0x2001fdff 0x2002fdff 0x2001fdfe 0x2002fdfe 0x2001fdfd 0x2002fdfd 0x2001fdfc 0x2002fdfc 0x2001fdfb 0x2002fdfb Invalid axis command
C. ERROR CODE
The request is executing.
The request is canceling.
The NC executes the cancel command.
Timeout
Channel is busy
Data remaining
Incorrect file name
Open request rejected If the error is occurred when the application program attempts to download/upload an NC program in the FS0 unit, the NC falls into the alarm status. Edit request rejected
0x2001fdfa 0x2002fdfa 0x2001fdf9 0x2002fdf9 0x2001fc0c 0x2002fc0c
NC busy
A specified file was not found. If the error is occurred when the application program attempts to select an NC program, the NC program is not found. A warning was occurred during selection of a file
0x2001fc0b 0x2002fc0b 0x2001fc0a 0x2002fc0a
Start request rejected If the error is occurred when the application program attempts to start an NC, the NC is already executing a program.
-231-
C. ERROR CODE
0x2001fc09 0x2002fc09
APPENDIX
B-75044EN/02
Not in auto mode If the error is occurred when the application program attempts to start an NC, the NC is not in the auto mode. If the error is occurred when the application program attempts to select an NC program, an NC is not the incorrect mode. File selection request rejected An NC program is being edited or executed in the NC. In case of FS0, the NC falls in the alarm. File deletion request rejected
0x2001fc08 0x2002fc08
0x2001fc07 0x2002fc07 0x2001fc06 0x2002fc06 0x2001fc05 0x2002fc05 0x2001fc04 0x2002fc04 0x2001fc03 0x2002fc03 0x2001fc02 0x2002fc02 0x2001fc01 0x2002fc01 0x2001fba8 0x2002fba8 0x2002fba7 0x2001fba7
File protected
File deletion request rejected, or warning occurred during file deletion. editing request rejected
Directory not found
Directory read request rejected
Invalid directory or file name
Window library error
Command not executable If the error is occurred when the application program attempts to delete an NC program in FS16/18, the specified NC program is being edited. Invalid function code
0x2002fba6 0x2001fba6 0x2001fba5 0x2002fba5
Invalid big data classification If the error is occurred when the application program attempts to read/write the NC data, the data address is illegal. Invalid medium data classification
0x2001fba4 0x2002fba4
-232-
B-75044EN/02
APPENDIX
0x2001fba3 0x2002fba3 Invalid small data classification
C. ERROR CODE
If the error is occurred when the application program attempts to read/write the NC data, the NC data address is illegal.
0x2001fba2 0x2002fba2 0x2001fba1 0x2002fba1 0x2001fba0 0x2002fba0 0x2001fb9f 0x2002fb9f 0x2001fb9e 0x2002fb9e
Invalid data length
Invalid data type
Invalid data
Miscellaneous command errors
No option If the error is occurred when the application program attempts to write the custom macro variable, the NC doesnt support the specified custom macro variable number. If the error is occurred when the application program attempts to write the tool offset data, the NC doesnt support the specified tool offset number.
0x2001fb9d 0x2002fb9d
File not found If the error is occurred when an application program attempts to delete an NC program, the specified NC program doesnt exist in the NC memory.
0x2001fb9c 0x2002fb9c 0x2001fb9b 0x2002fb9b 0x2001fb9a 0x2002fb9a 0x2001fb99 0x2002fb99 0x2001fb98 0x2002fb98
File protected
No directory space
Insufficient memory space
Read disable
Write disable If the error is occurred when an application program attempts to delete an NC program, the specified NC program is protected.
-233-
C. ERROR CODE
0x2001fb97 0x2002fb97 0x2001fb96 0x2002fb96 0x2001fb95 0x2002fb95 0x2001fb94 0x2002fb94 0x2001fb93 0x2002fb93
APPENDIX
Write failed
B-75044EN/02
Read failed
Device inoperable
System not ready
Invalid status If the error is occurred when an application program attempts to delete an NC program, the specified NC program is being edited. Data mismatch
0x2001fb92 0x2002fb92 0x2001fb46 0x2002fb46 0x2001fb45 0x2002fb45 0x2001f62d 0x2002f62d
No extended window option
Miscellaneous errors
Write protected If the error is occurred when an application program attempts to download an NC program, the NC program numbers of the 8000s and 9000s are protected. Data not found If the error is occurred when an application program attempts to upload an NC program, the specified NC program doesnt exist in the NC memory. Program already exists. If the error is occurred when an application program attempts to download an NC program, the NC prohibits the system from writing over an NC program. Insufficient program space If the error is occurred when an application program attempts to download an NC program, there is no free space left on the NC memory . Too many programs
0x2001f625 0x2002f625
0x2001f61f 0x2002f61f
0x2001f61e 0x2002f61e
0x2001f61b 0x2002f61b
-234-
B-75044EN/02
APPENDIX
D. DNC1
D
Computer
DNC1
DNC1 is a private network developed by FANUC. FA SYSTEM for PC is compatible with Mode1 of DNC1 protocol. Mode1 enables multi-point communication where a computer acts as the primary station and controls multiple NCs. FA SYSTEM for PC allows connection of up to 16 NCs on a single computer.
Connection Example
Optical adapter B Tap Teminator unit
Metal cable
COP1
NC Optical fiber cable DNC1 board
(for NC) DNC1 board Example of Connection of 3 NCs to a Computer by Optical Adapter B
-235-
D. DNC1
APPENDIX
B-75044EN/02
Computer
Optical adapter C
Metal cable
COP1
NC Optical fiber cable DNC1 board
(for NC) DNC1 board
Example of Connection of 3 NCs to a Computer by Optical Adapter C
For details on how to connect the optical adapter, refer to the DNC1 Optical Tap Hardware Specifications at the end of this manual.
-236-
B-75044EN/02
APPENDIX
D. DNC1
D.1
SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS FOR DNC1 BOARD

1 The DNC1 board conforms to the ISA(Industrial Standard Architecture), and it can be used in the PC/AT compatible machine. But both of the DNC1 board and the XT extend board cant be used in one computer. K XT means the eight-bit architecture used in the IBM PC/XT. K The ISA bus (AT bus) means the sixteen-bit architecture used in the IBM PC/AT. K The edge of a board distinguishes the XT extend board from the ISA extend board. Refer to the following figure. K A certain ISA extend board adopts the eight-bit architecture. Carefully read the manual of the boards in your computer, and check that they dont adopt the eight-bit architecture.
WARNING If the DNC1 board is used together with the XT extend board or the eight-bit architecture ISA board, it can not work correctly.
Extend Board for ISA Bus
Extend Board for XT Bus
The following resources 'I/O Port Address, Memory Address, IRQ) are used in the DNC1 board.
I/O Port Address can be selected from the list below. 100h~10Fh, 110h~11Fh, 120h~12Fh, 130h~13Fh, 150h~15Fh, 280h~28Fh, 330h~33Fh The default I/O Port Address is 280~28Fh. 160h~16Fh, 290h~29Fh, 170h~17Fh, 300h~30Fh, 220h~22Fh, 310h~31Fh,
140h~14Fh, 230h~23Fh, 320h~32Fh,
-237-
D. DNC1
4
APPENDIX
B-75044EN/02
Memory Address can be selected from the list below. C0000h~C7FFFh, C8000h~CFFFFh, D0000h~D7FFFh, D8000h~DFFFFh, E0000h~E7FFFh, E8000h~EFFFFh
IRQ can be selected from the list below. 3, 5, 7, 9, 10, 11, 15 The DNC1 board spends the power supply like this. +5V, 1.4A(maximum)
-238-
B-75044EN/02
APPENDIX
D. DNC1
D.2
CONDITIONS FOR USING THE DNC1 DRIVER

The WinRT software is used in the DNC1 driver. If WinRT is also used in other software packages of your computer, the DNC1 driver can not be installed.
A
WinRT is the trademark of Blue Water Systems Co.
-239-
D. DNC1
APPENDIX
B-75044EN/02
D.3
SETTING UP THE DNC1 BOARD

1 Select the I/O Port Address by setting the SW1 switch on the DNC1 board before plugging the board into an ISA slot of the computer. The DNC1 board must have a unique I/O Port Address, and it is not allowed that the I/O Port Address is duplicated with the addresses of other boards. The location of SW1 switch
C
0
Relationship between the SW1 switch and the I/O Port Address
SW1 0'default' 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 I/O Port Address 280h ~ 28Fh 290h ~ 29Fh 220h ~ 22Fh 230h ~ 23Fh 300h ~ 30Fh 310h ~ 31Fh 320h ~ 32Fh 330h ~ 33Fh SW1 8 9 A B C D E F I/O Port Address 100h ~ 10Fh 110h ~ 11Fh 120h ~ 12Fh 130h ~ 13Fh 140h ~ 14Fh 150h ~ 15Fh 160h ~ 16Fh 170h ~ 17Fh
2 3 4
Remove the slot plate from the computer. Carefully plug the DNC1 board into the ISA slot. Screw the endplate of DNC1 board to the computer chassis.
-240-
B-75044EN/02
APPENDIX
D. DNC1
D.4
SETTING UP DNC1 DRIVER

Please install the DNC1 driver (A08B-9510-J560#ZZ07) with the following procedure. 1 2 3 Insert the DNC1 Driver Disk Setup disk into the floppy drive on your computer. From the Program Manager of WindowsNT, start the SETUP.EXE program stored in the floppy. The setup screen will appear. Modify the directory where you install the DNC1 driver if necessary. And click the <Continue> button.
The following disk information screen will appear. Confirm that the disk space of [Space Available] is larger than that of [Space Required], and click the <Setup> button. If [Space Available] is not enough, click the <Cancel> button, and then stop the installation. Try to install into the other disk with enough space.
When the <Setup> button is clicked, the installation is progressing automatically.
-241-
D. DNC1
6
APPENDIX
B-75044EN/02
When the message Setup was succeeded is displayed and the following [DNC1 Tools] group dialog is created, the installation is complete.
Entry of DNC1 Driver ( Add or Change)

When the DNC1 driver is only installed, it is not enough to run the DNC1 driver in WindowsNT. Please register the DNC1 driver into WindowsNT as follows.
Double-click the [DNC1 SetUp] program in the [DNC1 Tools] group.
-242-
B-75044EN/02
APPENDIX
2 Choose the DNC1 Board No.1 panel.
D. DNC1
Set up the same I/O Port Address as the SW1 switch on DNC1 board. And set the Memory Address and the IRQ, avoiding the duplication of other boards.
4 5
Click the <OK> button. When the message DNC1 driver was started is displayed, the DNC1 board entry to WindowsNT is complete.
-243-
D. DNC1 Removing the DNC1Driver
APPENDIX
B-75044EN/02
(Remove)
Please remove the DNC1 driver from WindowsNT like this.
Double-click the [DNC1 SetUp] program in the [DNC1 Tools] group.
2 3
Click the <Remove> option button, and then click the <OK> button. When the message DNC1 driver was removed is displayed, the deletion of the DNC1 driver from WindowsNT is complete.
Confirming the DNC1 driver settings

Please confirm the DNC1 driver settings as follows.
-244-
B-75044EN/02
APPENDIX
1
D. DNC1
Double-click the [DNC1 SetUp] program in the [DNC1 Tools] group dialog.
Choose the [DNC1 Board No.1] panel.
Check the contents of [Current Settings]. If None is displayed in [Current Settings], the DNC1 driver is not registered into WindowsNT yet.
Click the <Cancel> button.
-245-
D. DNC1
APPENDIX
B-75044EN/02
D.5
Dnc1HardTest
By using the Dnc1HardTest program, you can check whether the DNC1 board works correctly and DNC1 driver is registered into WindowsNT or not. When the DNC1 board is used at the beginning, you must execute the Dnc1HardTest program to confirm that the DNC1 board works correctly and DNC1 driver is registered into WindowsNT. The loop-back test connector must be connected to the DNC1 optical adapter unit when the Dnc1HardTest program is executed. The Dnc1HardTest program sets the DNC1 baud rate to 460Kbaud. So, the optical adapter unit must be set to the same baud rate. For more information about the way for setting the optical adapter, refer to DNC1 OPTICAL TAP SPECIFICATION A-71430E. A Sample connection of Loop-Back connector
Terminate Unit (A13B-0156-C200)
LoopBack Contecter (A13B-0156-C201)
Optical C300) Optical Cable(A66L-6001-0009#L20R03)
Adapter
B(A13B-0156-
DNC1Board(A20B-8100-0070)
-246-
B-75044EN/02
APPENDIX
D. DNC1
Starting Dnc1HardTest
1 Double-click the [Dnc1HardTest] program in the [DNC1 Tools] group dialog.
The following main screen of the Dnc1Hard Test program will appear.
Finishing Dnc1HardTest
1 Click the [Exit] command of the [SetUp] menu in the Dnc1HardTest program.
-247-
D. DNC1 Initial Settings of Dnc1HardTest
APPENDIX
B-75044EN/02
The initial settings must be executed before Memory Test and Interrupt Test. Diagnostic Test doesnt need the initial settings. Using Dnc1HardTest 1
Click the [Initialize...] command in the [SetUp] menu.
If the above message box Dnc1HardTest finished to initialize is not displayed, the Dnc1HardTest initialization is failed. The cause of failure is that the DNC1 driver is not registered into WindowsNT. Confirm that DNC1 driver is registered into WindowsNT. For more information about the way for the confirmation, refer to Confirming the DNC1 driver settings of D.4 Setting up DNC1 Driver.
Diagnostic Test
Using Dnc1HardTest 1 Click the <Diagnostic Test> button in the Dnc1Hard Test main screen.
Click the <RUN> button. -248-
B-75044EN/02
APPENDIX
3 4
D. DNC1
If the value of 0 is displayed in [RESULT], the test is successful. Otherwise, the test is failed. In case of failure, check the green LEDs on DNC1 board while the test program is running. For details, refer to (5) LED state when the diagnosis is running and (6) LED state when an error is occurred during diagnosis in D.8 Maintenance Information of DNC1 Board.
Error codes for [RESULT] of Diagnostic Test 2: The DNC1 driver is not registered correctly into WindowsNT. FFFFFDF1: FFFFFDF2: FFFFFDF3: The IRQ is illegal. The Memory Address is illegal. The Other error is occurred.
Error codes for [Contents] of Diagnostic Test FF10: The DMAC of the DNC1 board doesnt work correctly. FF20: FF30: FF40: FF50: FF60: FF70: FF80: FF81: FF90: FF91: FFB0: FFC0: The EPROM of the DNC1 board doesnt work correctly. The IRC of the DNC1 board doesnt work correctly. The MPSC of the DNC1 board doesnt work correctly. The register of the DNC1 board doesnt work correctly. The SRAM of the DNC1 board doesnt work correctly. The timer of the DNC1 board doesnt work correctly. The internal loop back test of the DNC1 board is failed. The internal loop back test of the DNC1 board is failed. The external loop back test of the DNC1 board is failed. The external loop back test of the DNC1 board is failed. The IRC of the DNC1 board doesnt work correctly. The LED of the DNC1 board doesnt work correctly.
Troubleshooting of Diagnostic Test A If the value of 2 is displayed in [RESULT] of Diagnostic Test, try to register the DNC1 driver into WindowsNT again. A If FFFFFDF2 is displayed in [RESULT] of Diagnostic Test, make sure that the Memory Address doesnt match the address on other boards. Try reconfiguring the DNC1 driver for a different Memory Address . A If FFFFFDF3 is displayed in [RESULT] of Diagnostic Test, make sure that the IRQ setting doesnt match the IRQ on other boards. Try reconfiguring the DNC1 driver for a different IRQ. A If FF90 or FF91 is displayed in [CONTENTS] of Diagnostic Test, make sure that the loop-back connector is connected to the optical adapter. Make sure that the optical adapter is switched on. A If you have an error code except for the above, there may be something wrong with the hardware of your DNC1 board. -249-
D. DNC1 Memory Test

Using Dnc1HardTest 1
APPENDIX
B-75044EN/02
Click the <Memory Test> button in the Dnc1HardTest main screen.
2 3
Click the <RUN> button. If the value of 0 is displayed in [RESULT], the test is successful. Otherwise, the test is failed. In case of failure, there may be something wrong with the hardware of your DNC1 board.
Interrupt Test
Using Dnc1HardTest 1 Click the <Interrupt Test> button in the Dnc1HardTest main screen.
2 3
Click the <RUN> button. If the value of 0 is displayed in [RESULT], the test is successful. Otherwise, the test is failed. In case of failure, there may be something wrong with your DNC1 board.
-250-
B-75044EN/02
APPENDIX
D. DNC1
D.6
Dnc1Test
The Dnc1Test is the software that enables to test the DNC1 communication services. When the DNC1 network is laid newly, or it is re-constructed, you must check that the DNC1 communication is working correctly.
Starting Dnc1Test
1 2
Double-click the [Dnc1Test] program in the [DNC1 Tools] group dialog. The following main screen of the Dnc1Test appears.
Finishing Dnc1Test
1 Click the [Exit] of the [SetUp] menu in the main screen.
-251-
D. DNC1 Initializing Dnc1Test

Using Dnc1Test 1
APPENDIX
B-75044EN/02
Click the [Initialize...] of the [SetUp] menu in the main screen.
The [SetUp DNC1] dialog appears like this.
Choose the baud rate. It must correspond with the SW1 switch of the DNC1 optical adapter. For more information about the DNC1 optical adapter, refer to DNC1 OPTICAL TAP SPECIFICATION and FANUC DNC1 DESCRIPTIONS B-61782E.
4 5
Click the <Run> button. If the value of 0 is displayed in [RESULT], the setup is successful. Otherwise, it is failed.
-252-
B-75044EN/02
APPENDIX
D. DNC1
Establishing DNC1 Connection

Using Dnc1Test 1 Click the <Establish DNC1 Connect> button in the main screen.
2 3 4
From the combo box, select the DNC1 station address of the NC. Click the <Run> button. If the value of 0 is displayed in [RESULT], the establishment is successful. Otherwise, it is failed.
Confirm the Status of DNC1 Connection

Using Dnc1Test 1 Click the <State of DNC1 Connect> button in the main screen.
The check b is displayed when the corresponding machine is connected to the computer.
-253-
D. DNC1
APPENDIX
B-75044EN/02
Downloading NC Program Requested by Computer

Using Dnc1Test 1 Click the <Download by PC> button in the main screen.
2 3 4
From the [Station Address] combo box, choose the station address of the NC. If the specified NC unit is the multi-path system, enter the tool post number. If not so, you dont need to enter it. Enter the NC program number you want to download. For example, if you want to download the NC program number O0017, enter 0017 or 17.
5 6 7
Enter the file to be downloaded. Enter the file name C: NCDATA Click the <Run> button.
O0017.PRG, for example.
If the value of 0 is displayed in [RESULT], the download is successful. Otherwise, it is failed.
-254-
B-75044EN/02
APPENDIX
D. DNC1
Uploading NC Program Requested by Computer

Using Dnc1Test 1 Click the <Upload by PC> button in the main screen.
2 3 4
From the [Station Address] combo box, choose the station address of the NC. If the specified NC unit is the multi-path system, enter the tool post number. If not so, you dont need to enter it. Enter the NC program number you want to upload. For example, if you want to upload the NC program number O0017, enter 0017 or 17.
5 6 7
Enter the file name for storing the uploaded NC program. Enter the file name C: NCDATA O0017.PRG, for example. Click the <Run> button. If the value of 0 is displayed in [RESULT], the upload is successful. Otherwise, it is failed.
-255-
D. DNC1
APPENDIX
B-75044EN/02
Downloading NC Program Requested by NC

Using Dnc1Test 1 Click the <Download by NC> button in the main screen.
2 3 4 5
From the [Station Address] combo box, choose the station address of the NC. If the specified NC unit is the multi-path system, enter the tool post number. If not so, you dont need to enter it. Enter the NC program number you want to download. Enter the file name for storing the uploaded NC program. Enter the file name C: NCDATA O0017.PRG, for example. Check that NC program number specified by NC side is described in the file you want to call with the DNC operation.
6 Operating NC 7 Using Dnc1Test 8
Click the <Run> button. Refer to Procedure for Downloading an NC Program of Sample Operations for FS16/18/15/0 in B.1 DNC1, DNC2. If the value of 0 is displayed in [RESULT], the download is successful. Otherwise, it is failed
-256-
B-75044EN/02
APPENDIX
D. DNC1
Uploading NC Program Requested by NC

Using Dnc1Test 1 Click the <Upload by NC> button in the main screen.
2 3 4
From the [Station Address] combo box, choose the station address of the NC. If the selected NC unit is the multi-path system, enter the tool post number. If not so, you dont need to enter it. Enter the file name for storing the uploaded NC program. Enter the file name C: NCDATA O0017.PRG, for example. Check that NC program number specified by NC side is described in the file you want to call with the DNC operation.
Click the <Run> button. Refer to Procedure for Uploading an NC Program of Sample Operations for FS16/18/15/0 in B.1 DNC1, DNC2. If the value of 0 is displayed in [ RESULT], the upload is successful. Otherwise, it is failed
-257-
D. DNC1
APPENDIX
B-75044EN/02
DNC Operation Requested by Computer

Operating NC 1 Using Dnc1Test 2 Click the <DNC Operation by PC> button in the main screen. Change the NC mode to TAPE.
The DNC1 operation will be executed directly without checking the PMC ladder. If the NC unit is ready for the DNC operation, click the <Yes> button.
4 5
From the [Station Address], choose the station address of the NC. If the selected NC is not any of FS15-MA/TA, and FS15-MB/TB, the DNC operation cant be executed by using the Dnc1Test. In this case, click the <Close> button.
6 7
Enter 0 for the tool post number.
If the DNC operation can be
executed, the tool post number cant be specified. Enter the NC program number you want to call with the DNC operation. For example, if you want to call the NC program number O0017, enter 0017 or 17. 8 9 Enter the name of the file to be transferred. Enter the file name C: NCDATA O0017.PRG, for example. Click the <Run> button. successful. Otherwise, it is failed. -25810 If the value of 0 is displayed in [RESULT], the DNC operation is
B-75044EN/02
APPENDIX
D. DNC1
DNC Operation Requested by NC

Operating NC 1 Refer to item 1 to 9 of Procedure for DNC Operation of Sample Operations for FS16/18, or item 1 to 6 of Procedure for DNC Operation of Sample Operations for FS15, or item 1 to 6 of Procedure for DNC Operation of Sample Operations for FS0 in B.1 DNC1, DNC2. Using Dnc1Test 2 Click the <DNC Operation by NC> button in the main screen.
3 4 5 6 Operating NC 7
From the [Station Address], select the station address of the NC. Enter 0 for the tool post number. Enter the file to be transferred. Enter the file name C: NCDATA O0017.PRG, for example. Click the <Run> button. Refer to item 10 to 12 of Procedure for DNC Operation of Sample Operations for FS16/18, or item 7 of Procedure for DNC Operation of Sample Operations for FS15, or item 7 to 9 of Procedure for DNC Operation of Sample Operations for FS0 in B.1 DNC1, DNC2. If the DNC operation can be executed, the tool post number cant be specified.
Using Dnc1Test 8 The value of 0 is displayed in [RESULT] if the DNC operation is successful. Otherwise, it is failed.
-259-
D. DNC1 Selecting NC Program

Operating NC 1 Using Dnc1Test 2
APPENDIX
B-75044EN/02
Change the NC mode to MEMORY. Click the <Select> button in the main screen.
3 4 5
From the [Station Address] combo box, choose the station address of the NC. If the specified NC unit is the multi-path system, enter the tool post number. If not so, you dont need to enter it. Enter the NC program number you want to select. For example, if you want to select the NC program number O0017, enter 0017 or 17.
6 7
Click the <Run> button. If the value of 0 is displayed in [RESULT], the selection is successful. Otherwise, it is failed.
Deleting NC Program
Using Dnc1Test 1 Click the <Delete> button in the main screen.
-260-
B-75044EN/02
APPENDIX
2 3 4
D. DNC1
From the [Station Address] combo box, choose the station address of the NC. If the specified NC unit is the multi-path system, enter the tool post number. If not so, you dont need to enter it. Enter the NC program number you want to delete. For example, if you want to delete the NC program number O0017, enter 0017 or 17.
5 6
Click the <Run> button. If the value of 0 is displayed in [RESULT], the deletion is successful. Otherwise, it is failed.
External Reset
Using Dnc1Test 1 Click the <External Reset> button in the main screen.
2 3 4 5
From the [Station Address] combo box, click the station address of the NC. If the specified NC unit is the multi-path system, enter the tool post number. If not so, you dont need to enter it. Click the <Run> button. If the value of 0 is displayed in [RESULT], the reset is successful. Otherwise, it is failed.
Cycle Start
Operating NC 1 Using Dnc1Test 2 Click the <Cycle Start> button in the main screen. Change the NC mode to MEMORY.
-261-
D. DNC1
3
APPENDIX
B-75044EN/02
The cycle start operation will be executed directly without checking the PMC ladder. If the NC unit is ready for the cycle start, click the <Yes> button.
4 5 6 7
From the [Station Address] combo box, click the station address of the NC. If the specified NC unit is the multi-path system, enter the tool post number. If not so, you dont need to enter it. Click the <Run> button. If the value of 0 is displayed in [RESULT], the start is successful. Otherwise, it is failed.
List of NC Programs
Using Dnc1Test 1 Click the <Directory> button in the main screen.
2 3 4 5
From the [Station Address] combo box, click the station address of the NC. If the specified NC unit is the multi-path system, enter the tool post number. If not so, you dont need to enter it. Enter the name of file which the list is saved in. Enter the file name C: NCDATA NC01.DIR, for example. Click the <Run> button. -262-
B-75044EN/02
APPENDIX
6 7
D. DNC1
If the value of 0 is displayed in [RESULT], the reading of the list is successful. Otherwise, it is failed. On successful, the list of NC programs was written in the file. The following is the contents of the file.
Reading NC Program Information

Using Dnc1Test 1 Click the <NC Program> button in the main screen.
2 3 4
From the [Station Address] combo box, select the station address of the NC. If the specified NC unit is the multi-path system, enter the tool post number. If not so, you dont need to enter it. Enter the NC program number of information you want to read. For example, if you want to read the information of the NC program number O0017, enter 0017 or 17.
5 6
Click the <Run> button. If the value of 0 is displayed in [RESULT], the reading of the information is successful. Otherwise, it is failed.
-263-
D. DNC1 Reading Variable Data

Using Dnc1Test 1
APPENDIX
B-75044EN/02
Click the <Read Variable> button in the main screen.
2 3 4
From the [Station Address] combo box, select the station address of the NC. If the specified NC unit is the multi-path system, enter the tool post number. If not so, you dont need to enter it. To read the variable data, enter the parameters in [Function Code], [Big Class], [Middle Class], [Small Class], [Data Type], [Data Length], and [Data Amount]. If you want to express the parameter in hexadecimal, the parameter value must be preceded &H. For example, the hexadecimal value of 33 must be specified by &H33.
For more information about the function code, the big class, the middle class, the small class, the data type, the data length, and the data, refer to Appendix 1 DNC1 DATA Function Details of FANUC SYSTEM FMODEL D Mate PROGRAMMING MANUAL B-75013E-2 (from here on referred to as Programming manual).
6 7
Click the <Run> button. If the value of 0 is displayed in [RESULT], the reading of the variable data is successful. Otherwise, it is failed.
-264-
B-75044EN/02
APPENDIX
D. DNC1
Writing Variable Data

Using Dnc1Test 1 Click the <Write Variable> button in the main screen.
2 3 4
From the [Station Address] combo box, select the station address of the NC. If the specified NC unit is the multi-path system, enter the tool post number. If not so, you dont need to enter it. To write the variable data, enter the parameters in [Function Code], [Big Class], [Middle Class], [Small] Class], [Data Type], [Data Length], and [Data Amount]. If you want to express the parameter value in hexadecimal, the parameter value must be preceded &H. For example, the hexadecimal value of 33 must be specified by &H33.
For more information about the function code, the big class, the middle class, the small class, the data type, the data length, and the data amount, refer to Appendix 1 DNC1 DATA Function Details of the Programming manual.
If you want to write more than one variable data, separate each value by a space character. For example, if you want to write the PMC data values of 7, 17 and 23, the character string 7 17 23 must be specified in the [Data] text box.
7 8
Click the <Run> button. If the value of 0 is displayed in [RESULT], the writing of the variable data is successful. Otherwise, it is failed.
-265-
D. DNC1 Reading NC Identification

Using Dnc1Test 1
APPENDIX
B-75044EN/02
Click the <Identify> button in the main menu.
2 3 4
From the [Station Address] combo box, select the station address of the NC. Click the <Run> button. If the value of 0 is displayed in [RESULT], the reading of the NC identification is successful. Otherwise, it is failed.
Notice of Alarm
Operating NC 1 Set up the NC parameters which enable to notify the NC alarm to a computer. For more information, refer to the Clause 7.2.6 FANUC SYSTEM FMODEL D Mate CONNECTION /MAINTENANCE MANUAL B75013E (from here on referred to as Connection/maintenance manual). Using Dnc1Test 2 Click the <Notice of Alarm> button in the main screen.
Click the <Run> button. -266-
B-75044EN/02
APPENDIX
Operating NC 4 Using Dnc1Test 5 Force the NC to raise an alarm.
D. DNC1
If the value of 0 is displayed in [RESULT], the notice of alarm is successful. Otherwise, it is failed.
Notice of Status
Operating NC 1 Set up the NC parameters which enable to notify the NC status to a computer. For Using Dnc1Test 2 Click the <Notice of Status> button in the main screen. more information, refer to the Clause 7.2.6 of the Connection/maintenance manual.
Click the <Run> button.
Force the NC to change a status. If the value of 0 is displayed in [RESULT], the notice of status is successful. Otherwise, it is failed.
-267-
D. DNC1
APPENDIX
B-75044EN/02
D.7
Dnc1LogViewer
The Dnc1LogViewer is the software for displaying the status of the DNC1 board and the DNC1 communication. You dont need to use the Dnc1LogViewer in usual operation. If an error is occurred in the DNC1 board, you can check the status of the DNC1 board and the contents of the DNC1 communication by using the Dnc1LogViewer program. You can also check the status by seeing the green LEDs on the DNC1 board. Refer to D.8 Maintenance information of DNC1 board for more information.
Starting Dnc1LogViewer
1 2
Double-click the [Dnc1LogViewer] program in the [DNC1 Tools] group dialog. The following Dnc1LogViewer screen will appear.
-268-
B-75044EN/02
APPENDIX
D. DNC1
Finishing Dnc1LogViewer
1 Click the [Exit] command in the main screen.
Initializing Dnc1LogViewer
1 Click the [SetUp] command in the main menu.
If the massage Dnc1LogViewer finished to initialize is displayed, the initialization is successful. Otherwise, it is failed. In such case, it is possible that the DNC1 driver is not running. Confirm that the DNC1 driver is running correctly.
-269-
D. DNC1 Showing DNC1 Log
APPENDIX
B-75044EN/02
The DNC1 Log shows the status of the DNC1 communication. 1 Click the [Get Dnc1Log] command of the [File] menu in the main screen.
The following GetDnc1Log screen will appear.
3 4
Enter the name of file for saving the DNC1 log. Enter the file name C: NCDATA TMP1.LOG, for example. Click the <Run> button. The contents of DNC1 log is shown like this.
-270-
B-75044EN/02
APPENDIX
D. DNC1
Showing DNC1 Dump

The DNC1 Dump shows the status of the DNC1 board. 1 Click the [Get Dnc1Dump] command of the [File] menu in the main screen.
The following Get Dnc1Dump screen will appear.
-271-
D. DNC1
3 4
APPENDIX
B-75044EN/02
Enter the name of file for saving the contents of the DNC1 dump. Enter the file name C: NCDATA TMP1.DMP, for example. Click the <Run> button. The contents of DNC1 dump is shown like this.
-272-
B-75044EN/02
APPENDIX
D. DNC1
D.8
MAINTENANCE INFORMATION OF DNC1BOARD

By seeing The LEDs on the DNC1 board, you can know the status of the DNC1 board.
(0) LED Indicators ? :OFF, :ON , D :Blinking, b :Dont care (1) Power-up state (Green LEDs)
No. Software LEDs Status of DNC1 board
?? ?? ? ?D
Just at the power on
Initializing DNC1 Board
Initialization of DNC1 board was completed
(2) LED state when an application program is running'Green LEDs'

No. Software LEDs Status of DNC1 board
?b ?D ?b D ? bD
There is no connecting NC unit.
There is more than one connecting NC unit.
Running in normal
-273-
D. DNC1
APPENDIX
(3) LED state when an error is occurred (Green LEDs)
No. Software LEDs
B-75044EN/02
Status of DNC1 board
D? ?D
On initializing, the SRAM test is failed. (The RAM on the DNC1 board is possible to be damaged.)
b bb ?? bD
An illegal interrupt is occurred.
An error is occurred in DNC1 board. To know the cause of failure, see the DNC1 log and the DNC1 dump by using the Dnc1LogViewer screen. Refer to D.7 Dnc1LogViewer for details.
(4)
No. 1
LED state when an error is occurred (Red LED)

Hardware LED Status of DNC1 board A parity error is occurred. (The RAM on DNC1 board is bad.)
(5)
No.
LED state when the diagnosis is running'Green LEDs'

Software LEDs Status of DNC1 board
?? ?? ?? ? ? ?? ?? ? ? ?? ?? ?? DD DD
Just starting diagnosis LED test
LED test
LED test
LED test
(Running diagnosis )
Diagnosis is complete
-274-
B-75044EN/02
APPENDIX
(6)
No.
D. DNC1
LED state when an error is occurred during diagnosis (Green LEDs)

Software LEDs Status of DNC1 board
?? ?D ?D ?? ?? D? D? ?? ?D ?D ?? DD D? ?D ?D D? DD ?? ?D DD DD ?D
The register is failed.
The IRC test is failed.
The MPC test is failed.
The DMA test is failed.
The EPROM test is failed.
The timer test is failed.
The SRAM test is failed.
The Channel-A internal loop-back test is failed. The Channel-A external loop-back test is failed. The Channel-B internal loop-back test is failed. The software interrupt test is failed.
10
11
-275-
D. DNC1
APPENDIX
B-75044EN/02
D.9
DNC1 BOARD, OPTICAL FIBER CABLE AND OPTICAL CONNECTOR SPECIFICATIONS
Name DNC1 interface board DNC1 loopback connector DNC1 tap DNC1 optical adapter B DNC1 optical adapter C DNC1 terminator External optical fiber cable External optical fiber cable External optical fiber cable External optical fiber cable External optical fiber cable External optical fiber cable External optical fiber cable External optical fiber cable External optical fiber cable External optical fiber cable External optical fiber cable External optical fiber cable External optical fiber cable External optical fiber cable External optical fiber cable
Figure No. A20B-8100-0070 A13B-0156-C201 A13B-0156-C100 A13B-0156-C300 A13B-0156-C301 A13B-0156-C200 A66L-6001-0009#L2R03 A66L-6001-0009#L3R03 A66L-6001-0009#L4R03 A66L-6001-0009#L5R03 A66L-6001-0009#L10R03 A66L-6001-0009#L15R03 A66L-6001-0009#L20R03 A66L-6001-0009#L30R03 A66L-6001-0009#L40R03 A66L-6001-0009#L50R03 A66L-6001-0009#L60R03 A66L-6001-0009#L70R03 A66L-6001-0009#L80R03 A66L-6001-0009#L90R03 A66L-6001-0009#L100R03
Remarks
Electrical interfaces 3 Electrical interfaces 3 Optical interface 1 Electrical interfaces 1 Optical interface 2 Cable lead length = 2m Cable lead length = 3m Cable lead length = 4m Cable lead length = 5m Cable lead length = 10m Cable lead length = 15m Cable lead length = 20m Cable lead length = 30m Cable lead length = 40m Cable lead length = 50m Cable lead length = 60m Cable lead length = 70m Cable lead length = 80m Cable lead length = 90m Cable lead length = 100m
NOTE Optical fiber cable cannot be cut or connected by the machine tool manufacturer. Be sure to use only the above pre-cut and preconnected cables.
-276-
B-75044EN/02
APPENDIX
D. DNC1
D.10
PRECAUTIONS WHEN HANDLING RELATED PARTS
DNC1 Interface Board

(A) Static electricity countermeasures The DNC1 interface board is supplied in a static-proof bag. Be sure to insert the board in this bag when storing or carrying it. Before you remove the board from the bag, be sure to discharge any static electricity from your body by touching a metal object. (B) Protection of card edge terminals When you handle the DNC1 interface board, never touch the card edge terminals (metal-coated contact with the connector). If you touch the terminals by mistake, wipe lightly with clean tissue paper or cotton wool (may be moistened with ethyl alcohol). Never use organic solvents other than ethyl alcohol.
Optical Connector, Optical Fiber Cable

(A) Protection when not used When the optical connectors and optical fiber cables are not used, cover their connecting surfaces with the cover or caps provided. If the connectors and cables are left exposed, dirt adhering to them may cause faulty contacts. If they become dirty, wipe lightly with clean tissue paper or cotton wool (may be moistened with ethyl alcohol). Never use organic solvents other than ethyl alcohol.
Optical connector
Optical connector cover
Optical fiber cable
Optical fiber cable caps
Protecting the Optical Connector and Optical Fiber Cable (when not used)
-277-
D. DNC1
APPENDIX
B-75044EN/02
(B) Optical fiber cable Though the reinforcing sheath section used for the optical fiber cable is sufficiently mechanically strong, take care not to drop heavy objects on it. When connecting or disconnecting the optical connector, hold it by its connector. Do not connect or disconnect the connector holding it directly by its cord. After the optical connector is connected it is automatically locked by the lock lever on its top surface to prevent it from becoming disconnected by the connector being pulled. For this reason, before you disconnect the optical connector, first unlock the lock lever. The optical connector is also designed so that it cannot be inserted in the opposite direction. Before you insert the connector, make sure that it is facing the correct direction.
Lock Lever on Optical Connector
When you lay optical fiber cable, pre-treat the optical connectors as shown below. Pull the reinforcing sheath section out onto a wire w/ hook or tension member as shown in the figure. Be careful to prevent tension force from being applied to the optical connector.
Reinforcing sheath section
Optical connector
Reinforcing sheath section
Optical connector
Wire w/ hook Tape
Tension member
Protecting the Optical Connector and Optical Fiber Cable (when laid)
-278-
B-75044EN/02
APPENDIX
D. DNC1
Fasten the reinforcing sheath section to the cable clamp so that the weight of the optical fiber cable is not directly applied on the connecting section of the optical connector.
Cable clamp (sponge filling) Recommended part: CKN-13SP made by Kitagawa Kogyo Ltd.
Optical connector
Optical fiber cord
Optical connector
Minimum bending radius of 50 mm (as large a radius a possible is recommended)
Minimum bending radius of 25 mm (as large a radius a possible is recommended)
Fixing the Optical Fiber Cable
-279-
D. DNC1
APPENDIX
B-75044EN/02
D.11
MAINTENANCE INFORMATION
Layout of DNC1 Board Components
SW1 Check pin (+5V) Check pin (0V)
COP1
LED1
LED5
JD5
-280-
B-75044EN/02
APPENDIX
D. DNC1
DNC1 Board External Dimensions

Unit: mm 121.57 Component mounting height 12 3.5
7.62
106.17
53.21 155.48 100.33 11.40 120 141.24 21.24 01
Loopback Connector Wiring Diagram

14 CS SD
2.90
170.78
15 *CS 16 17 18 RT
08
TT
01 10 08 18 05 14
SD RD TT RT RS CS
09 *TT 10 RD
02 *SD 03 TR
02 *SD 11 *RD 09 *TT 19 *RT 06 *RS 15 *CS 12 DM 13 *DM 03 TR 04 *TR
11 *RD 12 DM 13 *DM
04 *TR 05 RS
19 *RT 20
06 *RS 07 SG
Recommended connector Made by Honda Tsushin MR-20FH (20-pin, female) MR-20NSB (case)
-281-
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
DNC1 OPTICAL TAP SPECIFICATION
Page
1. OUTLINE .............................................................................................................. 2 2. SPECIFICATION................................................................................................. 3

2.1 2.2 CONNECTION OF ELECTRIC CABLE................................................................................... 4 CONNECTION OF OPTICAL CABLE..................................................................................... 5
2.2.1 2.2.2 2.2.3 2.2.4 Extension Between Primary Station and Secondary Station ............................................................5 Extension Between Secondary Stations ...........................................................................................6 Extension of One Secondary Station (Extension of Branch Cable) .................................................7 Extension of Two or More Secondary Stations (Extension of Trunk Line) .....................................8
2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6
CABLE LENGTH..................................................................................................................... 10 CONFIGURATION FOR DUSTPROOF CABINET MODEL OF F-D MATE...................... 11 SHIELDING AND GRANDING.............................................................................................. 12 SPECIFICATIONS OF OPTICAL TAP................................................................................... 14
2.6.1 2.6.2 2.6.3 2.6.4 Setting Switch and LEDs ...............................................................................................................15 Interface of Power Supply..............................................................................................................17 Specification of Power Cable, Housing and Contact......................................................................17 Specification of Optical Cable .......................................................................................................17
2.7
OUTSIDE AND MOUNTING DIMENSIONS OF AN OPTICAL TAP................................. 18
In this manual we have tried as much as possible to describe all the various matters. However, we cannot describe all the matters which must not be done, or which cannot be done, because there are so many possibilities. Therefore, matters which are not especially described as possible in this manual should be regarded as "impossible".
1. OUTLINE
B-75044EN/02
OUTLINE
The optical tap is an adapter used in the FANUC-developed high-speed network DNC1 (connection mode 1). It connects two taps and a node using optical fiber cable.
-2-
B-75044EN/02
2. SPECIFICATION
SPECIFICATION
(ALSE REFER TO FANUC DNC1 SPECIFICATION - B-61782E) There are three types of DNC1 optical tap - "OPT-TAP A", "OPT-TAP B" and "OPT-TAP C". electrical interface. Use a shielded twisted-pair cable to connect a tap with another tap or a tap with a primary station or secondary station. In the following text, the shielded twisted-pair cable is referred to as an electric cable.
Type of Optical tap Interface Function
In this manual, "ELEC-TAP" means a tap for the
electrical interface and "TAP" means a DNC1 optical tap or a tap for the
OPT-TAP A Elect-Interface Opt-Interface 3 1
OPT-TAP B Elect-Interface Opt-Interface 3 1
OPT-TAP C Elect-Interface Opt-Interface For trunk line 1 2
For trunk line and branch line
For trunk line and branch line
NOTE 1 2 "OPT-TAP A" and "OPT-TAP B" has three electrical interface each other. These three interface has same function. "OPT-TAP C" has two optical interface and these interface are different. Connect the "COP1" to the primary tap and connect the "COP2" to secondary tap.
: Terminating resister unit : Power supply unit (DC+24V 0.3A) : Electric tap
: OPT-TAP A : OPT-TAP B : OPT-TAP C
: Optical interface : Electric interface : Optical cable : Electric cable
Fig.1 Symbols
-3-
2. SPECIFICATION
B-75044EN/02
2.1
CONNECTION OF ELECTRIC CABLE

Fig.2 shows an example of DNC1 configuration in which the primary station (F-D Mate) is connected to four secondary stations (CNCs).
Fig.2 Example of DNC1 Configuration
-4-
B-75044EN/02
2. SPECIFICATION
2.2
CONNECTION OF OPTICAL CABLE

When the total length of trunk cable (lt) exceeds 200m (at a transfer rate of 230.4kbps) or 100m (at a transfer rate of 460.8kbps) and the length of a branch cable (ld) exceeds 0.5m, it is necessary to extend by using optical tap.
2.2.1
Extension Between Primary Station and Secondary Station

Fig.3 shows the extension between F-D Mate and CNC #1
Fig.3 Extension between primary station and secondary station The "OPT-TAP A" must be set on the primary station side and the "OPTTAP B" must be set the secondary station side.
-5-
2. SPECIFICATION
B-75044EN/02
2.2.2
Extension Between Secondary Stations

Fig.4 shows the extension between secondary station #2 and #3.
Fig.4 Extension between secondary stations The "OPT-TAP A" must be set on the primary station side of the transfer path.
-6-
B-75044EN/02
2. SPECIFICATION
2.2.3
Extension of One Secondary Station (Extension of Branch Cable)

Fig.5 shows the extension of the secondary station #2.
Fig.5 Extension of the branch cable The "OPT-TAP A" must be set on the primary station side (the trunk cable side) and the "OPT-TAP B" must be set on the secondary station side.
-7-
2. SPECIFICATION
B-75044EN/02
2.2.4
Extension of Two or More Secondary Stations

Fig.6 shows the extension of the secondary station #2 and #3.
Fig.6 Extension of two secondary stations (Extension of trunk line)

NOTE 3 The "OPT-TAP C" is used to extend the trunk line. The same system is designed to extend the branch line. (Refer Fig.7) In case of extension of secondary stations, please consider which line is extended trunk or branch line. 4 The power of optical tap which is connected to trunk line, is always turned on or turned on/off at the same time the power of primary station is turned on/off. If the power of "OPT-TAP A" in Fig.6 is independently turned off, the communication with secondary station #2, #3 and #4 is broken off.
-8-
B-75044EN/02
2. SPECIFICATION
Fig.7 Extension of two secondary stations (Extension of branch line)

NOTE 5 In the case of extension of branch line, the power of "OPT-TAP B" which is connected to secondary station can be turned on/off at the same time the power of secondary station is turned on/off. But the power of "OPT-TAP A" which is connected to trunk line is always turned on or turned on/off at the same time the power of primary station is turned on/off.
-9-
2. SPECIFICATION
B-75044EN/02
2.3
CABLE LENGTH (FOR THE DUSTPROOF CABINET MODEL, SEE 2.4)
Fig.8 Cable length when optical taps are used (1)
Fig.9 Cable length when optical taps are used (2) -10-
B-75044EN/02
2. SPECIFICATION
2.4
CONFIGURATION FOR DUSTPROOF CABINET MODEL OF F-D MATE

For the dustproof cabinet model of the F-D Mate and stand-alone CNCs, optical taps must be installed outside. When the branch cable length exceeds 0.5m, the cable must be connected to the optical tap via a tap. The total cable length must be less than 200m (at a transfer rate of 230.4kpbs) or 100m (at a transfer rate of 460.8kbps).
Fig.10 Configuration for dustproof cabinet model of the F-D Mate
-11-
2. SPECIFICATION
B-75044EN/02
2.5
SHIELDING AND GRANDING

NOTE Be sure to shield for the electric cable.
Shielding is to peel off the portion of the cable sheath to expose the shield layer inside and fix the exposed shield layer to the ground plate using cable clamps. An electric cable is a shielded twisted-pair cable used to connect a tap, CNC, or F-D Mate to a tap or optical tap. For information on the cable clamps and ground plate, refer to the connection manual of the CNC or F-D Mate.
Cable
Ground plate Cable clamp
Shield layer
Fig.11 Shielding Connect the frame grounds of the CNCs and F-D Mate to which electric cables are connected using a ground wire with a cross-sectional area of 5.5 mm2 or more. Notice, however, that when two devices are connected via an optical tap, their frame grounds should not be linked. For example, in Fig.4, the frame grounds of the primary station and secondary station #1 and #2 are linked using a ground wire. Secondary stations #3 and #4 are alse linked, while no frame ground connection is provided between stations #2 and #3.
-12-
B-75044EN/02
2. SPECIFICATION
Connect an optical tap to the frame ground using a ground wire with a cross sectional area of 5.5 mm2 or more (Class 3 or higher grounding).
M4-Frame ground (FG) terminal
Fig.12 Frame ground terminal
-13-
2. SPECIFICATION
B-75044EN/02
2.6
Item Ordering number
SPECIFICATIONS OF OPTICAL TAP

Specifications Type A, B C Ordering No. A13B-0156-C300 A13B-0156-C301 Interface Electric: 3 Optical: 1 Electric: 1 Optical: 2
Note : Optical tap operation modes A and B can be switched using the switch on the printed circuit board. Power Supply +24VDC to each optical tap. Voltage : +24VDC +10%, -15% Current : 0.3A max (excluding surge currents) Turn on the power of optical taps at the same time the power of the primary and secondary station is turned on. Refer note 4) and note 5) External dimensions Mounting method Environmental conditions Setting Use the swicthes on the P.C.B. 190 150 50mm W H D Install an optical tap contained in a special unit inside the power magnetics cabinet Ambient temperture : 0 to 60C Relatice humidity : 5 to 75% (Condensation shall not occur.) Vibration : 0.5 G or less Type A B switch SW1 SW2 C SW1 Function Switch the transfer rate between 460.8kbps and 230.4kbps. Switch the operation mode between A and B. Switch the transfer rate between 460.8kbps and 230.4kbps. Refer Fig.15 Refer Fig.16
-14-
B-75044EN/02
2. SPECIFICATION
2.6.1
Setting Switch and LEDs

1) In the case of "OPT-TAP A" and "OPT-TAP B"
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
LED
Switch SW1
Switch SW2
Fig.13 Switches and LEDs of "OPT-TAP A" and "OPT-TAP B" Functions of LEDs
LED (1) (2) (3) (4) Name P5 BUSY B 460K Functions Pilot LED Power is supplied Receive the data frame from optical interface "OPT-TAP B" is selected by the switch SW2 460.8kpbs is selected by the switch SW1
Setting switches
Switch the transfer rate SW1 Switch the operation mode SW2
460.8kbps
230.4kbps
-15-
2. SPECIFICATION
2) In the case of "OPT-TAP C"
B-75044EN/02
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
LED
Switch SW1
Fig.14 Switch and LEDs of "OPT-TAP C" Functions of LEDs

LED (1) (2) (3) (4) Name PON 460K START1 START2 Functions Pilot LED Power is supplied. 460.8kbps is selected by the switch SW1 DPLL of primary station side is acting. DPLL of secondary station side is acting.
Setting switch
Switch the transfer rate SW1
230.4kbps
460.8kbps
-16-
B-75044EN/02
2. SPECIFICATION
2.6.2
Interface of Power Supply

CP1
1 Y X +24V +24V 2 0V 0V 3 (Input) (No use) Y type housing
Power can be supplied from both Y type connector and X type connector. Basically, please supplid from Y type connector.
2.6.3
Specification of Power Cable, Housing and Contact

Name Y type housing X type housing Contact Specification of FANUC A63L-0001-0460#3LKY A63L-0001-0460#3LKX A63L-0001-0456#BS. Specification of Japan AMP 2-178288-3 1-178288-3 175218-5
We prepare the kit for cable making as follows.

Specifications A02B-0120-K323 A02B-0120-K324 Y type housing 1 X type housing P Contact 3 Contact 3
Material of cable : Vintyl wire (16 to 20 AWG) Determine the length of the wire so that the rated power voltage is achieved at the receiving end. Taking into account voltage drop due to the resistance of the wire and power fluctuation.
2.6.4
Specification of Optical Cable

Cable type Optical cable Cable length (m) (m) (m) Ex. 100m Specifications A66L-6001-0009#L A66L-6001-0009#L A66L-6001-0009#L R3 R03 R003
A66L-6001-0009#L100R3
Minimum length :
1m
Maximum length : 200m
-17-
2. SPECIFICATION
B-75044EN/02
2.7
OUTSIDE AND MOUNTING DIMENSIONS OF AN OPTICAL TAP

180 160
30
90 150
Fig.15 Outside dimensions for an optical tap
160
90
4-M4
Fig.16 Mounting dimensions
-18-
B-75044EN/02
INDEX
A
DNC1 BOARD, OPTICAL FIBER CABLE AND OPTICAL CONNECTOR SPECIFICATIONS 276 DNC1, DNC2 1 167 171 13 76 75 74 49 30 DNC1/ETHERNET Dnc1HardTest Dnc1LogViewer Dnc1Test DNC2, Reader/Puncher Download Settings for Machine 200 213 246 268 251 27 43
About FA SYSTEM for PC About Log Message About Log Viewer ABOUT NC PROGRAM FORMAT About Sample Program About Starting Applications You Have Developed About the Development Language of the Application Program About The NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT Window Adding Internet Service
Downloading NC Program requested by Computer < F_Download... > 107
E
EDIT LIST FILE SCREEN OPERATIONS 180 183 97 162 104 214 123 114 Editing List Files
B
Browsing, Editing and Creating New Files 58
End of Communication Process < F_TerminateCommunication > * End of FA LIBRARY < F_End > End of Receiving Notice Message < F_StopNotice >
C
Canceling Computer Start Download < F_DownloadCancel > Canceling Computer Start Upload < F_UploadCancel > Communication Settings for Machine Computer Start DNC Operation < F_Dnc... > Conditions for using the DNC1 driver Confirmation of Communication < F_IsOpen > Confirmation of DNC1 Connection < F_ConfirmDnc1 > Copying, Moving, Deleting and Renaming Files Cycle Start < F_Start > 157 158 38 153 239 99 124 56 115
Error Code Establishing DNC1 Connection < F_EstablishDnc1 > External Reset < F_Reset >
F
FA LIBRARY For Setting FA SYSTEM for PC Freeing Descriptor ID < F_FreeID > 71 31 160
G
General Settings for Machine 36 104 161 106 102 100 Getting Descriptor ID of Notice Message < F_GetNoticeID > Getting Error Code < F_GetLastError > Getting Information about Machine < F_GetMachineInfo > Getting List of Communicating Machines < F_GetOpenMachineNumber > Getting List of Registered Machine Numbers <F_GetAllMachineNumber >
D
Deleting NC Program in NC < F_Delete > Details of List File Extended Transfer Function Details of List File Separate Transfer Function 117 21 20
Details of Subprogram Extended Transfer Function 17 Details of Subprogram Separate Transfer Function DIAGNOSIS AND OTHER SERVICES DNC1 16 159 23, 26
INDEX Getting Number of Data < F_GetCount > Getting Result of Asynchronous Treatment < F_Response > Getting the Notice Message of the File Transfer < F_CopyNoticeFileTransfer > 159 161 105 Reader/Puncher
B-75044EN/02
R
205 126 135 120 119 148 144 140 128 5 107 Reading Alarm Information < F_ReadAlarm > Reading Custom Macro Variable < F_ReadCustomMacroVariable > Reading List of NC Program in NC < F_AllFileDirectory > Reading NC Identification < F_Identify > Reading NC Parameters < F_ReadParameter > Reading PMC Data < F_ReadPMCData >
H
How to Read the Library Function 73
I
Initialization Processing < F_Begin > 159
L
LIST FILE MANAGEMENT List File Monitor Operations 179 190
Reading Tool Life Management Information < F_ReadToolLife > Reading Tool Offset < F_ReadToolOffset > Relation between FA SYSTEM for PC and Protocols REQUEST SERVICE
LIST FILE MONITOR SCREEN OPERATIONS 189 LIST FILE TRANSFER FUNCTION List File Transfer Monitor and Control Functions LOG LIBRARY Log Viewer Log Server 18 21 163 167 177
S
Sample of NC Parameter Settings Sample Operation for NC Saving and Restoring Settings Selecting NC Program in NC < F_Select > 195 199 45 116 66 72 29 177 69 241 29 240 23 98 96 103 34 165 99 180
M
Machine Information Settings MAINTENANCE INFORMATION MAINTENANCE INFORMATION OF DNC1BOARD Moving Offset Location of Data < F_Seek > 35 280 273 160
Selecting the NC Program on the PC Service Type Setting FA SYSTEM for PC Setting log creation ON/OFF Setting Options Setting up DNC1 Driver Setting up TCP/IP
N
NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT 47
Setting up the DNC1 Board Setup Start of Communication < F_Open >
O
Observation of FA SYSTEM for PC 166
Start of Communication Process < F_CreateCommunication > * Start of Receiving Notice Message < F_StartNotice > Starting and Stopping the Communication Process Starting LogServer < F_InvokeLogServer > Stop of Communication < F_Close > Structure of Edit List File Screen
P
PRECAUTIONS WHEN HANDLING RELATED PARTS 277
i-2
B-75044EN/02
INDEX 189 14 35 24 237 95
Structure of List File Monitor Screen SUBPROGRAM TRANSFER FUNCTION System Configuration System Requirements SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS FOR DNC1 BOARD System Service
U
Upload Settings for Machine Uploading NC Program Requested by Computer < F_Upload... > Using Log Viewer Using NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT 44 111 172 49
T
Terminating LogServer < F_TerminateLogServer > The Contents of Log File The Contents of Transmission Log File Transmitting an NC Program Transmitting by Operating NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT Transmitting by Operating NC Side Transmitting by Using FA LIBRARY TRANSMITTING NC PROGRAM 165 170 169 61 7 10 8 7 Work with the File List
W
Work with the Directory List 54 51 138 151 146 132
Writing Custom Macro Variable < F_WriteCustomMacroVariable > Writing NC Parameters < F_WriteParameter > Writing PMC Data< F_WritePMCData > Writing Tool Offset < F_WriteToolOffset >
i-3
Revision Record
FANUC FA SYSTEM for PC OPERATORS MANUAL (B-75044EN)
Addition of
DNC1/Ethernet communication function
02
Mar., 99 Subprogram transfer function
List file transfer function
DNC1 optical tap hardware specification
01
Edition
Date
Contents
Edition
Date
Contents
TECHNICAL REPORT
(MANUAL) NO.TMN 00/00/0103

Date 26 June,2000
FA Network Development Office FANUC FA System for PC Windows NT Version Operators Manual
1. Communicate this report to: Your information GE Fanuc-N, GE Fanuc-E FANUC Robotics CINCINNATI MILACRON Machine tool builder Sales agency End user
Summary for Sales Document (Sales guide, Functional comparison list etc.)
Notice This is an additional document to the FANUC FA System for PC Windows NT Version Operators Manual B-75044EN/02.
Attached Document Drawing No.
Registration of Order List data (In case of Order List) Type of data Lotus 123/WinOasys
Original section of issue Developmen Person in Chief t Manager Change
IDE
FANUC FA System for PC Windows NT Version (Additional document for Version 2.3)
1. Type of applied technical documents Name Spec No. Version FANUC FA System for PC WindowsNT OPERATORS MANUAL / B-75044EN/02
2. Summary of Change New.Add Correct, Delete Add 3 funtions to DNC1/Ethernet Add Fixing problems Add Limitations Name / Outline Applicable Date Immediate
Group Basic Function Optional Function Unit Maintenance Parts Notice
Correction
Another
TITLEFANUC
FA System for PC Windows NT Operators manual (Additional document for Version 2.3)
B-75044EN/02-1
CUST. SHEE
01
EDIT
000626
DATE
matsukura
DESIG. DESCRIPTION
DRAW. NO.
F A N U C
LTD
1/ 2
FANUC FA System for PC Windows NT Version Operators Manual (Additional document for Version 2.3) 1. Outline FA System for PC Windows NT Version was updated to version 2.3. This document describes modification of version 2.3. 2. Updates 2.1. Additional functions to DNC1/Ethernet communication The following functions are added to DNC1/Ethernet communication. These function are described To be support in the FA System for PC Operators manual B75044EN/02. External Reset ( F_Reset(Ex)Reset(Ex) ) Cycle Start ( F_Start(Ex)Start(Ex) ) Reading Tool Life Management ( F_ReadToolLife(Ex)ReadToolLife(Ex) ) 3. Fixing problems The following problems have been modified. a) The error 0xfba3 was occurred when you read or write FS-15B's PMC-N/NB/NB2 area by DNC1 communication. b) If the DLL, which should be copied by installer, is used by another program, installer couldn't install this software. c) Incorrect PC's file data was displayed on NCs floppy cassette directory menu. It occurred when the file is opened at PC with exclusive mode. d) The error 0x60503 occurred on PC when reading NC's directory by DNC1/Ethernet. This problem is influenced by numbers of file at NC memory. e) In Machine setting menu, "Not wait DR signal of NC off" setting for reader/puncher communication didn't work. 4. Limitations 4.1. Communication with FS15i a) It is not available to communicate with FS15 i /150 i. 4.2 DNC1 communication with FS16 i /160 i, 18 i /180 i, and 21 i /210 i. a) With 1CPU2PATH option, it is not available to read or write path 1 and 2. b) With 2CPU3PATH option, it is not available to read or write path 1, 2 and 3. c) With 1CPU1PATH basic option, it is not available to read or write PMC-SB6's T, K, C and D area. 4.3. Operation system It is available for Windows NT 4.0 with Service Pack 5 or later. It is not available for Windows 95/98 and Windows 2000.
TITLEFANUC
FA System for PC Windows NT Operators manual (Additional document for Version 2.3)
B-75044EN/02-1
CUST. SHEE
01
EDIT
000626
DATE
matsukura
DESIG. DESCRIPTION
DRAW. NO.
F A N U C
LTD
2/ 2
FANUC FA SYSTEM for PC OPERATOR'S MANUAL

1. Type of applied technical documents Name Spec. No. /Ed. FANUC FA SYSTEM for PC OPERATOR'S MANUAL B-75044EN/02
2. Summary of Change Group Name/Outline New Add Correct Delete Applicable Date October, 2004
The setting procedures of FA library (A08B-9510-J512) Add Basic Function for DNC1 and DNC2 on Windows XP/2000 have been added. Please read this technical report instead of Chapter 1.1, 1.2 and 2 of manual (B-75044EN/02).
Optional Function Unit Maintenance Parts Notice Correction Another
TITLE
02 01
EDIT
04.10.04 03.09.17
DATE
Matsukura Added for version 1.1 Matsukura DESIGN First issue
FANUC FA Library for Windows OPERATORS MANUAL

DRAW.NO.
B-75044EN/02-2
SHEET
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
1/62
FANUC FA Library for Windows (A08B-9510-J512) OPERATING MANUAL (version 1. 1)

INDEX
1 ABOUT FA LIBRALY................................................................................................................................................. 3
1.1 1.1.1 1.1.2 1.1.3 1.1.4 1.2

2
OVERVIEW ........................................................................................................................................................ 4
Update from FA library for Windows version 1. 0 ................................................................................... 4 Comparison with FA library for Windows version and FA library NT version ..................................... 4 The contents of change from B-75044EN/02 ............................................................................................ 5 Software constitution of FA library .......................................................................................................... 5
RELATION BETWEEN FA LIBRARY AND PROTOCOLS ............................................................................ 8
OPERATING ENVIRONMENT AND SETUP........................................................................................................... 9
2.1 2.1.1 2.1.2 2.1.3 2.1.4 2.2 2.2.1 2.2.2 2.2.3 2.2.4 2.3 2.4 2.4.1 2.4.2 2.4.3 2.4.4 2.4.5 2.4.6 2.4.7 2.4.8 2.5 2.6 2.6.1 2.6.2 2.6.3 2.6.4 2.6.5 2.6.6
CNC .................................................................................................................................................................. 10
RS-232-C (Reader/Puncher interface) connection .................................................................................. 10 DNC1/Ethernet connection ..................................................................................................................... 10 DNC1 connection ..................................................................................................................................... 14 DNC2 connection ..................................................................................................................................... 16
PERSONAL COMPUTER / HARDWARE ...................................................................................................... 18
Computer.................................................................................................................................................. 18 RS-232-C (Reader/Puncher interface) connection ................................................................................. 19 DNC1/Ethernet connection ..................................................................................................................... 20 DNC1 connection ..................................................................................................................................... 21
PERSONAL COMPUTER / SOFTWARE........................................................................................................ 22 SETUP .............................................................................................................................................................. 23
Install the TCP/IP protocol service ......................................................................................................... 23 Setting the TCP/IP................................................................................................................................... 24 Installation of FA library......................................................................................................................... 25 Contents automatically registered into a TCP/IP SERVICE file........................................................... 30 Uninstall................................................................................................................................................... 32 Setting up DNC1 driver (WindowsXP) ................................................................................................... 33 Setting up DNC1 driver (Windows2000) ................................................................................................ 42 How to use FA library with WindowsXP Professional SP2 ................................................................... 47
STARTING AND STOPPING THE COMMUNICATION PROCESS .................................................................................. 50 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION.......................................................................................................................... 51
Machine Information Settings ................................................................................................................ 51 General Settings for Machine ................................................................................................................. 52 Communication Settings for Machine .................................................................................................... 53 Download Settings for Machine .............................................................................................................. 59 Upload Settings for Machine................................................................................................................... 61 Saving and Restoring Settings ................................................................................................................ 61
TITLE
02 01
EDIT
04.10.04 03.09.17
DATE

DRAW.NO.
B-75044EN/02-2
SHEET
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
2/62
ABOUT FA LIBRALY
TITLE
02 01
EDIT
04.10.04 03.09.17
DATE

DRAW.NO.
B-75044EN/02-2
SHEET
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
3/62
1.1
1.1.1
OVERVIEW
This document describes about FANUC FA library for Windows, A08B-0510-J512, version 1. 0.
Update from FA library for Windows version 1. 0

The following function were updated from verision 1. 0. (1) DNC1 communication has been supported. The same function as a WindowsNT version FA library can be used. (2) DNC2 communication has been supported. The same function as a WindowsNT version FA library can be used, and reading and writing of CNC parameter were added. (3) The network configuration which can use DNC1/Ethernet was extended. Please refer "2.2.3 DNC1/Ethernet connection" for details. (4) Windows XP professional Service Pack 1 and 2 have been supported.
1.1.2
Comparison with FA library for Windows version and FA library NT version

The library function of this software is fully compatible with the library function of FA library, A08B-9510-J510, of the FA SYSTEM for PC Windows NT version which was already shipped. And this library includes all of FA library Windows NT version. The user's application that developed by FA library of the FA SYSTEM for PC can be used by re-link with this library. The following is the comparison table of this library and FA library of the FA SYSTEM for PC. The shaded areas are described about FA library for Windows, A08B-9510-J512. FA library of the FA SYSTEM for PC Windows NT version (A08B-9510-J510 version 2. 3)
Items
FA library for Windows (A08B-9510-J512 version 1. 1)
PC's Operation System PC's Development environment Communication Interfece for CNC Setting menu operation FA library functions
Windows XP Professional + ServicePack 1 or 2 Windows NT4. 0 Workstation + ServicePack 6 Windows 2000 Professional + ServicePack 4 Microsoft Visual C++ 6. 0 / Basic 6. 0 Microsoft Visual C++ 97 / Basic 97 + ServicePack 3 + ServicePack 5 Reader/Puncher interface, DNC1/Ethernet DNC1, DNC2 The operation method is the same. The screen for checking the communication state of DNC1/Ethernet was added to FA library for Windows. Compatible (Re-link is required)
TITLE
02 01
EDIT
04.10.04 03.09.17
DATE

DRAW.NO.
B-75044EN/02-2
SHEET
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
4/62
1.1.3
The contents of change from B-75044EN/02

The function for a Reader/Puncher interface and DNC1/Ethernet is compatible with FA library of the FA SYSTEM for PC, A08B-9510-J510. Please refer the FA SYSTEM for PC operator's manual, B-75044EN/02, as the FA library for Windows operator's manual. This document was described only a different portion from FA library of the FA SYSTEM for PC operator's manual, B-75044EN/02. 1. ABOUT FA LIBRARY Please read this document about Chapter 1. 1 and Chapter 1. 2. Please refer B-75044EN/02 about Chapter 1. 3-1. 6. 2. OPERATING ENVIRONMENT AND SETUP Please read this document about all of Chapter 2. Please refer B-75044EN/02 about other chapters.
1.1.4
Software constitution of FA library

The FANUC FA library for Windows consists of a FA library function and a machine setup screen. (Within this document, "FANUC FA library for Windows" is described as "FA library". ) FA library function is a function group for developing an application program. By using a library function, NC can be operated from the user application program. FA library can connect with NC with RS-232-C (Reader puncher interface and DNC2), DNC1/Ethernet, and DNC1. A machine setup screen is the screen that sets up FA library.
Software constitution
Function of FA library (A08B-9510-J512) Machine Configuration User-Application developed by a customer Personal Computer
FA library functions
Communication process
Reader/Puncher
DNC1/Ethernet
DNC1
DNC2
RS-232-C
Ethernet
DNC1
RS-232-C
TITLE
02 01
EDIT
04.10.04 03.09.17
DATE

DRAW.NO.
B-75044EN/02-2
SHEET
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
5/62
Reader/Puncher
Reader/Puncher interface is the input/output function of an NC that can connect input/output devices such as FANUC HANDY FILE. By operating an NC side, an NC program can be transmitted between the NC and the computer. Refer to Section "Input/Output of Data" in each NC operator's manual and "RS-232-C/RS-422 INTERFACE CONNECTING MANUAL (B-60043E)" for details of Reader /Puncher. An extension RS-232-C board, AccelePort XP, Digi international, is necessary. RS-232-C Extension Board
NC PC
NC
NC Up to 8(NOTE)
DNC1/Ethernet
DNC1/Ethernet is a communication protocol for connecting the NC to the computer by Ethernet to enable data transactions between the NC and the computer. Use a third-party computer Ethernet Board.
Ethernet Board NC PC NC
NC Up to 64
TITLE
02 01
EDIT
04.10.04 03.09.17
DATE

DRAW.NO.
B-75044EN/02-2
SHEET
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
6/62
DNC1
DNCl is a private network developed by FANUC. FA SYSTEM for PC is compatible with. "Model1" of DNC1 protocol. Modele1 enables multi-point communication where a computer acts as the primary station and controls multiple NCs. A computer can be connected with a maximum of 16 NCs by DNCl. DNC1 Board is suppljed by FANUC DNC1 board NC PC NC
NC Up to 16
DNC2
DNC2 is the communication protocol that enables the computer to transmit various data to the NC. A computer is connected to an NC by RS232C. Refer to "FANUC DNC2 DESCRIPTIONS (B-61992E)" for details of DNC2. An extension RS-232-C board, AccelePort XP, Digi international, is necessary. RS-232-C Extension Board
NC PC NOTE ln the above figures,
NC
NC Up to 8(NOTE)
the maximum numbers are the number of NCs
connected to one computer by using the RS-232-C adapter board. It is the sum of NCs communicated with DNC2 and Reader/puncher.
TITLE
02 01
EDIT
04.10.04 03.09.17
DATE

DRAW.NO.
B-75044EN/02-2
SHEET
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
7/62
1.2
RELATION BETWEEN FA LIBRARY AND PROTOCOLS

FA Library supports the protocols of Reader/Puncher, DNC1/Ethernet, DNC1 and DNC2. And the available functions of FA Library depend upon the capability of each protocol as follows. Reader/ Puncher (*2) O O O O O X X X X X custom macro X X X X X X X
No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
Launch (*1)
Function Downloading NC program to NC memory Uploading NC program to NC memory Informs the start and completion of download required by NC Informs the start and completion of upload required by NC Display NC program lists to CNC screen Downloading NC program to NC memory Uploading NC program to NC memory Selecting and deleting an NC program in the NC memory Reading the NC program list in the NC memory Reading the alarm information Reading variables Reading and writing NC parameters Reading and writing PMC data Reading the tool life data Reading the system identify of an NC External reset Cycle start and writing the
DNC1/ Ethernet X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O
DNC1 X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O
DNC2 X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O
NC
PC
NOTE 1 Launch NC : Executed by CNC operation PC: Executed by program in PC which developed by FA library 2 When you uses the Reader/Puncher for some old types of NCs, optional parameters. it is impossible to use several above functions, or it is necessary to add NC
TITLE
02 01
EDIT
04.10.04 03.09.17
DATE

DRAW.NO.
B-75044EN/02-2
SHEET
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
8/62
OPERATING ENVIRONMENT AND SETUP
TITLE
02 01
EDIT
04.10.04 03.09.17
DATE

DRAW.NO.
B-75044EN/02-2
SHEET
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
9/62
2.1
2.1.1
CNC
This chapter describes about CNCs that can be connected by FA library.
RS-232-C (Reader/Puncher interface) connection

Reader/Puncher can be used on the CNC, except for Series 30i and Series 15i, supported the Reader/Puncher interface. FA Library can be connected to a CNC using the Reader/Puncher interface to be used as a replacement of a FANUC CNC program input/output device as listed below: FANUC Handy File FANUC PROGRAM File / FANUC PROGRAM File Mate FANUC FLOPPY CASSETTE ADAPTER FANUC FA CARD ADAPTER NOTE 1 2 3 Cannot connect when the 8-digit program number option is used. Can be used with one-path or two-path control CNC. Cannot be used with three-path control CNC. The floppy directory display option is required to CNC in order to display NC program list of FA library.
Applicable CNC model
2.1.2
DNC1/Ethernet connection
An Ethernet is required for the following CNCs: Series 16i -MODEL A/B, Series 160i -MODEL A/B Series 18i -MODEL A/B, Series 180i -MODEL A/B Series 21i -MODEL A/B, Series 210i -MODEL A/B Power Mate i -MODEL D/H NOTE 1 2 3 Cannot connect when the 8-digit program number option is used. Can be used with one-path or two-path control CNC. Cannot be used with three-path control CNC. When FA library is operated, one FOCAS1/Ethernet client is used on each CNC.
TITLE
02 01
EDIT
04.10.04 03.09.17
DATE

DRAW.NO.
B-75044EN/02-2
SHEET
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
10/62
Ethernet boards or DATA SERVER boards and CNC options

The table below indicates the Ethernet boards or DATA SERVER boards usable with the DNC1/Ethernet, and required CNC options. Ethernet boards or DATA SERVER boards and required options (1/2) Applicable Drawing CNC option Name model Number Ethernet board for LCD-mounted type 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 CNC ATA DATA SERVER for LCD-mounted type CNC Ethernet board for stand-alone type CNC ATA DATA SERVER for stand-alone type CNC RISC+ATA DATA SERVER for 10 stand-alone type CNC Ethernet board FS 16i /18i /21i -TA/MA FS 16i /18i /21i -TB/MB FS 16i /18i /21i -TA/MA FS 16i /18i /21i -TB/MB FS 16i /18i /21i -TA/MA FS 16i /18i /21i -TB/MB FS 16i /18i /21i -TA/MA FS 16i /18i /21i -TB/MB FS 16i /18i -TA/MA FS 16i /18i -TB/MB Power Mate i -D/H A02B-0236-J292 A02B-0281-J292 A02B-0236-J145 A02B-0281-J145 A02B-0265-J291 A02B-0281-J298 A02B-0265-J145 A02B-0281-J148 A02B-0265-J154 A02B-0281-J158 A02B-0281-J160 (*3) A02B-0259-J230 A02B-0259-J862 (*4) A02B-0259-J847 (*5) A02B-0259-J561 #6561 A02B-XXXX-S707 (*1) A02B-XXXX-S707 (*1) A02B-0207-J800 (*2) A02B-XXXX-S707 (*1) A02B-XXXX-S707 (*1) A02B-0207-J800 (*2) A02B-XXXX-S707 (*1) A02B-XXXX-S707 (*1) A02B-0207-J800 (*2) A02B-XXXX-S707 (*1) A02B-XXXX-S707 (*1) A02B-0207-J800 (*2) A02B-XXXX-S707 (*1) A02B-XXXX-S707 (*1) A02B-0207-J800 (*2) A02B-0236-J561 #6561
No 1
Control Software
11
TITLE
02 01
EDIT
04.10.04 03.09.17
DATE

DRAW.NO.
B-75044EN/02-2
SHEET
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
11/62
Ethernet boards or DATA SERVER boards and required options (2/2) No Name Fast Ethernet board for LCD-mounted 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 type CNC Fast Ethernet board for stand-alone type CNC ATA FAST DATA SERVER for LCD-mounted type CNC ATA FAST DATA SERVER for stand-alone type CNC RISC+ATA FAST DATA SERVER for 21 stand-alone type CNC Embedded Ethernet for LCD-mounted 22 type CNC and stand-alone type CNC Embedded Ethernet for LCD-mounted 23 type CNC and stand-alone type CNC (*7) 24 Fast Ethernet Board Power Mate i -D/H A02B-0259-J293 A02B-0259-J862 (*4) A02B-0259-J847 (*5) A02B-0259-J555 #6567 FS 21i -TB/MB Not required (*7) FS 16i /18i -TB/MB Not required (*6) A02B-0281-J571 #656A Applicable model FS 16i /18i /21i -TA/MA FS 16i /18i /21i -TB/MB FS 16i /18i /21i -TA/MA FS 16i /18i /21i -TB/MB FS 16i /18i /21i -TA/MA FS 16i /18i /21i -TB/MB FS 16i /18i /21i -TA/MA FS 16i /18i /21i -TB/MB FS 16i /18i -MA FS 16i /18i -MB Drawing Number A02B-0236-J293 A02B-0281-J293 A02B-0265-J293 A02B-0281-J299 A02B-0236-J140 A02B-0281-J146 A02B-0265-J140 A02B-0281-J149 A02B-0265-J157 A02B-0281-J161 A02B-0281-J162 (*3) A02B-XXXX-S707 (*1) CNC option A02B-XXXX-S707 (*1) A02B-0207-J800 (*2) A02B-XXXX-S707 (*1) A02B-XXXX-S707 (*1) A02B-0207-J800 (*2) A02B-XXXX-S707 (*1) A02B-XXXX-S707 (*1) A02B-0207-J800 (*2) A02B-XXXX-S707 (*1) A02B-XXXX-S707 (*1) A02B-0207-J800 (*2) A02B-XXXX-S707 (*1) A02B-XXXX-S707 (*1) A02B-0207-J800 (*2) A02B-0281-J561 #6567 Control Software
12
TITLE
02 01
EDIT
04.10.04 03.09.17
DATE

DRAW.NO.
B-75044EN/02-2
SHEET
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
12/62
(*1) A02B-XXXX-S707: Ethernet function for FS16i/18i/21i This option is required when an external board for Model A or Model B is used. Specify one of the following drawing numbers in XXXX according to the NC type: 0236 (16i TA) 0237 (16i MA) 0281 (16i TB) 0282 (16i MB) 0238 (18i TA) 0239 (18i MA) 0283 (18i TB) 0284 (18i MB) 0247 (21i TA) 0248 (21i MA) 0285 (21i TB) 0286 (21i MB)
(*2) A02B-0207-J800: Extended driver library for FS16 i /18 i /21 i This option is required when Model A is used. This option is not required for Model B, regardless of whether the embedded function or external board is used. (*3) A02B-0281-J160 is the high-speed version of A02B-0281-J158. A02B-0281-J162 is the high-speed version of A02B-0281-J161. (*4) A02B-0259-J862: Ethernet function for Power Mate i -D/H (*5) A02B-0259-J847: Extended driver library for Power Mate i -D/H (*6) When the embedded Ethernet function is used with FS16 i /18 i -TB/MB, no option is required on the CNC. (*7) When the embedded Ethernet function is used with FS 21 i -TB/MB, the main CPU board with the embedded Ethernet function needs to be specified. No option is required on the CNC. NOTE The following Ethernet-related options are not required: Basic operation package 1 A02B-0207-J810 CNC screen display function A02B-0207-J850
TITLE
02 01
EDIT
04.10.04 03.09.17
DATE

DRAW.NO.
B-75044EN/02-2
SHEET
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
13/62
2.1.3
DNC1 connection
A DNC1 board and options is required for the following CNCs: Series 0-MODEL C, Series 15-MODEL A/B Series 16-MODEL A/B/C, Series 18-MODEL A/B/C
DNC1 boards and CNC options

No 1 Name DNC1 card for Control unit A FS 0-C 2 DNC1 card for Control unit B DNC1 Control B Option 1 board B Option 1 board G Option 1 board J Option 1 board F Option 1 board G Option 1 board B Option 1 board E FS 16 -A FS 18 -A FS 15 -B FS 15 -A A02B-0098-J056 A02B-XXXX-J879 (*1) A02B-0094-J590 #6092 DNC1 boards boards and required options Applicable Drawing CNC option model Number A16B-2200-0776 A02B-XXXX-J879 (*1) A02B-0098-K121 (*2) A02B-0098-J543 #0699 Control Software
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
A02B-0094-J027 A02B-0162-J032 A02B-0162-J037 A02B-0162-J193 A02B-0120-J035 A02B-0120-J036 A02B-0200-J031 A02B-0200-J034
A02B-0094-J723 (*3)
A02B-0162-J723 (*4)
A02B-0162-J590 #60L0
A02B-XXXX-J907 (*5) A02B-XXXX-J902 (*5) A02B-XXXX-J956 (*5) A02B-XXXX-J907 (*6) A02B-XXXX-J902 (*6) A02B-XXXX-J956 (*6)
A02B-0120-J530 #B421
FS 16 -B/C FS 18 -B/C
A02B-0200-J530 #B421
(*1) A02B-XXXX-J879:DNC1 for FS 0T-C Specify one of the following drawing numbers in XXXX according to the NC type: 0098 (0 -TC) 0099 (0 -MC)
(*2) A02B-0098-J879:Assembly plate of control unit A for FS 0M-C It is not necessary to specify this one when control unit B (*3) A02B-0094-J723:DNC1 function for FS 15-A (*4) A02B-0162-J723:DNC1 function for FS 15-B
TITLE
02 01
EDIT
04.10.04 03.09.17
DATE

DRAW.NO.
B-75044EN/02-2
SHEET
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
14/62
(*5) A02B-XXXX-J907: DNC1 function for FS16/18-A A02B-XXXX-J902: Extenal I/O device control for FS16/18-A A02B-XXXX-J956: Back ground editing for FS16/18-A Specify one of the following drawing numbers in XXXX according to the NC type 0120 (16 -TA) 0121 (16 -MA) 0130 (18 -TA) 0131 (18 -MA)
(*6) A02B-XXXX-J907: DNC1 function for FS16/18-B/C A02B-XXXX-J902: Extenal I/O device control for FS16/18-B/C A02B-XXXX-J956: Back ground editing for FS16/18-B/C Specify one of the following drawing numbers in XXXX according to the NC type 0200 (16 -TB) 0201 (16 -MB) 0222 (16 -TC) 0223 (16 -MC) 0216 (18 -TB) 0217 (18 -MB) 0228 (18 -TC) 0229 (18 -MC)
TITLE
02 01
EDIT
04.10.04 03.09.17
DATE

DRAW.NO.
B-75044EN/02-2
SHEET
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
15/62
2.1.4
DNC2 connection
A DNC2 board and options is required for the fo1lowing CNCs: Series 0-MODEL C, Series 15-MODEL B Series 16-MODEL A/B/C, Series 18-MODEL A/B/C NOTE 1 Cannot connect when the 8-digit program number option is used. 2 Can be used with one-path control CNC. Cannot be used with three-path control CNC.
DNC1 boards and CNC options

No Name DNC2 boards boards and required options (1/2) Applicable Drawing CNC option model Number A02B-XXXX-J878 (*1) 1 DNC2 card for control unit A FS 0 -TC/MC 2 DNC2 card for control unit B option 1 board A option 1 board E option 1 board F (*3) option 1 board I option 1 board A option 1 board F option 1 board E option 1 board FS 18 -TA/MA FS 16/18 -TB/MB FS 16/18 -TC/MC FS 16 -TA/MA FS 15 -TB/MB A02B-0098-J055 A16B-2200-0775 A02B-XXXX-J927 (*1) A02B-XXXX-J828 (*1) A02B-0098-K121 (*2) A02B-XXXX-J878 (*1) A02B-XXXX-J927 (*1) A02B-XXXX-J828 (*1) A02B-0162-J031 A02B-0162-J035 A02B-0162-J600 (*4) A02B-0162-J036 A02B-0162-J192 A02B-0120-J034 A02B-0120-J033 A02B-0120-J032 A02B-0120-J034 A02B-XXXX-J908 (*5) A02B-XXXX-J902 (*5) A02B-XXXX-J956 (*5) A02B-XXXX-J908 (*5) A02B-XXXX-J902 (*5) A02B-XXXX-J956 (*5) A02B-0200-J030 A02B-0200-J033 A02B-0200-J030 A02B-XXXX-J908 (*5) A02B-XXXX-J902 (*5) A02B-XXXX-J956 (*5) A02B-0200-J532 #B426 A02B-0162-J590 #60N0 A02B-0098-J543 #0688 Control Software
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
A02B-0120-J530 #B426
A02B-0130-J530 #B426
11 12 13
option 1 board A option 1 board D (*6) option 1 board A
TITLE
02 01
EDIT
04.10.04 03.09.17
DATE

DRAW.NO.
B-75044EN/02-2
SHEET
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
16/62
(*1) A02B-XXXX-J878: DNC2 for Series 0 A02B-XXXX-J927: Extenal I/O device control for Series 0 A02B-XXXX-J828: Back ground editing for Series 0 Specify one of the following drawing numbers in XXXX according to the NC type 0098 (0 -TC) 0099 (0 -MC)
(*2) A02B-0098-K121: Assembly plate of control unit A for FS 0M-C It is not necessary to specify this one when control unit B (*3) Only Series 15-MB can be used. (*4) A02B-0162-J600: DNC2 for Series 15 In addition to this option, a CRT display circuit option that matches the corresponding board is required. (*5) A02B-XXXX-J908: DNC2 for Series 16/18 A02B-XXXX-J902: Extenal I/O device control for Series 16/18 A02B-XXXX-J956: Back ground editing for Series 16/18 Specify one of the following drawing numbers in XXXX according to the NC type 0120 (16 -TA) 0121 (16 -MA) 0200 (16 -TB) 0201 (16 -MB) 0222 (16 -TC) 0223 (16 -MC) 0130 (18 -TA) 0131 (18 -MA) 0216 (18 -TB) 0217 (18 -MB) 0228 (18 -TC) 0229 (18 -MC)
(*6) Only Series 16-TB and 18-TB can be used
TITLE
02 01
EDIT
04.10.04 03.09.17
DATE

DRAW.NO.
B-75044EN/02-2
SHEET
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
17/62
2.2
2.2.1
PERSONAL COMPUTER / HARDWARE

This part describes the hardware environment of PC for FA library.
Computer
The computer which can use FA library is as follows.
Computer
(1) CPU: Pentium(R) with 233 MHz or more is recommended. (2) Physical memory: 128MB or more (3) Virtual memory: 200MB or more (4) HDD: Following free space is required; - Drive that OS is installed - Drive to install FA library includes OS. (5) Keyboard, mouse, floppy drive and CD-ROM are required. (6) Ethernet interface Required for DNC1/Ethernet connection (7) RS-232-C extention board Required for RS-232-C, Reader/Puncher interface, connection. 30MB 20MB
50MB space is required when you install FA library to the drive that
Display
(1) Resolution: 1024 x 768 dots or more (2) Color: 16 colors or more
TITLE
02 01
EDIT
04.10.04 03.09.17
DATE

DRAW.NO.
B-75044EN/02-2
SHEET
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
18/62
2.2.2
RS-232-C (Reader/Puncher interface) connection

(1) RS-232-C expansion board The following RS-232-C expansion board made from Digi is required. - AccelePort 4p (4 ports, DTE, DB25 male) - AccelePort 8p (8 ports, DTE, DB25 male) (2) RS-232C connection cables The following interface specifications apply between the PC and NC. If the RS-232C expansion board is AccelePort 4p/8p DTE, DB25 male. PC
DSUB 25pin (Female) Signal SD RD RS CS ER DR CD SG GND Pin 2 3 4 5 20 6 8 7
Example of the PC standard RS-232-C port (Please comfirm port detail by the PC manual) PC
DSUB 25pin (Female) Signal SD RD RS CS ER DR CD SG GND Pin 2 3 7 8 4 6 1 5
NC
DSUB 25pin (Male) Signal SD RD RS CS ER DR CD SG FG Pin 2 3 4 5 20 6 8 7 1
NC
DSUB 25pin (Male) Signal SD RD RS CS ER DR CD SG FG Pin 2 3 4 5 20 6 8 7 1
NOTE 1 2 3 No port on the PC can be used with Reader/Puncher. Refer to FANUC "RS-232-C/RS-422 Interface Connection Manual" (B-60043E) for detailed explanations about how to create connection cables. Transmission may stop during DNC operation, depending on the performance of the PC in use or the size of a communication buffer in the NC. Transmission may stop also depending on the way the screen is operated on. If transmission stops, decrease the communication rate or the number of units that are simultaneously subjected to DNC operation.
TITLE
02 01
EDIT
04.10.04 03.09.17
DATE

DRAW.NO.
B-75044EN/02-2
SHEET
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
19/62
2.2.3
DNC1/Ethernet connection
(1) Ethernet interface An ethernet interface is required. (2) Network configuration Specifically, please investigate whether network configuration is the same as Fig. 1, or it is the same as Fig. 2. The configuration checked here is used by [C4Server IP address] set up of "2.6.3 Communication Settings for Machine". With the network configuration of Fig. 2, it takes about 30 seconds for the FA Library to recognize that the CNC is not turned on. For example, it will take about 30 seconds for the FA library to recognize "power off error" when you read PMC data of CNC which is not turned on.
Network A
PC
NC
NC
PC Router
The PC belongs to a network separated with a router from the network to which the NCs belong.
The server PC and the NCs must belong to the same network. NC
Network B
NC
Fig.1 Usable network configurarion (1)
Fig. 2 Usable network configurarion (2)
(3) Ethernet cables, HUB and electrical noise countermeasures Please refer to the following manual according to the Ethernet function of NC currently used. Ethernet function of NC FAST Ethernet Board or FAST DATA SERVER BOARD Manual name FANUC FAST Ethernet Board FANUC FAST DATA SERVER OPERATOR'S MANUAL B-63644EN/02 FANUC Series 16i/160i/160is-MODEL B FANUC Series 18i/180i/180is-MODEL B Embedded Ethernet FANUC Series 21i/210i/210is-MODEL B CONNECTION MANUAL (HARDWARE) B-63523EN/03 Ethernet Board or DATA SERVER BOARD FANUC ETHERNET BOARD FANUC DATA SERVER BOARD OPERATOR'S MANUAL B-63354EN/04 V. CONNECTION 5 CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS 5. 5 LINKING THE EMBEDDED ETHERNET INTERFACE V. CONNECTION Chapter name
TITLE
02 01
EDIT
04.10.04 03.09.17
DATE

DRAW.NO.
B-75044EN/02-2
SHEET
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
20/62
2.2.4
DNC1 connection
Insert the DNC1 board to the personal computer. Please refer each item of the appendix about the insertion of the DNC1 board in the personal computer and the uniting method with NC. "D. 1 SYSTEMREQtJIREMENTSFORDNC1 BOARD" "D. 2 CONDITIONSFORUSINGTHEDNC1 DRIVER" "D. 3 SETTNGUPTHEDNC1 BOARD"
DNC1 board setup
DNC1 driver setup

Please see "2.4.6 Setting up DNC1 driver (WindowsXP) " for details of the setup of the DNC1 driver.
DNC1 board test

Please see appendix "D. 5 DNC1 HardTest" about the test method.
TITLE
02 01
EDIT
04.10.04 03.09.17
DATE

DRAW.NO.
B-75044EN/02-2
SHEET
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
21/62
2.3
PERSONAL COMPUTER / SOFTWARE

This part describes the software environment of PC for FA library.
Licensing agreement
One computer can use this software.
Operating System
This software runs on following Operating System: Microsoft Windows XP Professional ServicePack 1 or 2 Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional ServicePack 4
Development environment
In order to create your application program by FA library, the following development environment is required. Microsoft Visual C++ 6. 0 Service Pack 5 Microsoft Visual Basic 6. 0 Service Pack 5 NOTE 1 2 This software cannot install to PC that FANUC CIMPLICITY i CELL has been installed in. When you develop an application program by Visual C++, cannot link to FA library. 3 The following Ethernet-related software products are not required: - FOCAS1/Ethernet library (A02B-0207-K732) - Basic operation package 1 (A02B-0207-K752) - CNC screen display function disk (A02B-0207-K772) C++ programming is required. The application that is programmed by C
TITLE
02 01
EDIT
04.10.04 03.09.17
DATE

DRAW.NO.
B-75044EN/02-2
SHEET
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
22/62
2.4
2.4.1
SETUP
This part describes the setting of FA library.
Install the TCP/IP protocol service

NOTE 1 2 The user who makes the setting described in this section must have the "administrator privilege". Regardless of the method of connection of NC, TCP/IP protocol service is required.
Installing the TCP/IP protocol service

FA library uses the network protocol called transmission control protocol/internet protocol (TCP/IP) that enables communication over the network. Therefore, before installing FA library you must install the TCP/IP protocol service on Windows. Also when using a Reader/Puncher interface, TCP/IP protocol service is required. You can check the TCP/IP is installed on Windows using the following procedure. Select [Control Panel] -> [Network and Dial-up Connections] and activate [Local Area Connection]. Check whether the [Local Area Connection Properties] list box contains "Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) . " If the TCP/IP is not installed, install it using [Local Area Connection Properties]. Refer to "Windows Setup Guide" for explanations about how to install the TCP/IP.
Checking on localhost
The term localhost is a special host name used by the TCP/IP protocol to indicate the host of interest. It is registered automatically when Windows is installed. Deleting this setting hampers the normal operation of FA library. Before installing the system described in this manual, check whether localhost has been registered in the hosts file. Supposing that Windows is installed in the "c:\winnt" directory, the hosts file is in the location stated below. (The directory where Windows is installed is registered in the system environment variable "windir". It can be checked by activating [System] on [Control Panel]. ) "c:\winnt\system32\drivers\etc\hosts" Open this file with a editor such as Notepad, and look for the following line (usually it is at or near the beginning of the file) . 127. 0. 0. 1 localhost If this line is not in the hosts file, add it.
TITLE
02 01
EDIT
04.10.04 03.09.17
DATE

DRAW.NO.
B-75044EN/02-2
SHEET
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
23/62
2.4.2
Setting the TCP/IP

NOTE 1 2 The user who makes the setting described in this section must have the "administrator privilege". When you connect CNC via DNC1/Ethernet, the setting described in this section is required.
To communicate with NCs using Ethernet, set the TCP/IP. 1. 2. Select [Start] -> [Settings] -> [Control Panel], and activate [Network]. Select [Network and Dial-up Connections] and activate [Local Area Connection].
The IP address and subnet mask must always be set. The default gateway setting may be required depending on the network configuration in use. Contact the network administrator in your company. Also, please confirm the "2.2.3 DNC1/Ethernet connection ".
TITLE
02 01
EDIT
04.10.04 03.09.17
DATE

DRAW.NO.
B-75044EN/02-2
SHEET
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
24/62
2.4.3
Installation of FA library
FA library is installed by executing a setup program from CD-ROM. NOTE 1 2 3 The user who installs FA library must have the "administrator privilege". Before starting the installation procedure, stop all application programs. The message "UDP Number for C4 Service" appears during installation. The displayed information must match the setting in the NC. Take note of this information. If you forgot to take note of this information, see "UDP number for C4 service" in the Section "2.4.4 Contents automatically registered into a TCP/IP SERVICE file". The setup procedure follows: 1. Start the computer, and insert the installation CD-ROM into the drive. The installer's start window appears automatically. Click the <Next> button.
TITLE
02 01
EDIT
04.10.04 03.09.17
DATE

DRAW.NO.
B-75044EN/02-2
SHEET
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
25/62
2.
The software license agreement terms appear. Read them carefully, and if you agree, click the <Yes> button.
3.
Select a folder for installation. Check [Destination Folder], and if it is ok, click the <Next> button. To install FA library in a different folder, click <Browse> and select the desined folder, then click the <Next> button.
TITLE
02 01
EDIT
04.10.04 03.09.17
DATE

DRAW.NO.
B-75044EN/02-2
SHEET
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
26/62
4.
Select a program folder where icons are to be saved. Usually select the default value displayed on the screen, and click the <Next> button.
5.
Before file copy is started, a dialog box appears which prompts you to check what you specified so far. If it is ok, click the <Next> button. Installation begins.
6.
The message "UDP Number for C4 Service" shown below appears during installation. You need to enter the value indicated in this message as "Port number for UDP" for all NCs. (A value other than "8192" may be indicated depending on the environment of the PC. ) Take note of this value. See "UDP number for C4 service" described in Section, "2.4.4 Contents automatically registered into a TCP/IP SERVICE file" for details.
TITLE
02 01
EDIT
04.10.04 03.09.17
DATE

DRAW.NO.
B-75044EN/02-2
SHEET
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
27/62
7.
The ReadMe file and the user register card are displayed. The ReadMe file contains the cautions and other information that have not been included in the ReadMe file manual. Be sure to read the ReadMe file. NOTE Please fill in the user registration card and send it to us. When the user registration card is displayed, print it on your printer, and fill in the printed form. If you want to print it later, for example, because your PC has no printer, use the following file: RegistJ. txt in the root directory on the installation CD The fax address and post address are presented on the user registration card. To read the ReadMe file later, open ReadMeJ. txt in the root directory on the installation CD.
8.
Once the setup is completed, the following message appears. Turn the PC power off and on again.
TITLE
02 01
EDIT
04.10.04 03.09.17
DATE

DRAW.NO.
B-75044EN/02-2
SHEET
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
28/62
FA library programs
When FA library is installed, the following program will be created in the [FANUC FA Library] group.
<1>
<2>
<3>
<4>
<5>
<6>
<7>
<8>
<9>
<1> This is an utility program for the DNC1 communication test. Referto "D. 5 DNC1 HardTest" and "D. 6 DNC1 Test" for operation. <2> This is the commnunication test program for DNC1/Ethernet connection. <3> This is the startup icon for FA library. FA library communicates with the NC by starting the communication process from this icon. Refer to "2. 5. Starting and Stopping the FA library" for the way of operation. <4> This is the FA library sample program for developing applications in Visual Basic. Refer to Chapter 4 "FA library" for an explanation. <5> This is the FA library sample program for developing applications in Visual C++. Refer to Chapter 4 "FA library" for an explanation. <6> This is the List File Monitor screen. Refer to "6. 2 List File Monitor Screen Operations" for the way of operation. <7> This is the Edit List File screen. Refer to "6. 1 Edit List File Screen Operations" for the way of operation. <8> This is the Log Viewer program. Refer to Chapter 5 "Observation of FA SYSTEM for PC" for the way of operation. <9> This is the Machine Configuration program. Refer to "2.6 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION" for how to use this.
TITLE
02 01
EDIT
04.10.04 03.09.17
DATE

DRAW.NO.
B-75044EN/02-2
SHEET
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
29/62
2.4.4
Contents automatically registered into a TCP/IP SERVICE file

When FA library is installed, FA library entries are automatically registered with the TCP/IP service file so that Windows TCP/IP protocol can be used. The following table lists the services that are automatically registered. Table Automatically registered service names Service Name FANUC_PCFA_APP FANUC_PCFA_CDA FANUC_PCFA_COMM FANUC_C4_SERVER FANUC_C4_API Port Number 4096 4097 4098 8192 (*1) 8193 tcp tcp tcp udp tcp Protocol
(*1) This value is a "PORT NUMBER (UDP) " to be entered in the "ETHPRM" menu of the NC. When the port number of the table "Automatically registered service names " is already used at the time of registration, the maximum number in a services file is investigated, and a bigger value than the value is assigned. Therefore, no existing service will be nullified. In registering with a services file automatically, the file before registration is backed up automatically and it saves to the same directory as a services file. Supposing that the directory where Windows is set up is "c:\winnt", the services file and its automatically created backup file are in the following directories: C:\winnt\system32\drivers\etc\ The directory where Windows is installed is registered in the system environment variable "WINDIR". It can be checked by activating [System] on [Control Panel]. The automatically created backup file is named "services. YYYYMMDDhhmm" (where YYYY is the year, MM is the month, DD is the day, hh is the hour, and mm is the minute) from the time of automatic registration. UDP number for C4 service As described in NOTE (*1) under the table above, the same value as the FANUC_C4_SERVER service UDP port number automatically registered in the services file must be set in the corresponding parameter for all NCs. The set port number is displayed in the "UDP Number for C4 Service" dialog box automatically during installation. Set this value as a "Port number for UDP" in the "ETHPRM" dialog box of the NC.
TITLE
02 01
EDIT
04.10.04 03.09.17
DATE

DRAW.NO.
B-75044EN/02-2
SHEET
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
30/62
If you forgot to take note of the value in the "UDP Number for C4 Service" dialog box displayed during installation, you can use the following procedure to display the value automatically set up in the PC. (1) Start the Ethernet Diagnose program. Click [Start menu] -> [Programs] -> [FANUC FA Library] -> [Ethernet Diagnose]. (2) Select the [C4Service] tab and you will find the "UDP number for C4 service" currently set up in the PC to be displayed as follows:
(3) Close the Ethernet Diagnose program. Editing the TCP/IP services file To set up a value other than the one displayed as the "UDP number for C4 service" during installation, you need to edit the services file, using a text editor such as NotePad. Be careful not to enter any value already in use. WARNING Do not edit the services file unless you have working knowledge about the Ethernet and TCP/IP. If you edit it incorrectly, it is likely that not only FA library but also all Ethernet communication processes on Windows may become inoperable.
NOTE Once the services file is edited, you need to turn the power off and on again to put the editing in effect.
TITLE
02 01
EDIT
04.10.04 03.09.17
DATE

DRAW.NO.
B-75044EN/02-2
SHEET
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
31/62
2.4.5
Uninstall
FA library can be uninstalled using [Add/Remove Programs] on [Control Panel]. NOTE 1 2 The user who uninstalls FA library must have the administrator privilege. Before starting the uninstallation procedure, stop all application programs. Please uninstall "FANUC FA Library for Windows". Any files that were set up after installation are left installed. Use Explorer to delete them.
TITLE
02 01
EDIT
04.10.04 03.09.17
DATE

DRAW.NO.
B-75044EN/02-2
SHEET
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
32/62
2.4.6
Setting up DNC1 driver (WindowsXP)

Please setup the DNC1 driver when communicating with NC by DNCl. When you don't use DNC1, the procedure in this chapter is unnecessary. The procedure to use DNC1 with Windows XP is follows. (1) Install DNC1 driver by Windows XP Hardware wizard. (2) Setup DNC1 driver resources by Windows XP Device manager. The setting method in Windows 2000 is described in next paragraph "2.4.7 Setting up DNC1 driver (Windows2000)". NOTE The administrator privikge is required for the installation of the DNC1 driver and the setting of the resource.
Installing DNC1 driver

(1) Set DNC1 board to PC's ISA slot. (2) Launch "Control panel" from "Setting" in "Start menu". (3) Select "Add Hardware Wizard" and click <Next>.
TITLE
02 01
EDIT
04.10.04 03.09.17
DATE

DRAW.NO.
B-75044EN/02-2
SHEET
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
33/62
(4) Seect "Yes I have already connected the hardware" and click <Next>".
(5) Select "Add a new device" and click <Next>.
TITLE
02 01
EDIT
04.10.04 03.09.17
DATE

DRAW.NO.
B-75044EN/02-2
SHEET
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
34/62
(6) Select "Install the hardware that I manually select from a list" and click <Next>.
(7) Select "Show All Devices" and click <Next>.
TITLE
02 01
EDIT
04.10.04 03.09.17
DATE

DRAW.NO.
B-75044EN/02-2
SHEET
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
35/62
(8) Click <Have disk> and browse for the %Fpfasys%\Bin folder (%Fpfasys% is the folder where FA library was installed).
The following figure shows browsing example when FA library was installed to the installer's default folder.
(9)
Select FANUC DNC1 WinRT WDM Device" and click<Next>.
TITLE
02 01
EDIT
04.10.04 03.09.17
DATE

DRAW.NO.
B-75044EN/02-2
SHEET
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
36/62
(10) Click <Next>
(11) The following screen wi1l be displayed when setup has completed.
Please setup resources for DNC1 driver when you finished to install DNC1 driver.
TITLE
02 01
EDIT
04.10.04 03.09.17
DATE

DRAW.NO.
B-75044EN/02-2
SHEET
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
37/62
Setting resouces
(1) Launch "Control panel " from "Setting" in "Start menu". (2) Launch "System" and click <Hardware> tab and click <Device Manager>.
(3) Double click "FANUC DNC1 WinRT WDM Device".
TITLE
02 01
EDIT
04.10.04 03.09.17
DATE

DRAW.NO.
B-75044EN/02-2
SHEET
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
38/62
(4)
Click "Resources" tab and click <Set Configuration Manually>.
(5) Select "Basic configuration 0000" in the "Setting based on" combobox.
TITLE
02 01
EDIT
04.10.04 03.09.17
DATE

DRAW.NO.
B-75044EN/02-2
SHEET
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
39/62
(6) Double click and select parameters of "IRQ", "I/O Range" and "Memory Range". For each paraneters, Select the parameter with "No devices are confliction".
NOTE: l/O Range Please confirm a set value by rotary SW of the DNC1 board is corresponding to a set value by the device manager. If both are not corresponding, please change SW1 of the DNCl board after shutting down the personal computer.
The location of SW1 on DNC1 board
8 C 0 4
Relationship between the SW1 and I/O Range SW SW1 0 (default) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 I/O Range 280h - 28Fh 290h - 29Fh 220h - 22Fh 230h - 23Fh 300h - 30Fh 310h - 31Fh 320h - 32Fh 330h - 33Fh
TITLE
SW1 8 9 A B C D E F
I/O Range 100h - 10Fh 110h - 11Fh 120h - 12Fh 130h - 13Fh 140h - 14Fh 150h - 15Fh 160h - 16Fh 170h - 17Fh
02 01
EDIT
04.10.04 03.09.17
DATE

DRAW.NO.
B-75044EN/02-2
SHEET
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
40/62
(7) Please reactivate the personal computer when you set IRQ, the range of I/0, and the memory. Please confirm the following displays by starting the device manager. The yellow "!" mark in the figure (3) will disappears.
TITLE
02 01
EDIT
04.10.04 03.09.17
DATE

DRAW.NO.
B-75044EN/02-2
SHEET
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
41/62
2.4.7
Setting up DNC1 driver (Windows2000)

Please setup the DNC1 driver when communicating with NC by DNCl. When you don't use DNC1, the procedure in this chapter is unnecessary. The procedure to use DNC1 with Windows XP is a follows. (1) Install DNC1 driver by Windows 2000 Hardware wizard. (2) Setup DNC1 driver resources by Windows 2000 Device manager. The setting method in Windows XP is described in next paragraph "2.4.6 Setting up DNC1 driver (WindowsXP)" The administrator privikge is required for the installation of the DNC1 driver and the setting of the resource.
Installing DNC1 driver

(1) Set DNC1 board to PC's ISA slot. (2) Launch "Control panel" from "Setting" in "Start menu". (3) Select "Add Hardware Wisard" and click <Next>.
TITLE
02 01
EDIT
04.10.04 03.09.17
DATE

DRAW.NO.
B-75044EN/02-2
SHEET
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
42/62
(1) Seect "Add/Troubleshoot a device" and click <Next>.
(2) Select "Add a new device" and click <Next>.
TITLE
02 01
EDIT
04.10.04 03.09.17
DATE

DRAW.NO.
B-75044EN/02-2
SHEET
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
43/62
(3) Select "No, I want to select the hardware from a list" and click <Next>.
(4) Select "Other devices" and click <Next>.
TITLE
02 01
EDIT
04.10.04 03.09.17
DATE

DRAW.NO.
B-75044EN/02-2
SHEET
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
44/62
(5) Click <Have disk> and browse for the %Fpfasys%\Bin folder (%Fpfasys% is the folder where FA library was installed).
The following figure shows browsing example when FA library was installed to the installer's default folder.
(6) Select FANUC DNC1 WinRT WDM Device" and click<Next>.
TITLE
02 01
EDIT
04.10.04 03.09.17
DATE

DRAW.NO.
B-75044EN/02-2
SHEET
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
45/62
(7) Click <Next>.
(8) The following screen wi1l be displayed when setup has completed.
Please setup resources for DNC1 driver when you finished to install DNC1 driver.
Setting resources
The proccdure to setup resourccs of DNC1 driver on Windows 2000 is the same as Windows XP. Please show the "Setting resources" in "2.4.6 Setting up DNC1 driver (WindowsXP)"
TITLE
02 01
EDIT
04.10.04 03.09.17
DATE

DRAW.NO.
B-75044EN/02-2
SHEET
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
46/62
2.4.8
How to use FA library with WindowsXP Professional SP2

This paragraph describes the setting method to use the FA library on Windows XP Professional Service Pack 2. When the FAlibrary is used with XP Service Pack2, it is necessary to Setup followlng Steps regardless of the communication protocol between PC and CNC. When the FA library is used with XP Service Pack 1 or Windows 2000, the setup following steps are unnecessarily. When you use FA library on the Windows XP Professional ServicePack2, please add three programs of FA library-C4Server. exe, CDAMng. exe and CommMng. exe - to the Windows Firewall exception programs. NOTE The Administrator privilege is required. .
To setup, follow these steps; (1) Launch "Windows FireWall" from control pane. (2) Check <On> checkbox and clear <Don't allow exceptions> checkbox, and click [Exceptions] tab.
TITLE
02 01
EDIT
04.10.04 03.09.17
DATE

DRAW.NO.
B-75044EN/02-2
SHEET
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
47/62
(3) Click <Add Program. . . >.
(4) Click <Have disk> for browse the %Fpfasys%\Binfo1der. (%Fpfasys% is the folder where th FA library was installed)
TITLE
02 01
EDIT
04.10.04 03.09.17
DATE

DRAW.NO.
B-75044EN/02-2
SHEET
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
48/62
(5) Select "C4Server. exe", then click <Open>. Click <OK> in the the "Add program" dialog
(6) Add CDAMng. exe and CommMng. exe to the exception lists by above (4) and (5) procedure. (7) Please click <OK> after adding 3 programs as shown in the next figure.
TITLE
02 01
EDIT
04.10.04 03.09.17
DATE

DRAW.NO.
B-75044EN/02-2
SHEET
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
49/62
2.5
Starting and Stopping the Communication Process

This chapter describes that starting and the stop method by the [FA System] program installed in [FANUC FA Library]. To starting and stopping with FA library function, please read "4. FA library. "
Starting the Communication Process

1 Double-click [FA Library] icon in the [FANUC FA library] group.
The communication process is started in the state of an icon, and the [FANUC FA library] icon appears at the lower-left corner on the computer display.
NOTE If you execute "Start Communication Process" when no machines have been set in the Machine Setup screen, the error (0x1004011d) will occur. Before you start the communication process, currently connected machine. execute the system configuration described in "2.6 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION" and set the
Stopping the Communication Process

1 Click the running [FANUC FA library] icon which is started by the above operation. The following screen will appear.
Click the <Exit> of the menu. The communication process will be
stopped.
TITLE
02 01
EDIT
04.10.04 03.09.17
DATE

DRAW.NO.
B-75044EN/02-2
SHEET
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
50/62
2.6
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
To use FA library, you must give a distinctive information to each machine. By using the Machine Configuration screen, please set up the information such as a machine number, a machine name, a device port and communication protocol for connecting to the computer, and the way to manage NC programs. Make sure that stop the communication process before the Machine Configuration screen is started. Double-click [Machine Configuration] in the [FANUC FA Library] group.
When you have set the system configuration for the first time or when you have changed the system configuration settings, save the new settings to floppy disk according to the description in "2.6.6 Saving and Restoring Settings".
2.6.1
Machine Information Settings

1 2 Select the [Machine Information] panel in the [Machine Configuration] dialog box. Select the machine number you want to setup from the [Machine] list box.
3 4
Enter the name you want to give into the [Machine Name] text box. Select the NC type from the [Kind of Machine] list box according to the NC machine. If the type of NC you are using is not displayed, select "OTHERS".
TITLE
02 01
EDIT
04.10.04 03.09.17
DATE

DRAW.NO.
B-75044EN/02-2
SHEET
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
51/62
2.6.2
General Settings for Machine
Selecting the default directory

1 Select the [General] panel in "Machine Configuration" dialog box.
2 3
Select the machine number you want to setup from the [Machine] list box. Setup the following parameters in the [General] tab. Click the button in the right side of the [Default Directory] directory box. The file list will appear. Select the directory you want to use from this file list. Enter the extension you want to give in the [Default Extension] text box. Set the same extension as the default extension.
Setting the Subprogram Extension and List File Extension

NOTE The subprogram extension and List File extension can be set only when the Reader/Puncher interface protocol is used. Do not change this value when other protocols are used.
1 2 3
Select the [General] panel in the [Machine Configuration] dialog box. Select the machine number you want to set up from the [Machine] list box. Set up the following parameters in the [General] panel. Enter the extension used for the subprogram in the [Subprogram Extension] text box. Normally, set the same extension as the default extension.
TITLE
02 01
EDIT
04.10.04 03.09.17
DATE

DRAW.NO.
B-75044EN/02-2
SHEET
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
52/62
Enter the extension used for the List File in the [List File Extension] text box. Enter a extension different to that used for the default extension and subprogram extension. If the List File extension matches either the default extension or subprogram extension, an error will occur when you try to save the File List. 4 Click the <Save> button.
2.6.3
Communication Settings for Machine
Settings of Reader/Puncher interface

1 2 3 Select the [Communication] tab in the [Machine Configuration] dialog box. Select the machine number you want to setup from the [Machine] list box. Select "Reader/Puncher" from the [Protocol] list box.
Press the <Set Default> button and set the default. When you communicate with the NC using this default, first check that the NC parameters are at the value described in "A. Sample of NC Parameter Settings. " If communication is carried out using a value different from the settings in this Appendix, the set values in this screen must be made to match the values currently set in the NC parameters. Baud Rate : Data Length : Data Code : Parity : Stop Bit : TV Check : Send DC2 and DC4 : 9600 (bps) 8 (bits) ISO NONE 2 (bits) Checked "X" Checked "X" Checked "X"
Send ER(%) at the head and the end :
TITLE
02 01
EDIT
04.10.04 03.09.17
DATE

DRAW.NO.
B-75044EN/02-2
SHEET
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
53/62
In the [Settings] group box, set the value that is not set using the <Set Default> button. [For Details] does not need to be specified. Select the RS-232-C port number from the [Port] list box.
Settings of DNC1/Ethernet
1 2 3 Select the [Communication] tab in the [Machine Configuration] dialog box. Select the machine number you want to set up from the [Machine] list box. Select "DNC1/Ethernet" from the [Protocol] list box.
Press the <Set Default> button and set the default. The following value is set: C4 server IP address: 127. 0. 0. 1
NOTE Do not change this value.
In the [Settings] group box, set the value that is not set using the <Set Default> button. [For Details] does not need to be specified. Enter the IP address" set to the NC to be connected in the [NC IP Address] text box. Enter the "TCP Port No. " set in the NC to be connected in the [NC TCP Port No. ] text box.
TITLE
02 01
EDIT
04.10.04 03.09.17
DATE

DRAW.NO.
B-75044EN/02-2
SHEET
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
54/62
Click the <Comm Test> button, then check that it can be communicated to CNC by DNC1/Ethernet. Please turn on the CNC before checking.
Displays for the correct setup When the IP addresses for the PC and NC are set up correctly, and the NC power is on, it is displayed as follows.
<1> PING test. .
<2> Get System Information test. . .
<3> C4Api test. . .
<1> "PING test. . . " is a result of testing the PING command in the NC. <2>"Get System Information test. . . " is the system information of the NC. CNC Type:Indicates an NC type. 15 16 18 21 PD PH M T MM TT MT P Series 15 i (Caution: This model cannot be connected to FA library. ) Series 16 i Series 18 i Series 21 i Power Mate i -D Power Mate i -H Machining center Lathe M series 2 path control T series 2/3 path control (Caution: Cannot be connected) T series with the complex machining (Caution: Cannot be connected) Punch press
TITLE
M/T:Indicates an M/T type.
(Caution: Cannot be connected)
02 01
EDIT
04.10.04 03.09.17
DATE

DRAW.NO.
B-75044EN/02-2
SHEET
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
55/62
Laser
(Caution: Cannot be connected)
Series:Indicates the CNC software series number, using a 4 digit character string. Version :Indicates the CNC software version number, using a 4 digit character string. Max axes :Indicates the maximum number of controllable axes. Axes :Indicates the number of controlled axes. <3> "C4Api test. . . " indicates whether the NC power is on or off. Live=True means PC recognize that the NC power is on. Live=False means PC recognize that the NC power is off. Incorrect setting (1) If an IP address set up for the NC or PC is incorrect, or the NC power is off, it is displayed as follows.
If the "Reply From. . . " line does not appear, the probable causes are: (1) The NC power is off. (2) The NC IP address is different from the one set up in the Configuration dialog box. (3) The NC network address or the host address is incorrect. Refer to an applicable Ethernet board manual for explanations about the IP address. Refer the Ethernet board manual about the IP address.
TITLE
02 01
EDIT
04.10.04 03.09.17
DATE

DRAW.NO.
B-75044EN/02-2
SHEET
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
56/62
Incorrect setting (2) When the IP addresses set up for the PC and NC are correct, and the NC power is on, if any other kind of setting is incorrect, it is displayed as follows.
If the "Get System Information test ..." line does not appear, the probable causes are: (1) An IP address for the PC or the devices for which a TCP/IP has been set up, rather than for the NC, has been specified. (2) The "TCP port number" set for the NC is incorrect. If the message "No option (Extended driver and libraries function) " is displayed, the NC lacks the "Extended driver and libraries function" option. But the embedded ethernet board does not need this option.
TITLE
02 01
EDIT
04.10.04 03.09.17
DATE

DRAW.NO.
B-75044EN/02-2
SHEET
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
57/62
Incorrect setting (3) When the IP addresses set up for the PC and NC are correct, and the NC power is on, if any other kind of setting is incorrect, it could be displayed as follows.
Unlike the display of correct settings, "C4Api test ..." contains "Live=False". In this case, the probable causes are: (1) The "PC's Udp port setting" displayed when FA library was installed in the PC does not match the UDP port number set up for the NC. On the [C4Service] tab, the "PC's Udp port setting" for the current PC appears as shown below. Ensure that it matches the UDP port number set up for the NC. If it does not match, change the UDP port number set up for the NC so that it matches the following display.
(2) The "Time Interval" for the NC is 0. Enter 50. (3) A router exists between PC and NC. Cannot place a router between a PC and CNC. 7 After confirming the communication test, close this program, and then click <SAVE> button on Machine Configuration screen.
TITLE
02 01
EDIT
04.10.04 03.09.17
DATE

DRAW.NO.
B-75044EN/02-2
SHEET
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
58/62
2.6.4
Download Settings for Machine

You can set the subprogram transfer method and List File transfer method. For details on the subprogram transfer function, see "1. 5 Subprogram Transfer Function, " and for details on the List File transfer function, see "1. 6 List File Transfer Function. " NOTE You can set the subprogram transfer method and List File transfer method only when the Reader/Puncher interface protocol is used. Do not change this value when other protocols are used.
Setting the sub program file Transfer Method

1 Select the [Download] tab in the [Machine Configuration] dialog box.
2 If you select either of "Separate Transfer" or "Extended Transfer" in the [Transfer Styles for Sub Programs] frame, you can set the following:
TITLE
02 01
EDIT
04.10.04 03.09.17
DATE

DRAW.NO.
B-75044EN/02-2
SHEET
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
59/62
Calling Type You can set the code used for calling the subprogram. You can set a combination of the M98, G65 and G66 codes. Masks of Sub Programs You can set the subprograms not to transfer even if the main program calls a subprogram. You can set this in 1000-line units. So, for example, you can set "Not to send subprograms in lines 8000 to 9000 as they are stored in NC memory. " 1st to 3rd Directory Searching Sub Program You can set up to three directories for storing the subprograms. 1 to 3 indicates the search order. That is, when a subprogram having the same number is located in [1st Directory Searching Sub Program] and [2nd Directory Searching Sub Program], the subprogram in [1st Directory Searching Sub Program] is transferred. NOTE The subprogram is searched for only from the directories set at [1st to 3rd Directory Searching Sub Programs]. Subprograms will not be searched for even if [Default Directory] is set unless you set [1st to 3rd Directory Searching Sub Programs].
Setting the List File Transfer Method

1 2 Select the [Download] tab in the [Machine Configuration] dialog box. Select either of "Separate Transfer" or "Extended Transfer" in the [Transfer Styles for NC Programs Registered in List File] frame. 3 If you have selected "Extended Transfer", also set [Wait for send buffer to reach 0 before proceeding to next record in extended transfer mode].
TITLE
02 01
EDIT
04.10.04 03.09.17
DATE

DRAW.NO.
B-75044EN/02-2
SHEET
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
60/62
2.6.5
Upload Settings for Machine

1 Select the [Upload] panel in the [Machine Configuration] dialog box. These settings are not used now but are provided for the future. Setup as the following figure. WARNING If invalid settings are specified, the FA SYSTEM for PC might behave unexpectedly.
2.6.6
Saving and Restoring Settings

The FA library settings that are set in the Machine Setup screen are written to a data file on your computer by clicking the <Save> button. The installation floppy disk holds the FA library communication program and various operation screens. Even if your computer crashes, you can install FA library again once your computer is repaired. However, there is no means for restoring FA library settings that are set in the Machine Setup screen when your computer crashes. You can save FA library settings to floppy disk in case you computer crashes. You can also restore FA library settings. If you have changed the settings, be sure to save the new settings to floppy disk. Click the <Save> button in the Machine Setup screen. The following [Save and Restore Setting] dialog box appears.
Click the <Return> button to return to the Machine Setup screen.

TITLE
02 01
EDIT
04.10.04 03.09.17
DATE

DRAW.NO.
B-75044EN/02-2
SHEET
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
61/62
Saving Settings
1 Insert the floppy disk that you want to save the settings to into the floppy disk drive. Before you insert the floppy disk, make sure that it is not write-protected. 2 3 "The "Insert the floppy disk into the A: drive. " message box appears. Click the <OK> button. The save status is displayed at the bottom of the screen.
Saving and restoring of settings are carried out not for each machine that is set but for all machine settings.
NOTE Before you save the settings to 3.5" floppy disk, do not forget to click the <Save> button in the Machine Setup screen.
Restoring Settings
1 2 3 Insert the floppy disk that you made by saving data into the floppy disk drive. The "Insert the floppy disk into the A: drive. " message box appears. Click the <OK> button. The restore status is displayed at the bottom of the screen.
Formatting the Floppy Disk

1 2 3 Insert the floppy disk that you want to format into the floppy disk drive. Before you insert the floppy disk, make sure that it is not write-protected. The "Insert the floppy disk into the A: drive. " message box appears. Click the <OK> button. The window for formatting appears. Press the <Start> button.
TITLE
02 01
EDIT
04.10.04 03.09.17
DATE

DRAW.NO.
B-75044EN/02-2
SHEET
DESCRIPTION
FANUC LTD.
62/62

Fanuc FA System For PC Operator

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Fanuc FA System For PC Operator

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Fanuc FA System For PC Operator

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

FA SYSTEM FOR PC

Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.

Precautions to Operate NC Machine

Precautions to Operate FA SYSTEM for PC

- Precaution to DNC Operation

- About Exclusive Control of Files

PREFACE Content of This Manual

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS PREFACE 1. ABOUT FA SYSTEM FOR PC ................................................................ 1

1.6 LIST FILE TRANSFER FUNCTION .......................................................................... 18

3. NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT ........................................................... 47

CONTENTS 3.2.3 3.2.4 3.2.5 3.2.6 3.2.7 3.2.8

4.2 SYSTEM SERVICE................................................................................................... 95

4.3 REQUEST SERVICE .............................................................................................. 107

4.4 DIAGNOSIS AND OTHER SERVICES ................................................................... 159

4.5 LOG LIBRARY ........................................................................................................ 163

5. OBSERVATION OF FA SYSTEM FOR PC........................................... 166

5.2 LogServer ............................................................................................................... 177

6. LIST FILE MANAGEMENT ................................................................. 179

6.2 LIST FILE MONITOR SCREEN OPERATIONS ...................................................... 189

C. ERROR CODE .................................................................................... 214 D. DNC1................................................................................................... 235

1. ABOUT FA SYSTEM FOR PC

ABOUT FA SYSTEM FOR PC

1. ABOUT FA SYSTEM FOR PC

The Offer of NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT(A08B-9510-J511)

The Offer of FA LIBRARY(A08B-9510-J510)

1. ABOUT FA SYSTEM FOR PC

DNC1 Board NC Computer NC

1. ABOUT FA SYSTEM FOR PC

Maximum of 8 NCs (NOTE)

Ethernet board NC Computer NC

1. ABOUT FA SYSTEM FOR PC

RELATION BETWEEN FA SYSTEM FOR PC AND PROTOCOLS

Functions of FA LIBRARY (A08B-9510-J510)

1. ABOUT FA SYSTEM FOR PC Functions of NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT (A08B-9510-J511)

1. ABOUT FA SYSTEM FOR PC

Transmitting by Operating NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT

between Machine 1 and directory C

' File ' Directory, Drive

1. ABOUT FA SYSTEM FOR PC

Files that are stored in default-directory

The list of NC programs stored in the NC memory

A NC program can be transmitted by the menu of the screen.

Transmitting by Using FA LIBRARY

1. ABOUT FA SYSTEM FOR PC

File Name NC program number

The file specified by the full-path is selected.

Default-directory for Machine 1 in Computer

FILE_A.TXT FILE_B.TXT O0001.DAT O0003.DAT WORK1.DOC WORK2.DOC V V V

When the full-path C: PATH FILE.DOC is set to the

key, the specified file is downloaded independently of the default-directory.

1. ABOUT FA SYSTEM FOR PC

The uploaded NC program is saved according to the specified path.

Transmitting by Operating NC Side

1. ABOUT FA SYSTEM FOR PC

The Requirement for Transmitting Program File Name

Usable Key NC program number File Number

DNC1, DNC2 Reader/ Puncher

DNC1/Ethernet Downloading and Uploading Program Are Not Possible by Operating NC

1. ABOUT FA SYSTEM FOR PC